Home

Mercedes Benz 2008 GL 320 CDI User's Manual

1. KEYLESS GO start stop button 1 USA only 2 Canada only gt Make sure KEYLESS GO start stop button Q is inserted in the starter switch gt page 43 If you wish to start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS GO feature remove the KEYLESS GO start stop button from the starter switch gt page 43 For information on turning off the engine with KEYLESS GO see Turning off with KEYLESS GO gt page 69 Gasoline engine gt Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P gt page 155 Depress the brake pedal during the starting procedure Do not depress the accelerator Press KEYLESS GO start stop button Q once The engine starts if the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in the vehicle Diesel engine gt M Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P Depress the brake pedal during the starting procedure Do not depress the accelerator Press KEYLESS GO start stop button Q once The engine preglows and starts if the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in the vehicle If the engine is at operating temperature the time the engine needs to preglow is reduced Starting difficulties If the engine does not start as described carry out the following steps gt If you are starting th
2. GL 320 CDI GL 450 GL 550 200 6 in 5096 mm 83 7 in 2127 mm 76 0 in 1930 mm 76 9 in 1954 mm 72 4 in 75 6 in 1840 mm 1920 mm 72 4 in 76 8 in 1840 mm 1950 mm 121 1 in 3075 mm 7 8 in 10 9 in 197 mm 277 mm 7 8 in 12 1 in 197 mm 307 mm 39 7 ft 12 1 m 65 0 in 1651 mm 65 1 in 1654 mm Technical data Weights Vv Weights Roof load max 198 Ib 90 kg Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants Capacities Warning J Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match Therefore only use Comply with all valid regulations with re products tested and approved by spect to handling storing and disposing of Mercerdes Benz service fluids Otherwise you could endanger persons or the environment Please refer to the Factory Approved a Service Products pamphlet USA only or Keep service fluids out of the reach of inquire at an authorized Mercedes Benz children Light Truck Center Model Capacity Engine with oil filter GL 320 CDI 9 0 US qt 8 5 I GL450 GL550 9 5 US qt 9 01 Automatic transmission All models 9 5 US qt 9 0 I Transfer case single speed All models 0 5 US qt 0 5 I Transfer case double speed All models 1 6 US gt 1 5 I Front axle All models T2 US at E Rear axle All models 1 2 US qt 1 1 1 Rear axle with differential lock All models 1 7 US gt 1 6 1 Power steering All models approx 1 3 US qt 1 2 I For health reasons you should p
3. Display message DISTRONIC Available Again Currently Unavailable See Operator s Manual Possible cause consequence Possible solution Distronic had been deactivated and gt Activate Distronic gt page 266 is available again Distronic is deactivated because gt Leave the area of the external interference the functionality is impaired by external interferences e g high frequency sources such as toll stations soeed measuring systems etc gt Activate Distronic again gt page 266 when the message DISTRONIC Available Again appears Distronic is deactivated because Try to activate Distronic again the Distronic sensor has not gt page 266 when the message sensed any other vehicles or DISTRONIC Available Again appears objects e g road sign or such fora long time Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution DISTRONIC Currently Unavailable Distronic is deactivated because gt Clean the Distronic cover in the radiator See Operator s Manual SeEa HED chroniceicovcmintne grille gt page 430 radiator grille is dirty gt Restart the vehicle e the functionality is impaired by Distronic becomes operational again without heavy precipitation or fog the engine being restarted when e dirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving e g slush or snow e the system recognizes full sensor availability due t
4. gt Immediately apply the brake to avoid a collision Under no circumstances should the driver await the intermittent warning sound before braking See the follow ing warning note The intermittent warning sound ceases and the distance warning lamp goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is again estab lished Controls in detail Driving systems Warning A N An intermittent warning sounds and the distance warning lamp in the instru ment cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle s current speed indicate that Distronic will not be ca pable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance which creates a danger of a collision Immediately brake the vehicle to increase your distance to the preceding vehicle The warning sound is intended as a final caution in which you should intercede with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially danger ous situation Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking This will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoid ed Tailgating increases the risk of an accident Warning A N Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi mum deceleration of 6 5 ft s 2 m s This corresponds to about 20 of the maximum deceleration of your vehicle Distro
5. gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle speed decreases in incre ments of 5 mph Canada 10 km h The new speed is set and the vehicle will decelerate Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed Controls in detail Driving systems Setting to last stored speed Resume function Warning A N The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit Possible acceleration or decelera tion differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and or serious injury to you and others gt Briefly pull the cruise control lever in di rection of arrow 4 gt page 256 The cruise control resumes to the last set speed or if no speed is stored it will set and store the current speed gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The last set speed appears in the multi function display for approximately 5 seconds Distronic Canada only When activated the Distronic adaptive cruise control system increases the driving convenience afforded by the cruise control while traveling on expressways and other major roadways e Ifthe Distronic distance sensor detects a slower moving vehicle directly ahead your vehicle speed will be reduced so that you follow that vehicle at your preset following distance e lf there is no vehicle directly ahead of you Distronic w
6. 514 Replacing wiper blades 0006 516 Front wiper blades seeceeee 516 Rear wiper blade cccseeeeeeeee 517 EL E E A 519 Preparing the vehicle 00 519 Mounting the spare wheel 520 Bleeding the fuel system diesel engine Only sccccneeeeees 527 BALONY mcare AS 528 Disconnecting removing reinstalling and reconnecting the battery 530 Charging the battery 006 935 JUMP starting oe cccceeeeeeeeeeeees 536 Towing the vehicle cccccseseeceees 538 Installing towing eye bolt 540 Stranded vehicle cccccssseceees 542 TNS OS eres AEI E E A 543 Fuse box in engine compartment 544 Fuse box in cargo compartment 544 Fuse box in passenger compartment 945 Emergency engine shut down 545 A Fuels coolants lubricants 562 Technical data eee 547 Capacities acensis 562 Parts SOVICE aers cnet tan E 548 Engine Ol aseista 564 Warranty coverage sessseeeesssesseeeee 549 Engine oil additives 000000000 564 Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant 564 Information Booklet 008 549 Brake flUid ceceeceeeeseseseeteteeeees 564 Identification labels cccccceeeeeees 950 Premium unleaded gasoline Layout of poly V belt drive 992 gasoline ENINE ceeee
7. Date of manufacture The date of manufacture G gt page 411 identifies the week and year of manufac ture The first two figures identify the week starting with 0 1 to represent the first full week of the calendar year The second two figures represent the year For example 3202 represents the 32nd week of 2002 Operation Tires and wheels Maximum tire load C Maximum tire load rating For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support Warning TK Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure For more information on tire load rating gt page 407 For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities gt page 389 Maximum tire inflation pressure aD Q Maximum permissible tire inflation pressure i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire Always follow the re
8. Roof rails Crossbars The maximum roof load gt page 561 of any add on roof equipment is reduced by the unladen weight of the crossbars 13 7 lbs 6 2 kg Four keys and an Allen wrench required for installing and removing are included with the crossbars The keys and the Allen wrench are stored with the vehicle tool kit under the cargo compart ment floor gt page 490 Controls in detail Loading 1i Spare parts are available as Mercedes Benz accessories Contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Installing the crossbars Warning Please follow these installation instructions carefully Caution should be exercised to avoid damage to the vehicle while installing the crossbars Also be careful not to injure yourself or others while installing and ad justing the crossbars or loading items on them Each individual step of the installation in structions the warning notices the general safety precautions and the instructions for use must be followed exactly If the cross bars are not mounted correctly they and the objects attached to them could come loose from your vehicle and cause an accident thereby injuring you and other per sons and or causing damage to property including damage to your vehicle Warning A N Every time the crossbars are mounted be fore you set off on a journey and periodically during longer journeys check all the screws on the bars to make
9. i A gt To lower head restraint push release button in direction of arrow aul aie snes af ihe S rasta o COMKOLSYSTEM and press down on head restraint 1 restraint pag gt While seated reach behind you with Warning A N both hands and find lower edge of the head restraint You must make sure no one can become gt Adjust the head restraint to the desired trapped or injured by the moving steering position by pushing or pulling on the wheel when the easy entry exit feature is lower edge of the head restraint cush activated ion To stop steering wheel movement do one of For more information see Seats the following gt page 130 e Move steering wheel adjustment stalk gt page 51 e Press one of the stored position buttons or memory button M gt page 141 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel will return to its last set position when you e close the driver s door with the ignition switched on or e insert the SmartKey into the starter switch or press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 43 once with the driver s door closed Getting started a The last set steering wheel position is stored when
10. Alarm system indicator lamp Seat ventilation driver s side Seat heating drivers side Adaptive damping system ADS switch Electronic Stability Program ESP switch Parktronic system deactivation switch Hazard warning flasher Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp Page 110 140 138 278 105 291 149 85 447 448 Lower part Item Storage compartment with e Power outlet or e Ashtray with cigarette lighter Cup holder 3 Armrest storage tele phone compartment release 4 Card ticket holder removable Depending on vehicle configuration Page 317 324 321 320 317 320 At a glance Center console At a glance Overhead control panel P68 00 4450 31 oS Oooo COE Item Left reading lamp switch Rear interior lighting switch Automatic interior lighting switch Front interior lighting switch Right reading lamp switch Front right interior lamp Power tilt sliding sunroof switch Tele Aid emergency call system button Interior rear view mirror Front right reading lamp Page 149 149 149 149 149 149 251 334 208 149 Item Front left reading lamp Garage door opener Vehicles without telephone installed Hands free microphone for Tele Aid emergency call system Vehicles with telephone installed Hands free microphone for Tele Aid emergency call system
11. Controls in detail Automatic transmission Shifting from D R or N to P If you want to select park position P with the transmission being in drive position D reverse gear R or neutral position N gt gt With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed Step firmly on parking brake pedal gt page 67 Press button on gear selector lever in direction of arrow gt page 189 to select park position P Release the brake pedal BE Shift the automatic transmission directly from drive position D to reverse gear R from reverse gear R to drive position D or directly to park position P only when the vehicle is stopped Otherwise the automatic transmission could be damaged When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow see Rocking the vehicle gt page 196 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Shifting from D or R to N If you want to select neutral position N with the transmission being in drive position D or reverse gear R gt With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed gt Step firmly on parking brake pedal gt page 67 When the vehicle needs to be moved with the engine switched off and the transmission set to neutral position N gt page 192 do not depress the parking brake pedal gt Move gear selector lever up to resis tance point when in drive position D or down to resistance point when in rever
12. TYPE MPV VTUM C776 on ES xt vd a 4JGC a MANUFACTURED UNDER CONTRACT FOR DUMLERCHRYSLER AG NN Example certification label Canada vehicles 2 Paintwork code VIN Data shown on certification label are for illustration purpose only These data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration Refer to certification label on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle wed P99 00 3275 31 a x i N Second row seat VIN gt Fold the carpet forwards The VIN is now visible When ordering parts please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers Technical data Identification labels Ti O e a i ct Emission control information label includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards 6 Engine number engraved on engine 7 VIN lower edge of windshield Technical data Layout of poly V belt drive GL 320 CDI GL 450 GL 550 1 E 2 Oo O O Vain p oO D Q 9 OF OP 6 of OF P13 22 2096 31 1 Coolant pump 1 Idler pulley 2 Idler pulley 2 Idler pulley 3 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Automatic belt tensioner 4 Power steering pump 4 Power steering pump Air conditioning compressor Air conditioning compressor 6 Crankshaft 6 Crankshaft 7 Idler pulley 7 Coolant pump Generator alternator Generator alternator Vv
13. Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster Certain warning and malfunction messag es are accompanied by an audible signal Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator s Manual Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system gt page 167 displays both cleared and uncleared messages High priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 152 or button EAN Bed z or on the multifunction steering wheel Other messages of high priority and mes sages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 152 or button EAN Red z or on the multifunction steering wheel They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory gt page 167 Remember that clearing a message will only make the mes sage disappear Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear Practical hints What to do if A Warning All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and where a malfunction is indicated addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Merced
14. Warning Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Tires and wheels Overinflated tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling characteristics cause uneven tire wear be more prone to damage from road hazards adversely affect ride comfort increase stopping distance A Warning Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Operation Tires and wheels Tire labeling Besides tire name sales designation and manufacturer name a number of markings can be found on a tire Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle s tires P40 10 3561 31 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards gt page 413 2 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN gt page 410 3 Maximum tire load gt page 412 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure gt page 412 Manufacturer 6 Tire ply material gt page 415 7 Tire size designation load and speed rating gt page 406 Load identification gt page 410 9
15. e the ignition is switched off gt page 41 e the position is stored in memory gt page 141 With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel tilts upwards when you e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or e open the driver s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 gt page 41 or the KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 1 gt page 43 If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy entry exit feature is activated The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted when the engine is started Adjusting Warning A N Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in mo tion All steering wheel adjustment must be completed before setting the vehicle in mo tion Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose con trol of the vehicle Steering wheel adjustment manual Warning A N Only adjust the steering wheel with the vehi cle at a standstill and make sure the steer ing wheel is securely locked in place before driving off gt D Getting started Adjusting aa Driving without the steering wheel adjust ment locked may cause an unexpected steering wheel movement which could cause the driver to lose control of the vehi cle Make sure the steering wheel is secure ly locked
16. gt page 230 for the passenger side to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment The following symbols are found on the buttons Symbol Function Drivers Passen side ger side Directs air to the windshield and side air vents Directs air through the center side and rear passenger compartment air vents Directs air to the footwells and side air vents gt Press the desired air distribution but ton gt page 230 The indicator lamp on the desired but ton goes out Adjusting the air distribution for the center and side air vents Opening the center air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 228 to the right The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are open Closing the center air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 228 to the left The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are closed Opening the side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 3 and 11 gt page 228 to the right The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are open Closing the side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 3 and 11 gt page 228 to the left The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are closed Adjusting air volume Five blower speeds are available gt Press button to decrease or button to increase air volume gt page 230 to the desired level The indicator lamp on button MAg g
17. gt page 318 Press and hold button Q for longer than 2 seconds A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting Call will appear in the multifunction display When the connection is established the message Call Connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and lo cation subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals i While the call is connected you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV button on the COMAND system A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be estab lished Information regarding the operation of your vehicle the nearest Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or Mercedes Benz USA products and servic es is available to you For more details concerning the Tele Aid system please visit www mbusa com and use your ID and password sent to you sep arately to learn more USA only The indicator lamp in the Information button remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self check after switching on the ignition togeth er with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button Bq See system self check gt page 332 if the indi cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than appro
18. heating power depending on outside temperature Warning VAN e air flows onto the windshield and the door windows side air vents must be Fogged windows impair visibility open endangering you and others If the windows begin to fog on the inside switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging If interior win dow fogging persists make sure the air conditioning page 216 is activated or press button ERJ e the air conditioning compressor switches on at outside temperatures above approximately 41 F 5 C for air drying Controls in detail Climate control Air recirculation mode with conve nience closing and opening feature Activating Deactivating gt Press button gt page 216 The indicator lamp on the button comes on i The air recirculation mode is activated auto matically at high outside temperatures The indicator lamp on button is not lit when the air recirculation mode is switched on auto matically A quantity outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes If you have turned off the air conditioning page 224 or the outside temperature is below 41 F 5 C the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically A To cool the interior as fast as possible the climate control automatically switches to air recirculation The indicator lamp on button is not lit when the air recirculation mode has been switched on automatica
19. Controls in detail Automatic transmission Effect Steering wheel gearshift control MPA mhe transmission shifts through With drive position D selected you can second gear only limit or extend the gear range Allows the use of engine s a T Allow engine to warm up under low load use braking power when driving Do not place full load on the engine until the e on steep downgrades operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped e in mountainous regions e under extreme operating Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended Left b limiti a conditions period when driving off on slippery road Left pelt me gearTange or EN EE EEN E E surfaces This may cause serious damage to the downshift j p drivetrain which is not covered by the 2 Right button extending gear range or first gear only Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty upshift cl nee earnen You cannot shift with the steering wheel braking effect on very steep or gearshift buttons when the transmission is in lengthy downgrades position P N or R Downshifting Warning A N On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced Controls in detail Upshifting gt Briefly press right shift button The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This
20. Off road 2 3 1 in 80 mm Off road 1 1 2 in 30 mm Highway 0 in 0 mm High speed 0 6 in 15 mm i Vehicles with ADS Depending on the ADS setting page 278 the vehicle will be lowered to the high speed level when traveling at higher speeds At speeds be low 40 mph 64 km h at the latest it will be re turned to the highway level i The high speed level is not available if tow ing a trailer For more information on towing a trailer see Trailer towing gt page 364 You can only select the off road levels be low a certain speed At higher speeds the message Level Selection Not Permitted appears in the multifunction display You can select Off road level 1 selectable below 60 mph 96 km h Off road level 2 selectable below 40 mph 64 km h Off road level 3 selectable below 20 mph 30 km h Off road levels A Vehicle off road level 3 is not intended for use on paved roads This vehicle level is only intended for driving on rough terrain under special requirements Warning e Only select off road level 3 if you are driving on rough terrain under especially difficult conditions e Adapt your driving style to the modified conditions e Do not exceed a speed of 20 mph 30 km h e Avoid extreme quick steering move ments e Keep in mind that the vehicle s driving characteristics are modified You should therefore drive in off road level 3 with particular caution
21. Operator s Manual GL Class S Mercedes Benz GL Class 1 6 45 8 4 7 4 8 1 Order No 6515 4276 13 Part No 164 584 74 81 Edition A 2008 GL 320 CDI GL 450 GL 550 Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes Benz Your selection of our product is a demon stration of your trust in our company name Furthermore it exemplifies your de sire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service Your Mercedes Benz represents the ef forts of many skilled engineers and crafts men To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passen gers we ask you to make a small invest ment of time e Please read this manual carefully then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference e Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual They are de signed to acquaint you with the opera tion of your Mercedes Benz Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occu pants We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe pleasurable driving Mercedes Benz USA LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Introduction ccceceececesceceececees 9 Product information eccscescecesceees 9 Operators Manual ccccccseecceeeeees 10 Service and warranty information
22. P54 10 2682 31 Battery shown removed for illustration 9 Battery ventilation hose 3 Vent plug gt Carry out step 10 to reconnect the battery gt page 534 gt Follow steps 5 to 1 in reverse order to completely reinstall the battery gt page 533 to gt page 530 Step 10 Reconnecting gt Ifthe battery has been removed first carry out step 8 in reverse order gt page 534 gt Open the drivers door gt Make sure all electrical consumers are turned off gt Make sure the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 Open the driver s door With the driver s door open the vehicle s on board elec tronics have status 0 same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch gt page 41 gt Connect the positive lead to the posi tive terminal and fasten it s cover gt page 533 gt Connect the negative lead to the nega tive terminal gt page 533 BE vever invert the terminal connections The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power e g due to reconnection e Set the clock gt page 174 Vehicles with COMAND system with naviga tion module Time and date are set auto matically e Synchronize the door windows gt page 249 e Synchronize the power tilt sliding sunroof gt page 253 e Synchronize t
23. Power windows 1 Ifthe upward movement of a door window is blocked during the closing procedure the door window will stop and open slightly gt Remove the obstruction gt Pull the respective door window switch past the resistance point again and release If the door window still does not close when there is no obstruction pull and hold the respec tive power window switch The door window will then close without the obstruction sensor function Stopping door windows during Express operation gt Press or pull the respective door window switch again Hinged quarter windows The switches for opening and closing the hinged quarter windows are located on the door control panel of the driver s door gt page 35 o Q Hinged quarter windows opening 2 Hinged quarter windows closing Opening gt Press and release switch Q To stop the hinged quarter window gt Press and release switch Q once more Closing gt Press and release switch 2 To stop the hinged quarter window gt Press and release switch 2 once more When the obstruction sensor detects the hinged quarter window is blocked during the closing process it will stop and open slightly Synchronizing the door windows The door windows must be resynchronized after the battery was disconnected if the door windows cannot be fully opened Express open or closed Express close Each door window mus
24. Removing blind ZO oo es oe 8 oe F a F325 e l l Blind installed behind second row seats 1 Release button 2 Blind gt Roll the blind up ep Before removing cargo compartment cover blind behind the third row seats fold the left or right third row seat forward gt page 305 After wards return the left or right third row seat into its original position Controls in detail Loading Push release button Q Pull blind to the left against the spring pressure until the spring in the cover audibly engages Remove the blind Controls in detail Loading Cargo net Use of the cargo net is a particularly impor tant safety factor when the vehicle is load ed higher than the top of the seat Warning J backrests with smaller objects For your Safety always use the cargo net when Make sure the cargo net is properly engaged transporting cargo top and bottom position and the tightening belts are securely fastened The cargo net can be installed in two locations Never use a damaged cargo net To help avoid personal injury from smaller objects being thrown around in the occu pant compartment during a collision or sud den maneuver always use cargo net when transporting cargo The cargo net cannot prevent the movement of large heavier objects into the passenger compartment in an accident Such items must be properly secured using the cargo tie down rings gt
25. Storage compartment in front center console ay Depending on vehicle configuration the lower storage compartment contains an ashtray gt page 321 1S a f 8 00 4117 gt Briefly press the front of the cover The cover opens automatically Controls in detail i In vehicles with enhanced off road package the upper storage compartment contains a control panel gt page 204 or gt page 283 The cover opens automatically Useful features Storage telephone compartment un der front center armrest 1 Button to open storage telephone compartment gt The mobile phone cradle page 329 the Roadside Assistance button gt page 335 and the Information button gt page 336 are located in the storage telephone compart ment Controls in detail Useful features 2 Storage telephone compartment 3 Coin holder Opening the storage telephone com partment gt Pull button Q and lift up armrest The coin holders 8 are located in front of storage telephone compartment 2 Rear storage compartments Depending on the vehicle configuration your vehicle may be equipped with three storage compartments in the front of the rear seats i Depending on vehicle equipment the upper storage compartment may be replaced by a control panel for example in vehicles with rear climate control page 226 or rear automatic climate control gt page 241
26. The self diagnosis has not been completed yet Possible solution When the voltage is above this value again the ESP is operational again and the message in the multifunction display should disappear If the message in the multifunction display does not disappear gt Have the generator alternator and the battery checked gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible As soon as the brakes have cooled off the 4 ETS switches on again The message in the multifunction display disap pears and the ESP warning lamp goes out The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph 20 km h Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause consequence _ Possible solution P SIE 1 Pole MN You have attempted to start the gt Set the automatic transmission to Ue Shar ile ine engine with the KEYLESS GO position P or N start stop button while the auto oe Make sure the brake pedal is depressed matic transmission was set to when attempting to start the engine poe MON K O 2 with the KEYLESS GO start stop but ton OnE M Ue IP You have tried to shift the automat gt Stop the vehicle when vehicle l ic transmission into position P us Apply the parking brake gt page 67 1S ae o tl ing the gear selector lever although the vehicle is still in motion SRS Restraint Sys Malfunction The system is malfu
27. Warning UN Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning A N Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor rectly restrained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one per son at a time Warning A N Read and observe the additional warning no tices printed in the Safety and Security section gt page 78 and gt page 86 1 Seat belt outlet 2 Latch plate 3 Buckle 4 Release button gt With a smooth motion pull the belt out of seat belt outlet gt Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips gt Push latch plate into buckle gt page 54 until it clicks gt If necessary tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up Seat belt height adjustment 1 Release button gt Press release button 1 and move the seat belt height adjuster upward or dow
28. csececeeees 36 Getting started cc ccceeeeeees 39 TO CICS sersan o 40 Unlocking with the SmartKey 40 Unlocking with KEYLESS GO 41 Starter switch positions 41 AdIUSUNE crcecerceesntcitinniaccenwee oan 45 CEES E EE 45 Steering Wheel cccssssccseseceeees 48 MTOI anane 51 DEVI ss 53 Fastening the seat belts 53 Starting the engine sssenseeeesseess 56 Parking Drake cceeccceeeeeceeeeeeees 59 Driving Oi cecina 60 Switching on headlamps 61 PUR SIENA erar 62 Windshield WIDELPS cccceeeeceeees 62 Rear window wiper washer 64 Problems while driving 000008 65 Parking and lOCKING cccsseceeseeeeeeeee 67 Parking Drake cseeccceseesceeeeeeees 67 Switching off headlampe 68 Turning off the engine 006 68 Releasing seat belts ceeeee 70 SS E Memory FUNCTION cccceeeeeeeenes 141 Safety and Security 08 73 Controls in detail 111 Storing positions into memory 142 Occupant Safety c cccccsssssseeceneees 74 Locking and unlocking cccee 112 Recalling positions from memory 142 PA E 76 UME CY itaiaasioaisenat eineranttiete iauew UTZ TSIEN eer 143 Occupant Classification System 8 1 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 115 Exterior lamp switch 0 143 Seat belts
29. e Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver s door gt page 496 e Lock the vehicle as described in the Practical hints section gt page 497 e Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle battery connections checked page 528 If the SmartKey is malfunctioning contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Factory setting Global unlocking gt Press button Ig All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed The vehicle will lock again automatically and rearm the anti theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of un locking if e neither door nor tailgate is opened e the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch e the central locking switch is not activated Global locking gt Press button eg With the tailgate and all doors closed the turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Selective setting If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing button only unlocks the driver s door and the fuel filler flap gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp G gt page 112 flashes twice The SmartKey will then function as follows Unlocking driver s door and
30. e when the automatic transmission is set to position P R or N e if the ESP is switched off e if the ESP has switched off due to a malfunction Setting the current speed gt Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2 gt page 265 Distronic is activated and the current speed Is set The currently set speed appears in the status indicator of the multifunction display e USA only DTR XXX Miles e Canada only DTR XXX km h Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal amp If you do not take your foot off of the accel erator pedal and continue to accelerate past the set speed the following message will appear in the multifunction display DISTRONIC Override The distance to a slower moving vehicle in front of you will not be set Your vehicle speed will then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position Setting a higher speed Warning A N If you increase the set vehicle speed keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed Increase the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit Otherwise sudden and unexpected acceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and or serious in jury to you and others You can increase the set speed in two ways Adjustment in 1 mph Cana
31. gt Close all doors and the tailgate gt Attach the trailer gt Plug in all electrical connectors a When you are towing a trailer the vehicle level always remains in the Highway setting The following applies additionally when towing a trailer e The vehicle is lowered to the highway level when it reaches a speed of 5 mph 8 km h if not set to highway level e The high speed level is not available The restrictions that apply to towing also apply when using accessories that are connected to the trailer power socket such as a bicycle rack Towing a trailer There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailer towing Make sure your rig will be le gal not only for where you reside but also for where you will be driving A good source for this information can be the po lice or local authorities Driving instructions Note the following points when driving with the trailer In order to gain skill and an understand ing of the vehicle s behavior you should practice turning stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic Before you start driving check the e trailer hitch e break away switch e safety chains e electrical connections e lighting and tires Adjust the mirrors gt page 51 to permit unobstructed view beyond rear of trailer If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving slowly and then apply only
32. gt page 249 and see Convenience closing feature gt page 250 BE you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO are discharged the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is malfunction ing or the vehicle battery is drained e Check the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 120 and replace them if necessary gt page 502 e Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver s door gt page 496 e Lock the vehicle as described in the Practical hints section gt page 497 e Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle battery connections checked gt page 528 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is malfunc tioning contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Important notes on using KEYLESS GO You can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO like a normal SmartKey gt page 112 The starter switch is located under the KEYLESS GO button Pull the KEYLESS GO button out in order to ac cess the starter switch gt page 43 You can combine KEYLESS GO func tions with normal SmartKey functions e g unlocking with KEYLESS GO and locking with the button Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you Never store the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO together with e electronic items such as a cellular phone or another SmartKey with KEYLESS GO e metallic objects such as coins or metal foil
33. gt page 86 e Child restraints gt page 96 e Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH gt page 95 Additional protection potential provide e Supplemental Restraint System SRS with e Air bags gt page 76 e Air bag control unit with crash sensors e Emergency Tensioning Device ETD for seat belts gt page 89 e Seat belt force limiter gt page 89 e Active head restraints gt page 90 Air bag system components with e Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp gt page 85 e Front passenger seat with Occupant Classification System OCS gt page 81 Although independent systems their protective functions work in conjunction with each other i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle gt page 91 The SRS system conducts a self test when the ignition is switched on and in regular intervals while the engine is running This facilitates early detection of malfunctions The 9 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster gt page 28 comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine was Started The SRS components are in operational readiness if the 9 indicator lamp is not lit when the engine is running A malfunction in the system has been detected if the E9 indicator lamp e fails to go out not later th
34. ly against backrest gt To move seat backrest forward lean forward with handle Q pulled and held at resistance point The seat backrest will move forward against your back gt Release handle Q when the seat back rest has reached the desired position To make sure the seat backrest has en gaged lean firmly against the backrest Head restraint height Warning VAN With a rear seat occupied make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non use position and have the oc cupant adjust the head restraint properly For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will re duce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Second row seat head restraint 1 Head restraint 2 Release button Controls in detail Seats Raising gt Manually adjust the height of head restraint 4 by pulling it upward to the desired position Lowering gt To lower head restraint push release button 2 and press down on head restraint C i The third row seat head restraints are ad justed in the same manner Controls in detail Seats Head restraint fore and aft adjustment lt 7 The angle of the head restraint for th
35. place up to three hand held remote con trols used to operate devices such as garage door openers gate openers or oth er devices compatible with HomeLink or some other systems Before the integrated remote control can be used it must be programmed to the ga rage door opener gate operator or other device you wish to operate See the follow ing instructions for programming informa tion P68 00 4314 31 Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control Indicator lamp AAA Signal transmitter button Needed for programming not part of vehi cle equipment Hand held remote control of ga rage door opener gate operator or other device Hand held remote control but ton Controls in detail Warning A N Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent po tential harm or damage When programming a garage door opener the door moves up or down When programming a gate operator the gate opens or closes Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards
36. s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Power tilt sliding sunroof T To avoid damaging the seals do not trans port any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt sliding sunroof Do not open the tilt sliding sunroof if there is snow or ice on the roof as this could result in malfunctions BE Please keep in mind that weather conditions can sometimes change rapidly Make sure to close the tilt sliding sunroof when leaving the vehicle If water enters the vehicle interior vehicle electronics could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty a When the tilt sliding sunroof is open reso nance noises may result in addition to the usual wind noises They are caused by minimal pres sure changes in the passenger compartment To reduce or eliminate these noises change the po sition of the tilt sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly 4 You can also open or close the tilt sliding sunroof using the SmartKey or the KEYLESS GO function see Summer opening feature gt page 249 and see Convenience closing feature gt page 250 Controls in detail Power tilt sliding sunroof amp Depending on the current position the tilt sliding sunroof may also open or close when the air recirculation button on the control panel of the climate control page 216 or automatic climate control page 230 is
37. section in this manual traffic rules and regulations motor vehicle laws and safety stan dards A Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself Re moval of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and or per sonal injury Warning Introduction Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction please discuss the problem with the Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center management or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz USA LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes Benz Canada Inc 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 Introduction Reporting safety defects Y Reporting safety defects For the USA only The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulation
38. 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles 11 Maintenance cccccecceeceeceeeseeeee 12 Roadside Assistance c0cceeeee 12 Change of address or ownership 13 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada 13 Where to find it ssssssscccecceeeeees 15 VIMO Ol Sisiagas peaetantanend tarda caamnaueereestenmastes 16 Operating Safety cceeccccccsseeceeeeeees 17 Proper use of the vehicle 17 Problems with your vehicle 18 Reporting safety defects c008 19 Reporting safety defects 19 Vehicle data recording ccccccseeeeees 20 Information regarding electronic recording CEVICES csescceceeseees 20 At a glance 000 ee ecccceeecccceeeeeceeeeees 21 Exterior VICW vcsssdiseseendnasevenstnranreatererenees 22 0 6 40 sereisas benri 24 Instrument cluster serccsnsssaresssereessrcncnasiers 26 Instrument ClIUStED ccseesceeeeeeees 28 Multifunction steering wheel 30 Center console ccccccsssceceeseceenes 31 Upper part Vehicles without enhanced off road package 31 Upper part Vehicles with enhanced off road package 32 Lower part ercis 33 Overhead control panel ccceeeee 34 Door control panel cccssesceeseeeees 35 Storage compartMents
39. 2 comes on The message DSR and the set speed ap pear in the multifunction display f the DSR is switched on at a speed above 18 mph Canada 30 km h the message DSR Max Speed 18 mph Canada 30 km h ap pears in the multifunction display For information on how to program the set speed while driving see Adjusting Down hill Soeed Regulation speed with DSR switched on gt page 276 Controls in detail Driving systems Switching Downhill Speed Regulation off gt Press DSR switch Q gt page 274 The indicator lamp 2 goes out The message DSR Off appears in the multifunction display At a speed above approximately 21 mph Canada approximately 35 km h the DSR is automatically switched off The message DSR Off appears in the multifunction display and an acoustic signal sounds For information on how to switch DSR on again see Switching Downhill Speed Regulation on gt page 275 Controls in detail Driving systems Adjusting Downhill Speed Regulation speed with DSR switched on With the DSR switched on gt page 274 the speed setting can be changed using the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left hand side of the steering column Cruise control lever 1 Increase set speed 2 Reduce set speed You can change the set speed between 3 10 mph Canada 4 18 km h You can increase or reduce the set speed in
40. 260 Activating 266 Cleaning system sensor 430 Control system 264 Deactivating 268 Distance warning function 272 Distance warning function activating deactivating 183 Driving hints 270 Messages in the multifunction display 453 Sensor cover 430 Warning and indicator lamps 263 Door Entry lamps 151 Locking In an emergency 497 Locking unlocking KEYLESS GO 41 71 Locking unlocking SmartKey 40 70 Messages in the multifunction display 474 Opening from inside outside 114 120 Remote door unlock Tele Aid 337 Unlocking Mechanical key 496 Door control panel 35 Door handle 35 Door windows see Power windows DOT 410 416 Downhill driving Cruise control 257 Downhill Speed Regulation DSR 273 Messages in the multifunction display 467 Drinking and driving 347 Driving 53 347 Abroad 370 Hydroplaning 352 In winter 353 420 Instructions 53 347 Problems 65 Safety systems 101 systems 255 Through standing water 355 Through water 360 Tips 195 With Distronic 270 Driving off 60 Driving safety systems 4 ETS 107 ABS 101 BAS 103 EBP 107 ESP 103 Driving systems 255 Adaptive Damping System ADS 278 Air suspension program 278 Cruise control 255 Distronic Canada only 260 Downhill Speed Regulation DSR 273 Off road driving program Vehicles without enhanced off road package 277 Parktronic system 288 Rear view camera 293 Vehicle level control 279 E Easy entry exit feature A
41. Average speed since start 4 Average fuel consumption since start All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately 4 hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period Fuel consumption statistics since last reset gt Press button or repeatedly until the message From Start appears in the multifunction display Press button JA or Re repeatedly until the message From Reset appears in the multifunction display From Reset T90 m 15 00 H N EET 3 O r3 MPG 1 Distance driven since last reset 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average speed since last reset 4 Average fuel consumption since last reset Controls in detail Resetting fuel consumption statistics gt Press button or repeatedly until the message From Start appears in the multifunction display Press button J or RA repeatedly until the fuel consumption statistics which you want to reset appear in the multifunction display Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 152 until the respective values are reset to 0 The fuel consumption statistics reset auto matically to 0 when either of the following values is exceeded distance covered 100000 miles time elapsed 10000 hours Control system Dis
42. Cleaning and care of the vehicle Regular and proper care will help to maintain the value of your vehicle The best way to protect your vehicle from harmful environmental influences is to wash it and use protective treatments regularly A Many cleaning products can be hazardous Some are poisonous others are flammable Always follow the instructions on the partic ular container Always open your vehicle s doors or windows when cleaning the inside Warning Never use fluids or solvents that are not de signed for cleaning your vehicle Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children While in operation even while parked your vehicle is subjected to varying external in fluences which if gone unchecked can at tack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions but also by e Air pollution e Road salt e lar e Gravel and stone chipping To avoid paint damage you should immediately remove e Grease and oil e Fuel e Coolant e Brake fluid e Bird droppings e Insects e Tree resins etc Operation Vehicle care Frequent washing reduces and or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions e near the ocean e in industrial areas smoke exhaust emissions e during
43. Controls in detail b gt Useful features The mobile phone is linked to the hands free device and the multifunc tion steering wheel The battery is charged depending on its charge status and the position of the SmartKey in the starter switch The charge procedure will be indicated in the mobile phone s display You can place or receive phone calls You can control other functions of the mobile phone via the control system gt page 186 the Voice Control System see separate operating instructions or the COMAND system see separate oper ating instructions i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO out of the starter switch the mobile phone remains switched on for approxi mately 10 minutes If you place or receive a Call during this time the mobile phone switches off 10 minutes after the call has been completed Removing mobile phone from mobile phone cradle P82 70 5735 31 Example illustration 1 Release catch for mobile phone 2 Mobile phone cradle i When using a flip style mobile phone open flip top before removing from the cradle while a call is connected Otherwise the call will be dis connected gt Press release catch in direction of arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of mobile phone cradle 2 Changing mobile phone cradle If you require a different cradle for your mobile phone remove the present cradle before installing a new one Removing an existin
44. Crossing obstacles 361 Driving instructions for off road driving 355 Driving through water 360 Returning 363 Rules 356 Special driving features 356 Steep terrain 358 Off road driving program Vehicles without enhanced off road package 277 Oil level see Engine oil Checking level One touch gearshifting 199 Operating safety 17 Operators Manual 10 Ornamental moldings Cleaning 429 Outside temperature see Displays Overdue maintenance service term 423 Overhead control panel 34 Oxidation catalyst diesel engine 371 P Paintwork code 550 Paintwork Cleaning 426 Panic alarm 100 Panorama roof Rear 212 Parcel net Front passenger footwell 319 Front seat backrests 319 Parking 67 350 On hills 67 Over things that burn Potential consequences 67 371 Parking brake 59 67 Lamps Indicator and warning 437 Messages in the multifunction display 468 Releasing 59 Parking lamps 505 Messages in the multifunction display 480 Replacing bulbs 509 Parking position Exterior rear view mirrors 182 209 Parktronic 31 32 288 Cleaning system sensors 430 Minimum distance 290 Range 289 Switching on off 291 System malfunction 292 System sensors 289 System sensors Cleaning 430 Warning indicators 25 290 Parts service 548 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp Passenger compartment 370 Fuse box 545 Interior lighting 149 Interior rear view mirror 34 Parcel net in front passenger footwell 319
45. Passenger safety see Occupant safety Pedals 347 Phone see Telephone Plastic and rubber parts cleaning 432 Poly V belt drive Layout GL 320 CDI 552 Layout GL 450 GL 550 552 Positions Memory function see Seats Pounds per square inch see PSI Power assistance 348 Power outlets 324 Power seat see Seats Power Power tilt sliding sunroof 251 Convenience closing feature 250 Opening closing 251 Stopping 250 Summer opening feature 249 Synchronizing 253 Power washer 426 Power windows 246 Cleaning 431 Convenience closing feature 250 Door windows 24 7 Hinged quarter windows 248 Opening closing 246 Rear door windows Blocking Operation 98 Summer opening feature 249 synchronizing Door windows 249 Practical hints 490 Premium unleaded gasoline 565 Problems While driving 65 With starting see Starting difficulties With the vehicle 18 Product information 9 Production options weight 417 PSI 417 Push starting see Tow starting Q Quarter windows see Power windows R Radio AUDIO menu Control system 164 Selecting station 164 Selecting station satellite 164 Radio transmitters 370 Range distance to empty 185 Range of the sensors Parktronic 289 Reading lamp front 149 Reading lamp second row 151 Rear automatic climate control 241 244 Rear center console ashtray see Ashtrays Depending on vehicle configuration Rear climate control 226 Rear door windows Blocking operation 98 Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps Rea
46. Scissors type jack example illustration Vehicles with screw type jack Turn crank 4 clockwise until jack is fully seated in take up bracket 2 and the jack base evenly meets the ground Vehicles with scissors type jack Turn ratchet 4 up and down until jack is fully seated in take up bracket 2 and the jack base evenly meets the ground Continue to turn crank ratchet until the wheel is a maximum of 1 2 in 3 cm from the ground Removing the wheel P40 10 4939 31 1 Alignment bolt gt Unscrew upper most wheel bolt and remove it gt Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt Q supplied with the tool kit gt page 490 gt Remove the remaining wheel bolts T Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt This could result in damage to the bolts and wheel hub threads gt Remove the wheel Practical hints Flat tire Mounting the new wheel T To avoid paint damage place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt Warning A N Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts P40 10 4940 31 P40 10 3705 31 Damaged wheel hub threads should be gt Guide spare wheel onto the alignment D Wheel bolt for 18 19 20 and 21 repaired immediately Do not continue to bolt and push it on the wheel hub j dri der th i t Contact light alloy wheels e ata ea ea aan Insert wheel bolts and tighten them 2 W
47. See Operator s Manual Practical hints Possible cause consequence The ABS and the ESP have been switched off due to a malfunction The BAS is also switched off The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS avail able The ABS and the ESP have been switched off because of insufficient power supply The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts The BAS is also switched off The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available What to do if Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident When the voltage is above this value again the ABS is operational again and the message in the multifunction display should disappear If the message in the multifunction display does not disappear gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution ABS Unavailable The self diagnosis has not yet been The display will clear after driving a See Operator s Manual completed yet short distance at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph 20 km h Cruise Control And Inope
48. T vehicle is lowered to off road level 2 level 1 If you drive faster than 20 mph 30 km h for a short period while using off road level 3 the following message appears in the multifunction display A 7 ay Oa j Y ik W y i CE r Off road level 3 is canceled You will see for example the following message in the multifunction display OFF road Geo NE o3 At speeds above 60 mph 96 km h the off road level 1 setting is canceled and the vehicle is lowered to the high way level You will see for example the following message in the multifunction display OFF road Geo NE Fog Controls in detail e Depending on the ADS setting gt page 278 the vehicle will be low ered to the high speed level when trav eling at higher speeds At speeds below 25 mph 40 km h at the latest it will be returned to the highway level a The setting is stored when you turn off the engine Highway level i Keep in mind that in rough or uneven roads adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact with the road and result in damage to the vehicle un derbody Always make sure the vehicle has suffi cient ground clearance before adjusting it to a lower level gt Start the engine gt page 41 Driving systems If one or more of the indicator lamps gt page 281 are on gt Press switch 2 gt page 283 repeatedly until all lit i
49. Tire name For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration For more information see Rims and tires gt page 555 Tire size designation load and speed rating C Tire width 2 Aspect ratio in 3 Radial tire code 4 Rim diameter Tire load rating 6 Tire speed rating Gy For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration General Depending on the design standards used the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation No letter preceding the size designation as illustrated above Passenger car tire based on European design standards Letter P preceding the size designation Passenger car tire based on U S design standards Letter LT preceding the size designation Light Truck tire based on U S design standards Letter T preceding the size designation Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tire width The tire width Q gt page 406 indicates the nominal tire width in mm Aspect ratio The aspect ratio 2 gt page 406 is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividin
50. Use temperature controls G and gt page 230 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment The temperature of the interior is ad justed automatically Deactivating gt Press one button of the air distribution gt page 230 or press button or gt page 230 The indicator lamp on button MAg goes out Depending on which button you press the air distribution button or the air vol ume button or automatic control of either the air distribution or air volume is switched off Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Setting the temperature Use temperature control 4 and gt page 230 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre ments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C The automatic climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible Increasing gt Turn temperature control and or slightly clockwise The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Decreasing gt Turn the temperature control and or slightly counterclockwise The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution controls 7 or 8 for the driver s side or 7 4D or 2
51. Useful features When programming a garage door opener park the vehicle outside the garage Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause unconscious ness and possible death Programming the integrated remote control Step 1 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 Bb Controls in detail Useful features gt gt Step 2 gt If you have previously programmed a signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming proceed to step 3 If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time press and hold the two outer signal transmit ter buttons 2 and and release them only when indicator lamp begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds This proce dure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory If you later wish to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons do not repeat this step and be gin directly with step 3 Step 3 gt Hold end of the hand held remote control of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in 5 to 12 cm away from the signal transmitter button or to be programmed while keeping the indica tor lamp Q in view St
52. are equipped with automatic locks for the center and rear axle differential to improve vehicle traction Driving across a hilltop Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop do not shift automatic transmission to position N to prevent the vehicle from speeding up too much after climbing a hill Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive across the hilltop After climbing a hill driving in this manner prevents the vehicle from e losing ground contact when cresting hills e losing its forward momentum e speeding up too much after climbing the hill Operation Driving instructions Driving downhill e Drive slowly e Do not drive at an angle to the incline Steer into the line of gravity and drive with the front wheels pointing straight downhill Otherwise the vehicle may slide sideways off the path and roll over e Shift automatic transmission to position 1 gt page 197 e On steep inclines use the Downhill Speed Regulation gt page 273 e Utilize the engine s braking power to reduce vehicle speed If this is insufficient apply the brake gently Make sure the vehicle is moving in the line of gravity e Check the brakes after a lengthy down grade drive The special Off road ABS gt page 102 setting allows for precise and brief cyclical blocking of the front wheels permitting them to dig into loose ground Remember that when stopped the front wheels slide across a surface and thu
53. conditions which cannot be handled by the systems automatic 4 ETS the ESP man ual switch position LOW of transfer case this vehicle comes equipped with Controls in detail Switching differential locks T If the differential locks are engaged accel erate gently when setting the vehicle in motion To avoid damage to the transmission the vehicle may only be operated on a dynamometer single axle dynamometer if e the axle not being driven is jacked up or e the associated propeller shaft is disconnect ed Differential locks The rotary switch for the differential locks is located on the upper part of the center console You can select between three locking modes 1 Rotatable outer adjustment ring with indicator lamp 2 AUTO mode center differential is auto matically locked 3 Center differential is completely locked 4 Center and rear axle differential are completely locked Controls in detail Differential locks AUTO mode Center and rear axle differential locks The differential locks should only be eA O mode teadeaualetormost dn engaged manually if traction is insufficient ing situations since the center differential Warning A N ie ode is locked and released as required The differential locks can be engaged in p Never drive on a paved surface with the the sequence 3 gt page 205 up to a At speeds up to 19 mph 30 km h it is center and rear axle differentia
54. could become wedged into or under the ve hicle For safety reasons the vehicle can only be lowered with all doors and the tailgate closed Lowering is interrupted if a door or the tailgate is opened and will continue after the door is closed again Warning A N Please be aware that by raising the vehicle level the center of gravity also rises There fore always ensure that the vehicle level is as low as possible With higher ride height the ESP may activate earlier in certain situations Adapt your speed and driving to possible changed driving behavior of the vehicle after changing the vehicle level The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed The ESP cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle T Keep in mind that in rough or uneven ter rain adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact with the ground and result in damage to the vehi cle underbody Always make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground clearance before adjusting it to a lower level pg Before jacking up the vehicle with equip ment that lifts one or more of the wheels com pletely off of the ground remove the SmartKey from the starter switch BE Please also note the information in the sec tion on towing gt page 538 For information on off road driving see Off road driving gt page 355 Vehicles without enhanced O
55. e Fuse box in passenger compartment gt page 545 Fuses Before replacing fuses gt gt Apply parking brake gt page 67 Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P gt page 191 The gear position indicator in the multi function display should be on P Turn off all electrical consumers Turn off the engine gt page 41 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Open the driver s door this puts the starter switch in position O same as with the SmartKey re moved from the starter switch The driver s door then can be closed again Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in engine compartment The fuse box is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment gt Open the hood gt page 378 Fuse box GL 450 GL 320 CDI GL 550 similar 1 Fuse box cover 2 Clamps gt Pull clamps 2 in direction of arrow gt Lift fuse box cover Q up gt Install fuse box cover in reverse order BE The fuse box cover must be installed Removing installing cover properly to prevent moisture and or dirt from entering the fuse box and possibly impairing fuse d operation gt gt Close the hood after checking or re placing fuses gt page 379 P Fuse box in cargo compartment The fuse box is located in the cargo com gt partment behind the passenger side trim panel Open the tailgate gt page 122 Insert a
56. gt Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency gt gt gt Insert a suitable object such as a coin Pull red fuel filler flap release 8 in into the slot of lock 4 gt page 497 direction of arrow gt Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90 The fuel filler flap is unlocked in direction of arrow gt Open the fuel filler door gt page 374 gt Remove cover 2 gt page 497 Practical hints Resetting activated head restraints Y Resetting activated head restraints If the active head restraints have been trig gered in a rear end collision the active Warning A head restraints must be reset Otherwise the active head restraints cannot offer any When pushing back the head restraint cush additional protection in the event of anoth ion take care that your fingers do not be er rear end collision come caught between the head restraint cushion and the cover Failing to do so may You can tell that the head restraints have lead to injury been activated when they have been moved forward and cannot be adjusted T Be careful not to damage upholstery 4 Pull Warning A N For your convenience we recommend that 2 Adjust downward you have this work carried out by an authorized 3 Press For safety reasons have the active head re Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center straints checked by an authorized gt Pull the top of the head restraint cush Mercedes Benz Light Truck
57. gt Move the selection marker with button or MESH to the Comfort submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message Fold In Mirrors When Locking appears in the multi function display The selection marker is on the current setting Fold In Mirrors When Locking OF gt Press button or E to switch function On or Off Vehicle configuration The following functions are available Function Page Distance warning function 183 on off DSR set speed 183 Distance warning function Canada only In vehicles equipped with Distronic you can determine whether the distance warn ing function is to be enabled or disabled With this function set to On the system will alert you when recognizing a stationary ob stacle or a slower vehicle moving in your vehicle s path and the danger of a collision exists even when the Distronic is switched off gt Press button or repeatedly until the message Distance Warning appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Distance Warning OFF Controls in detail gt Press button or E to switch the distance warning function On or Off 1 Symbol for activated distance warning function If the distance warning function is activated you will see the symbol in the Standard display When the distance warning function is deactivated the symbol will not appear Control system DSR Downhill Speed
58. if necessary pull it tight again Controls in detail Loading Loosening the cargo net Belt hook attached in the second row foot well C Buckle 2 Belt hook 3 Cargo tie down ring gt Loosen the tightening belt by pulling buckle 1 upward in direction of arrow gt Remove belt hook 2 from cargo tie down ring Controls in detail Loading Removing and storing the cargo net gt Take cargo net bar 2 out of holder Q see Installing the cargo net gt page 313 gt Press the red button on the upper and lower cargo net bar Fold the cargo net gt Roll up the cargo net Close the hook and loop fasteners on the cargo net package Vv Useful features Storage compartments A To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle Put lug gage or cargo in the cargo compartment if possible Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs Warning If so equipped always use the cargo net when transporting cargo The cargo net cannot secure hard or heavy objects Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob jects Keep compartment lids closed This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during e braking e vehicle maneuvers e an accident Controls in detail Glove box CD changer gt Depending on vehicle equipment an AUx sock
59. inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pres sure given on the yellow label on the Minispare wheel rim GL 320 CDI GL 450 GL 550 4 5B x 19 H2 1 58 in 40 mm T 165 90 D19 119M or T 165 90 R19 119M Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the Minispare tire differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires Vv Electrical system Model Generator alternator Starter motor Battery Spark plugs Electrode gap Tightening torque Model Generator alternator Starter motor Battery GL 450 14 V 180 A 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 95 Ah NGK PLKR7A 0 031 in 0 8 mm 15 19 lb ft 20 25 Nm GL 320 CDI 14 V 180 A 12 V 2 0 kW 12 V 95 Ah Technical data Electrical system GL 550 14V 180A 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 95 Ah NGK PLKR7A 0 031 in 0 8 mm 15 19 lb ft 20 25 Nm Technical data Main Dimensions Model Overall vehicle length Vehicle width exterior rear view mirrors folded out Vehicle width exterior rear view mirrors folded in Vehicle width exterior rear view mirrors folded in vehicles with AMG rims Overall vehicle height depending on set vehicle level Overall vehicle height depending on set vehicle level vehicles with enhanced off road package Wheelbase Ground clearance depending on set vehicle level Ground clearance depending on set vehicle level vehicles with enhanced off road package Turning circle Track front Track rear
60. manually The Parktronic switch is located on the upper part of the center console Vehicles with enhanced off road package 1 Parktronic switch 2 Indicator lamp Vehicles without enhanced off road package Q Parktronic switch 2 Indicator lamp Controls in detail Driving systems Switching off Parktronic system malfunction gt Press Parktronic switch 1 If only the red distance segments illumi nate and an acoustic warning sounds there is a malfunction in the Parktronic system The Parktronic system will auto matically switch off after 20 seconds and gt Press Parktronic switch Q once more the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch Indicator lamp 2 goes out comes on Indicator lamp 2 comes on Switching on gt Have the Parktronic system checked aD The Parktronic system switches on automatically when you switch on the ignition by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light gt page 42 Truck Center as soon as possible Vehicles with original equipment Mercedes Benz f only the red distance segments illumi Trailer Hitch Kit nate and no acoustic warning sounds the Sa el ti alld Parktronic system sensors are dirty e g slush snow or ice or there is an interfer ence from other radio or ultrasonic signals e g working jackhammers car wash or the air brakes of trucks The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktron
61. produce an undesired effect on other sys tems Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle Warning See an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle Some safety systems only function while the engine is running You should therefore nev er turn off the engine while driving Warning A N Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires wheels for example when running over an obstacle road debris or a pothole may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride distur bance or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on your hazard warning flashers carefully slow down and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires wheels for possible damage If the ve hicle appears unsafe have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or re pairs Proper use of the vehicle Proper use of the vehicle requires that you a a re familiar with the following information nd rules the safety precautions in this manual the Technical data
62. such as speed or outside temperature warn ing indicator lamps malfunction warning messages or the failure of any systems Driving characteristics may be impaired If you must continue to drive do so with added caution Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Adjusting instrument cluster illumina tion Use button Q or to adjust the illumina tion brightness for the instrument cluster ap The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit am bient light conditions The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle s exterior lamps i With the exterior lighting switched on the brightness of the switches in the center console will also be adjusted when using button or To brighten illumination gt Press and hold button 3 until the desired level of illumination is reached To dim illumination gt Press and hold button Q until the desired level of illumination is reached Controls in detail Resetting trip odometer Make sure you are viewing the trip odome ter display gt page 155 gt Ifitis not displayed press button or on the multifunction steering wheel gt page 156 repeatedly until the trip odometer appears in the multi function display gt Press and hold reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 152 until the trip odometer is r
63. used for the rear passenger compartment Deactivating gt Press button or gt page 216 The indicator lamp on button Big goes out The automatic operation of air volume switches off The selected blower speed is shown in the air volume display G gt page 216 Controls in detail Climate control or Increasing Adjusting air distribution Pr ir distribution n Turn temperatur a ee ae rO a oe aaa cine pee oe clock eal eae ee Jeo a ee gt page 216 to adjust the air distribution a men aon ma The following symbols are found on the goes out The automatic operation of The climate control system will corre Senile air distribution switches off spondingly adjust the interior air tem l perature Symbol Function Sene meee Directs air through the center Decreasing l and side air vents Use temperature controls Q and e anea eea l l gt page 216 to separately adjust the air andor pace 2 cic ucour Directs air to the windshield temperature on each side of the passenger a A and side air vents compartment You should raise or lower l Directs air to the footwells and the temperature setting in small incre The climate control system will corre side air vents ments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C spondingly adjust the interior air tem The climate control will adjust to the set perature gt Press the desired air distribution button or G0 gt page 216 The
64. 15 mm COMEF for comfort driving Indicator lamp 3 comes on Start the engine gt page 41 Press ADS switch Q repeatedly until the desired suspension tuning Is reached ap The setting is stored when you turn off the engine Driving systems Vehicle level control The vehicle level control automatically regulates the ride height to e reduce fuel consumption e improve driving stability by lowering the center of gravity The vehicle automatically regulates its ride height based on the set vehicle height and the current speed e As your driving speed increases the ve hicle is lowered by increments until it reaches high speed level Vehicles with ADS e lf you are driving with the ADS set ting COMF or AUTO the vehicle is raised back to highway level as your driving speed decreases e You can select the high speed level via the ADS setting SPORT In ADS Sport the vehicle is lowered direct ly to high speed level as your driv ing speed increases Controls in detail Driving systems The parked vehicle begins adjusting to the set vehicle level as soon the doors and tail gate are e unlocked or e opened or closed with the vehicle unlocked In order to operate the vehicle level control switch gt page 281 however the engine must be running Warning A N Make sure that no one is near the wheel housing or under the vehicle when you lower the vehicle while it is standing still Limbs
65. 494 378 378 380 38 1 At a glance Exterior view Item Page Windshield wipers 62 Wiper blades replacing 516 Wiper blades cleaning 431 Windshield Cleaning with wiper fluid 64 Cleaning 431 Roof rails 295 Carriers 296 Power tilt sliding sunroof 251 Doors Locking and unlocking 112 Opening 120 Unlocking locking in an 496 emergency Front lamps 905 Headlamp cleaning system 208 nce E Cockpit Oe OO UUO Item Cruise control lever Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Horn Steering wheel gearshift buttons Gear selector lever for automatic transmission Front Parktronic warning indicators Overhead control panel Glove box release Glove box lock Page 256 26 30 198 56 290 34 315 316 0060 0000 At a glance Item Glove box CD changer AUX socket Power outlet Center console Starter switch Steering wheel adjustment manual Hood lock release Parking brake release Parking brake pedal Power tailgate switch Page 315 315 315 324 31 42 49 378 59 67 124 Cockpit Item Page Door control panel 35 Exterior lamp switch 61 143 Steering wheel adjustment 50 electrical Heated steering wheel 327 Combination switch 147 e High beam 61 e Turn signals 62 e Windshield wipers 62 e Rear window wiper 64 At a glance as Instrument cluster P54 32 9424 31 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page Item
66. Assistance 12 Roadside Assistance button see Tele Aid RON 375 565 Roof rails 295 Rubber parts Cleaning 432 Run Flat Indicator Canada only S Safety Driving safety systems Occupant safety 74 Reporting safety defects 19 Safety belts see Seat belts Satellite radio 164 Scissors type vehicle jack 492 493 Seat belt force limiter 89 396 101 Seat belts 86 Children in the vehicle 91 Cleaning 433 Fastening 53 Height adjustment 55 Messages in the multifunction display 443 Proper use of 55 88 Safety guidelines 78 Telltale 29 86 442 Warning lamp 442 443 Seat cushion depth see Seats Seat heating see Seats Seat ventilation see Seats Seating capacity 389 Seats 45 130 Adjusting 45 Cushion depth Multicontour seat 138 Easy entry exit feature for third row seats 130 Emergency exit for third row seats 132 Heating 138 Lumbar support 137 588 Memory function 141 Multicontour seat 138 Second row Folding 306 Third row Folding electrically 305 308 Ventilation 140 Securing cargo 302 Cargo tie down rings 302 Hooks 304 Selector lever see Gear selector lever Self test Lamps in the instrument cluster 436 OCS 86 Tele Aid 332 Vehicle battery 528 Service and warranty information 10 Service intervals see Maintenance Service indicator Service life Tires 385 Service see Maintenance Service system see Maintenance System Service Parts 548 Settings Adaptive Damping System ADS 278 Air su
67. Contact your autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for availability Warning Occupant Classification System The Occupant Classification System OCS automatically turns the front passenger front air bag on or off based on the classi fied occupant weight category determined by weight sensor readings from the front passenger seat The system does not deactivate the front passenger side impact air bag the window curtain air bag and the emergency tensioning device Occupants must sit properly belted in a position that is as upright as possible with their back against the seat backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly classified If the occupant s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle e g by lean ing on armrests the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant s weight category Safety and Security Occupant safety Furthermore the occupant weight may ap pear to increase or decrease due to objects hanging on the seat other passen gers pushing on the seat objects lodged underneath the seat or stuffed between seat and middle console or between seat and door or due to objects applying pres sure on the back of the seat Always make sure that the seat has clearance in all directions at all times ap If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way take the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Only seat acc
68. Controls in detail Control system Submenus in the Settings menu gt Press button eN The collection of the submenus appears in the multifunction display Settings Instrument Cluster Timer Date G Lighting Press button EEJ The selection marker moves to the next Submenu The submenus are arranged by hierarchy Scroll down with button JM scroll up with the button ES With the selection marker on the desired submenu use the MJ button to access the individual functions within that sub menu Once within that submenu you can use the JA button to move to the next function or the RY button to move to the previous function within that submenu The settings themselves are made with button or E The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages Instrument cluster Time Date gt page 172 gt page 174 Selecting speedometer Setting the time display mode Selecting language Setting the date Selecting display digital speedometer or outside temperature for status in dicator Controls in detail Lighting gt page 175 Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only Setting locator lighting Setting night security illumination Setting interior lighting delayed shut off Control system Vehicle Comfort gt page 178 gt page 181 Compass adjustment Activ
69. Engine Model Engine Mode of operation No of cylinders Bore Stroke Total piston displacement Compression ratio Output acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum torque acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum engine speed Firing order Poly V belt Technical data GL 320 CDI 164 822 642 Diesel 4 stroke engine 6 3 27 in 83 00 mm 3 62 in 92 00 mm 182 cu in 2987 cm Lee 215 hp 4000 rom 160 kW 4000 rpm 400 Ib ft 1600 2400 rpm 543 Nm 1600 2400 rpm 4500 rpm 1 4 2 5 3 6 2035 mm Engine GL 450 164 871 273 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 8 3 66 in 92 90 mm 3 38 in 86 00 mm 285 cu in 4663 cm 10 7 1 335 hp 6000 rpm 250 kW 6000 rpm 339 Ib ft 2700 5000 rpm 460 Nm 2700 5000 rpm 6500 rpm 1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8 2404 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment 2 Premium fuel required Performance may vary with fuel octane rating Technical data Engine Model GL 550 164 886 Engine 273 Mode of operation 4 stroke engine gasoline injection No of cylinders 8 Bore 3 86 in 98 00 mm Stroke 3 56 in 90 50 mm Total piston displacement 333 2 cu in 5461 cm Compression ratio 10 7 1 Output acc to SAE J 1349 382 hp 6000 rpm 285 kW 6000 rpm Maximum torque acc to SAE J 1349 391 b ft 2800 4800 rpm 530 Nm 2800 4800 rpm Maxim
70. Engine oil 380 564 Adding 381 564 Additives 564 Changing 381 564 Checking level 380 Checking with the oil dipstick 380 Consumption 380 Fillerneck 381 Recommended engine oils and oil filters 564 Enhanced Off road Package Vehicle level control 283 ESP 27 103 Four wheel electronic traction system with ESP 103 Messages in the multifunction display 457 458 Off road ESP 106 Warning lamp 27 441 ETD 89 446 Safety guidelines 78 Expanding cargo compartment 304 Exterior rear view mirrors 51 208 Folding 210 Power folding 209 Synchronizing 209 F Fastening the seat belts 53 Filler neck Engine oil 381 First aid kit 490 Flat tire 519 Lifting the vehicle 520 Lowering the vehicle 526 Minispare wheel 494 Mounting the spare wheel 520 Preparing the vehicle 520 Floormats 325 Fluids Automatic transmission fluid 381 562 Brake fluid 377 563 564 Capacities 562 Engine coolant 377 381 563 567 Engine oil 380 562 564 Power steering fluid 562 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 377 569 Foglamps 146 Corner illuminating front fog lamps 147 Messages in the multifunction display 478 Rear foglamp 146 Replacing bulbs 510 4 ETS 107 Off road 4 ETS 108 Front airbags 79 Front defroster 221 235 Front lamps see Headlamps Front passenger front airbag 74 79 Messages in the multifunction display 460 461 462 463 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 31 32 85 Front seat head r
71. Fuels coolants lubricants Anticorrosion antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts Failure to use such Before the start of the winter season or aluminum parts The use of aluminum anticorrosion antifreeze coolant willresult once a year in hot southern regions you components in motor vehicle engines in a significantly shortened service life should have the anticorrosion antifreeze necessitates that anticorrosion antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the concentration checked The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for service Therefore the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze agent Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity Approximate freeze protection Model 35 F 37 C 49 F 45 C GL 320 CDI 5 0 US gt 4 751 5 5 US gt 5 2 1 GL 450 5 3 US qt 5 01 5 8 US gt 5 5 I GL 550 5 6 US gt 5 251 6 1 US at 5 8 1 Data preliminary Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system Both the windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system are supplied from the windshield washer reservoir The windshield washer reservoir has a ca pacity of approximately 8 1 US qt 7 7 I gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water or con centrate and commercially available prem
72. Good VISIDIIty 0 eee an a 208 Headlamp cleaning system 208 Rear view MifTOTS eeecseeseeseeesen 208 Power folding exterior rear VIEW MIMTOTS nosece 209 SUVS O Saens a averse 210 Rear panorama roof sunshade 212 Rear window defroster 68 212 climate contiol anina 214 Deactivating the climate control system 0 218 Operating the climate control system in automatic mode 218 Setting the temperature 219 Adjusting air distribution 219 Adjusting air VOIUME ccseeeee 220 Air vents in the roof liner over the second row seats 220 Front defroster 221 Air recirculation mode s es 222 Air conditioning eeeeceeeeeeeeeee 224 Residual heat and ventilation 225 Rear climate control 226 3 zone automatic climate control 228 Deactivating the automatic climate control system 232 Operating the automatic climate control system IN automatic MOAE cccceeeeees 233 Setting the temperature 234 Adjusting air distribution 234 Adjusting air VOIUME cce08 235 Front defroster ccccssssecceeeeees 235 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 237 Air recirculation mode 06 237 Air conditioning ceeeecceeeeeeeees 239 Using driver side settings for all temperature zones 240 Residual heat and ve
73. In order to avoid possible serious burns or injury use extreme caution when removing the rear cover because the rear exhaust pipe is extremely hot Warning PE8 20 2754 31 1 Cover Practical hints P88 20 3028 31 Example illustration front bumper 2 Towing eye bolt Removing cover gi Cover Q is secured to the bumper by a plastic cord gt Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by the arrow gt Lift off cover C to reveal the threaded hole for towing eye bolt Towing the vehicle Installing towing eye bolt gt Take the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit gt page 490 Screw towing eye bolt in clockwise to its stop and tighten with wheel wrench Removing towing eye bolt gt Loosen towing eye bolt 2 counter clockwise with wheel wrench Unscrew towing eye bolt Store the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench back into the vehicle tool kit gt page 490 Installing cover gt Engage cover Q at top and press at bottom Practical hints Towing the vehicle Stranded vehicle Freeing a stranded vehicle on which the wheels are dug into sand or mud should be done with the greatest of care especial ly if the vehicle is heavily loaded Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or diago nally since it could result in damage to the chassis alignment Never try to free a vehicle that is still cou pled to a trailer If possi
74. Instrument Cluster T mee j aa e P54 32 4837 31 Controls in detail Control system Menus submenus and functions Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu G Menu 4 Menu G Standard display AUDIO NAV Off road DISTRONIC Canada only gt page 162 gt page 164 gt page 166 gt page 166 gt page 167 Trip and main odometer Selecting radio station Route guidance Compass Calling up settings an instructions current direction traveled Checking tire inflation pressure Selecting satellite radio Vehicle level a station 5 Checking coolant temperature Operating CD player Differential locks Calling up digital speedometer or outside temperature O Calling up maintenance service indicator The headings used in the menus table are The first function displayed in each menu will designed to facilitate navigation within the sys automatically show you which part of the system tem and are not necessarily identical to those you ar In shown in the control system displays Controls in detail Control system This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an through the menus 6 to 0 overview of the individual menus TEL Trip computer Maintenance athiri TEL off e AUDIO oFF From start TIM 1304 SO MPH MAW oFF 20 5 MPG Distance warning Function AIRMATIC Compass AA ve 8 Vehicle configuration Vehicle status Settings 6 message
75. New Vehicle Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Technical data Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes Benz Parts and Accessories warranties copies of which are available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Warranty coverage Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet have an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center arrange for a replacement It will be mailed to you Technical data Identification labels Certification label on drivers B pillar The Vehicle Identification Number VIN can be found in the following locations e onthe certification label e embossed underneath the passenger side second row rear seat gt page 551 e onthe lower edge of the windshield gt page 551 _MFD BY MERCEDES BENZ U S INTL INC TUSCALOOSA COUNTY ALABAMA oo Ce FOR DAIMLERCHRYSLER AG ST GERMA THES VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE A GCB65E06A00089 3 si iii Example certification label U S vehicles 2 Paintwork code VIN POO 00 3274 31 MERCEDES BENZ U S INTL INC RIM SIZE COLD KPA PSI GAIRIPNBE 1470 265 60 R18 220 32 GAWR PNEY 3150 02 06
76. Sj Tires and wheels Checking tire pressure electronically with the Advanced Tire Pressure Moni toring System Advanced TPMS Canada only i This device complies with RSS 210 of Indus try Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The TPMS only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors It monitors the tire inflation pres sure as selected by the driver in all four tires A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires Tire pressure inquiries are made using the multifunction display The present inflation pressures are displayed only after a few minutes travel time Operation Tires and wheels Possible differences between the readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose e g gas Warning A station equipment and the vehicle s control system can occur Usually the readings issued by It is the drivers responsibility to calibrate the control system are more precise the TPMS on the recommended cold infla tion pressure Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You might lose control over the vehicl
77. SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the tailgate closing switch can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehi cle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is recognized inside the vehicle Automatic central locking Locking and unlocking from the inside The doors and the tailgate lock automati cally when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do SO The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold The vehicle automatically locks when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You could therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle e is pushed or towed e isona test stand For information on towing the vehicle see Towing the vehicle gt page 538 You can deactivate the automatic central locking mode using the control system gt page 180 You can lock or unlock the doors and the tailgate from inside using the central lock ing or
78. Vehicle Submenu gt Press button PA or Ke repeatedly until the message Automatic Door Locking appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Automatic Door Locking 8 OFF gt Press button or E to switch the automatic central locking On or Off Limiting opening height of tailgate Use this function to activate or deactivate the limiting opening height of the tailgate gt Move the selection marker with button or MRM to the Vehicle submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message Opening Limiter Tailgate appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting gt Press button ES or E to switch the limiting opening height of the tailgate On or Off Comfort submenu Access the Comfort submenu via the Settings menu Use the Comfort submenu to change the settings for a number of con venience features The following functions are available Function Page Activating easy entry exit 181 feature Setting fold in function for 182 exterior rear view mirrors Controls in detail Control system Activating easy entry exit feature Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy entry exit feature gt page 48 Warning A N You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy entry exit feature is activated To stop steering
79. a seat belt for more than one person at time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects Belts should not be worn twisted In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to distribute impact forces The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries Pregnant women should also always use a lap shoulder belt The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pres sure on the abdomen Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Enhanced seat belt reminder system When the engine is started the seat belt telltale will always illuminate for 6 seconds to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts If the driver s seat belt is not fastened when the engine is started an additional warning chime will also sound for a maxi mum of 6 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is fastened If after these 6 seconds the driver s or the front passenger s seat belt with the front passenger seat occupied is not fastened with front doors closed e the seat belt telltale remains illu minated for as long as either the driv er s or front passenger s seat belt is not fastened e a
80. action simultaneously extends the gear range of the automat ic transmission gt page 197 Automatic transmission Shifting into optimal gear range gt Press and hold left shift button Q The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This will involve shifting down one or more gears vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit the transmis gt Briefly press left shift button Q a pa i A a The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the automatic transmission gt page 197 Canceling gear range limit gt Press and hold right shift button 2 until the cipher for the current gear range disappears from the multifunc To avoid overrewing the engine when down tion display gt page 197 shifting the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be ex ceeded The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Controls in detail Automatic transmission Emergency operation Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration becomes less re sponsive or sluggish or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in limp home emergency ope
81. affects the load you can carry in your vehicle If a trailer is towed the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle The tongue load typically is between 8 and 15 of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it For more information on trailer tongue load see Loading a trailer gt page 365 Recommended tire inflation pressure Warning A N Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Operation Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Loading Information placard located onthe driver s door B pillar gt page 388 The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should onl
82. also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary Tires and wheels Life of tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire inflation pressure e Distance driven A Tires and spare tire should be replaced after 6 years regardless of the remaining tread Warning Operation Tires and wheels Tread depth Storing tires to wear down to that level As tread depth Do not allow your tires to wear down too approaches in 3 mm the adhesion BE Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place far Adhesion properties on wet roads are properties on a wet road are sharply with as little exposure to light as possible sharply reduced at tread depths of less reduced Protect tires from contact with oil grease and than in 3 mm gasoline Depending upon the weather and or road Treadwear indicators TWI are required by surface conditions the tire traction varies Cleaning tires law These indicators are located in six widely places on the tread circumference and BE never use a round nozzle to power wash become visible at a tread depth of approx tires The intense jet of water can result in imately in 1 6 mm at which point the al a tire is considered worn and should be re placed Always repla
83. and air distribution are adjusted automatically Deactivating rear automatic climate control gt Press button Gig The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function switches off after a short delay i Switch off the rear automatic climate con trol for improved cooling or heating output in the front passenger compartment You can also switch off the rear automatic climate control from the front passenger com partment gt page 230 Operating from the front Deactivating gt Press button ER gt page 230 The indicator lamp on the button goes out In display 4 gt page 230 you will see the EER symbol followed by MODE for approximately 3 seconds gt Press button gt page 230 In display 4 gt page 230 you will see the ER symbol followed by OFF The rear automatic climate control is switched off Reactivating gt Press button ERY gt page 230 The indicator lamp on the button comes on In display 4 gt page 230 you will see the EES symbol followed by ON and MODE The MODE display is cleared and the indicator lamp on button Egy goes out after approximately 3 seconds The rear automatic climate control switches on Controls in detail Setting the temperature gt Press button ER gt page 230 The indicator lamp on the button comes on In display 4X gt page 230 you will see the ER symbol followed by MODE Set the desired tempera
84. and pull it out upwards Reinstalling rear ashtray insert gt Install ashtray insert gt Close the ashtray Cigarette lighter Ashtray 2 Ashtray cover gt Grip the ashtray insert on the sides and pull it out upwards gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 gt Push in cigarette lighter Reinstalling ashtray insert The cigarette lighter will pop out auto matically when hot gt Install ashtray insert 4 gt Close ashtray cover plate 2 Cigarette lighter gt Depending on vehicle configuration your vehicle is equipped with a cigarette lighter and an ashtray gt page 321 located in the front center console and an ashtray locat ed in front of the second row seats gt page 322 A Never touch the heating element or sides of the cigarette lighter they are extremely hot gt Hold the knob only Warning Make sure that any children traveling with you do not injure themselves or start a fire with the hot cigarette lighter When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Switch on the ignition gt page 42 be aa a bf 7 4 1 Ciga
85. and that the MAX 20A ji floormats are securely fastened MAX 20A Floormats should always be securely fas tened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins as gt page 326 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 Deforednivineiotacheclathastietioctners gt Flip up cover and insert electrical plug gt Flip up cover and insert electrical plug are securely in place and adjust them if nec cigarette lighter type cigarette lighter type essary A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals Do not place several floormats on top of each other as this may impair pedal move ment a To install or remove the floormat more easi ly move the driver s seat or front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible gt page 46 Controls in detail Useful features Seat cover under third row seats If something falls under the third row seats you can remove the seat cover in order to reach under the seats Removing seat cover AN 1 Retainer pin 2 Eyelet Removing gt Pull floormat off of retainer pins Q gt Remove the floormat Example passenger side Installing gt Fold the respective seat halfway in or gt Lay down the floormat in the respective out gt page 305 footwell gt Press the floormat eyelets 2 onto re tainer pins Q Reach into the recess in the seat cover Pull the seat cover in the di
86. as resistance to spark knock boiling range vapor pressure etc Diesel engine Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM To prevent malfunctions diesel fuel with improved cold flow characteristics is of fered in the winter months Check with your fuel retailer BE Do not fill the tank with gasoline Do not blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine The fuel system and engine will otherwise be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build up caused by gasoline Mercedes Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area leading to engine performance problems such as e Warm up hesitation e Unstable idle e Knocking pinging e Misfire e Power loss Gasoline additives gasoline engine _ In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives Mercedes Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles Refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet USA only or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for a listing of a
87. as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Warning N remains illuminated with an adult occupant have any passenger use the front passenger i on the front passenger seat even after per seat until the system has been repaired if the indicator lamp forming the above corrective steps do not Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Check tires There was a warning message abouta Pb Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set then restart loss in the tire inflation pressure and for each tire Nid O the Run Flat Indicator has not been gt Then restart the Run Flat Indicator gt page 397 restarted yet XU Pen Lic esl wor The Run Flat Indicator is malfunction gt Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized Inoperative ing Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Tire Pressure The Run Flat Indicator indicates that gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt Check Tires the pressure is too low in one or more steering and braking maneuvers Observe the traffic sit tires uation around you gt Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required gt page 395 If necessary replace the wheel gt page 519 Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire inflation pressure values gt page 397 Tire pressure Vehicles with Advanced TPMS gt Drive the vehicle for a few minutes displayed af
88. authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Operation Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather in stop and go traf fic on short trips and in hilly areas Drinking and driving A Drinking and driving and or taking drugs and driving are a very dangerous combina tion Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes perceptions and judgment Warning The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs Driving instructions Pedals A Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob structing the pedal s range of movement Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance Warning During sudden driving or braking maneu vers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate This could lead to accidents and injury Operation Driving instructions Power assistance Brakes iH Operational or performance test must only Warning J With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to bra
89. blind can be installed behind the third row seats or the second row seats T With the cargo compartment cover blind in stalled do not pile luggage higher than the lower edges of the rear side windows Blind installed behind third row seats 1 Handle 2 Mount Rolling out blind gt Pull blind on handle across the car go compartment gt Guide blind into mounts 2 and re lease Rolling up blind gt Disengage blind and guide retraction by its handle Installing blind i Before installing cargo compartment cover blind behind the second row seats fold the third row seats forward page 305 Cover from the mounts behind second row seats 3 Cover i Before installing cargo compartment cover blind behind the third row seats fold the left or right third row seat forward page 305 After wards return the left or right third row seat into its original position p gt Press on cover 8 at its upper edge as indicated by arrow gt Remove cover 3 by pulling its lower edge out of the side trim ap To avoid loss of the mount covers insert the mount covers into the mounts currently not in use gt Place left side of blind gt page 311 in left mount gt Position right side of blind over right mount gt Press release button 1 gt page 311 and guide cover 2 into mount gt Make sure the cargo compartment cover blind is securely fastened
90. bulbs gt Insert a suitable object e g screwdriv er at point indicated by the arrow and gt Turn bulb socket gt page 507 BE if not done carefully and properly damage i cover y counterclockwise to the bumper can result We therefore recom ued mend that you have this work carried out by an Cover is released gt Pull bulb socket out of the authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center headlamp housing gt Swing cover Q outwards and take it Removing front fog lamp cover gt Pull the side marker bulb out of bulb i ibid off socket gt Insert the new side marker bulb into bulb socket gt Insert bulb socket G into the headlamp housing You can now access the front fog lamp gt Turn bulb socket G clockwise until it engages P82 10 4381 31 1 Cover 2 Front fog lamp or corner illuminating front fog lamp 3 Retaining screws gt Turn retaining screws counterclock wise gt Remove front fog lamp out of the bumper gt Pull electrical connector off P82 10 3588 31 4 Bulb socket of front fog lamp bulb gt Turn bulb socket counterclockwise gt Pull bulb socket out of the housing gt Pull the front fog lamp bulb out of bulb socket 4 gt Insert the new front fog lamp bulb into bulb socket 4 gt Insert bulb socket into the housing Practical hints gt Turn bulb socket clockwise until it engages Plug
91. cause severe injury to you or others Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit Use leak proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident i With a disconnected battery you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch and pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button will have no effect Step 1 Disconnecting i If your battery is discharged the vehicle must be jump started gt page 536 using the jump start contacts in the engine compartment or an accessory battery charge unit approved by Mercedes Benz must be connected using the jump start contacts in the engine compartment see separate instructions for the accessory bat tery charge unit before any of the following steps can be performed If the battery cannot be jumped or charged please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt Set the automatic transmission to position P gt page 191 gt Firmly depress the parking brake gt page 67 Turn off the engine gt page 68 gt Leave the ignition switched on gt page 42 d If the vehicle battery is discharged and you Step 2 Disconnecting had the vehicle jump started e Leave the engine running e Complete step 1 starting with switching off all electrical consumers e Continue with step 2 e When the front passenger seat is in the most forward position turn off the engine
92. cellular air time e vehicle battery power is available e the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center i Location of the vehicle on a map is only pos sible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the informa tion on to the Response Center Controls in detail Useful features A If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call e g the rele vant cellular phone network is not available The message Call Failed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds Warning Should this occur assistance must be sum moned by other means Initiating an emergency call manually PR2 95 2638 31 1 Cover 2 SOS button gt Briefly press on cover Q The cover opens Press SOS button 2 briefly The indicator lamp in SOS button will flash until the emergency call is concluded Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center Close cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded Warning A N If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle e g smoke or fire in the vehicle vehicle in a dangerous road location please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button Carefully l
93. checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on comes on while driving andan parking brake set acoustic warning sounds There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid res ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned What to do if Suggested solution The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph 20 km h gt Release the parking brake gt page 59 gt Risk of accident Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so gt Apply the parking brake gt page 67 gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem i If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks Practical hints What to do if USA only Canada only The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving In addition the yellow ABS mal function indicator lamp and the yellow ESP warning lamp come on and an acoustic warn ing sounds Possible cause conse quence The Electronic Brake Propor tioning EBP has switched off due to a malfunction The ABS the BAS and the ESP are
94. contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or call Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA only at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 Useful features USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Controls in detail Useful features Compass Calling up the compass gt Press button or repeatedly until the off road menu appears in the multifunction display The compass displays the direction into which the vehicle is currently trav eling N NE E SE S SW W or NW AIRMATIC Compass G o NE The presence of buildings bridges power lines and large antenna masts can influence t
95. coolant level e the vehicle must be parked on level ground e thecoolant temperature must be below 158 F 70 C Operation Engine compartment Warning A In order to avoid potentially serious burns Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system or if the coolant temperature display indicates that the coolant is overheated Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158 F 70 C Allow engine to cool down before removing cap The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure Using a rag slowly open the cap approx imately Ve turn to relieve excess pres sure If opened immediately scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts The coolant expansion tank is located on the driver s side of the engine compart ment Cap 2 Coolant expansion tank 3 Indicator wall 4 Coolant level gt gt gt Using a rag turn cap Q slowly approx imately one half turn counterclockwise to release any excess pressure Continue turning cap Q counterclock wise and remove it Coolant level 4 is correct if the level for cold coolant reaches the top of indicator wall 3 visible through the filling openi
96. country in which the vehicle is registered you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams Relevant information can be obtained at any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center i Vehicles equipped with active Bi Xenon headlamps The active Bi Xenon headlamps monitor the vehicles steering angle and vehicle speed then automatically shift their beams to either side to better follow the curvature of the road ahead increasing usable illumination over conventional headlamps Controls in detail Exterior lamp switch 1 Standing lamps left turn left two stops 2 Standing lamps right turn left one stop 3 WJ Off Daytime running lamp mode gt page 145 4 GZ Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode gt page 145 Lighting 5 Parking lamps also side marker lamps tail lamps license plate lamps instrument panel lamps 6 Low beam headlamps or high beam headlamps 7 Front fog lamps 8 Rear fog lamp ap The exterior lamps switch off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or open the driver s door with the ignition switched off When the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp are switched on and you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or open the driver s door an acoustic signal sounds In addition the message Switch Off Lights appears in the multifunction display Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp manually ea Fai
97. dark e the camera is exposed to a very bright white light e the immediate surroundings are illumi nated with fluorescent light the display may flicker N e there is a sudden change in tempera ture e g if you drive into a heated ga rage from the cold lens condensation e the camera lens is dirty or covered e the rear of your vehicle is damaged In this case have the position and set ting of the camera checked by a quali fied specialist workshop Mercedes Benz recommends that you visit a Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for this purpose Do not use the rear view camera in these sit uations Otherwise you could injure yourself or others and or damage property including your vehicle while parking maneuvering Controls in detail Driving systems The rear view camera is an optical parking Switching the rear view camera on and aid It shows you the area behind the vehi off cle in the COMAND system display when reverse gear R is engaged for example during parallel parking gt Shift the automatic transmission in position R gt page 191 Switch on the ignition gt page 42 The rear view camera is located near the tailgate handle The area behind the vehicle appears in the COMAND system display The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND system display as a mirror image like in the rear view mirror The image from the rear view camera will no longer be displayed if you select
98. display e Off road driving program 278 lamp with indicator Ea Supplemental 74 e Outside temperature 155 e Rear window wiper 64 eee tana vote indicator or digital speed 173 indicator gt oaeo j ometer depending on Geo fer R Engine malfunction 439 selected setting in the indicator lamp control system e Cruise control 257 USA only e Transmission position 192 e Distronic 266 Engine malfunction 439 indicator Canada only indicator lamp e Gear range indicator 197 Canada only E High beam headlamp 61 indicator 147 Vehicles with Diesel engine only At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Item Page Multifunction display 155 Operating the control 156 system 2 Telephone Press button to take a call to dial to redial to end a call to reject an incoming call 3 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume Press button up to increase E down to decrease Item Page Voice Control System on see separate operating instructions Moving within a menu Press button Wag for next display B for previous display Voice Control System off see separate operating instructions Menu systems Press button for next menu for previous menu Vehicles without Voice Control System Button without function Vv Center console Upper part Vehicles without enhanced off road package 7 ait Hie G 19s IET S At a glance Item COMAND sy
99. e and the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is set to selective settings only the front door opened from the inside is unlocked i With the passenger side door opened you cannot lock the vehicle with the central locking switch Controls in detail Seats For information on seat adjustment see Easy entry feature for third row seats Bie GENINE Sterne SEOUONI PARERS The lever for the easy entry feature is lo For more information on seats see Load cated on the rear of the seat base of the ing gt page 295 passenger side second row seat Easy entry exit feature for third row seats This feature allows for easier access to and exit from the vehicle s third row seats Warning J To help avoid personal injury the second row seat backrests must be properly Q Easy entry lever gt Lift up the right second row seat until it locked either in the upright position or folds forward when using the expanded cargo compart ment in the fully folded position while the vehicle is in motion 1 Easy entry lever gt Pull and hold easy entry lever 1 once again in direction of arrow at resistance point i Make sure that the head restraint is pushed all the way down gt page 135 You should now have sufficient space gt Pull and hold easy entry lever in di to access the vehicle s third row seat rection of arrow at resistance point vehicles wii memory function
100. field of view Ob jects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Getting started Adjusting The buttons are located on the driver s door 1 Driver s side exterior rear view mirror button 2 Adjustment button 3 Passenger side exterior rear view mir ror button Switch on the ignition gt page 42 Press button Q for the driver s side ex terior rear view mirror or button for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror The indicator lamp on the respective button comes on for approximately 15 seconds If you do not make adjustments to the selected exterior rear view mirror within 15 seconds the indicator lamp goes out You will then have to select the desired exterior rear view mirror again before any adjustments can be made Adjustments can only be made with the indicator lamp for the respective exterior rear view mirror button illuminated gt Push adjustment button 2 up down left or right according to the desired setting BB if an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward hit from the rear or forcibly pushed rearward hit from the front reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place The mirror housing is then properly posi tioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner BE Vehicle with power folding exterior rear view mirrors If an
101. first l In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions stop The corresponding exterior lamps switch only switch from position W to with l on gt page 61 the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location The front fog lamps switch on Switching from Wg to will briefly The green indicator lamp in the Locator lighting and night security switch off the headlamps Doing so while exterior lamp switch comes on illumination driving in low ambient lighting conditions gt Push in the exterior lamp switch The locator lighting and the night security d man accents illumination are described in the Control The front fog lamps switch off system section see Setting locator light Fog lamps will operate with the parking The green indicator lamp in the ing gt page 176 and Setting night secu amps and or the low beam headlamps on Fog exterior lamp switch goes out rity illumination gt page 176 lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the position gt page 144 exterior lamp switch in position J gt Pull out the exterior lamp switch to To switch on the fog lamps turn the exterior second stop lamp switch to position first Rear fog lamp driver s side only The rear fog lamp switches on The yellow indi
102. from the lowest non use position and have the occupant adjust the head restraint properly For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Occupant safety Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle gt Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child gt Make sure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion Warning A N Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if they are secured in a child re straint system The children could e injure themselves on parts of the vehicle e be seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold gt D Safety and Security b gt Occupant safety Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight The child restraint system s metal parts for example could become very hot and the child could be burned on these parts If children open a door they could e injure other persons e get out of the car and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the p
103. fuel filler flap gt Press button once All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knob in the driver s door moves up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global unlocking gt Press button twice All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global locking gt Press button BEAN With the tailgate and all doors closed the turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Restoring to factory setting gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp gt page 112 flashes twice Controls in detail SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS GO come with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS GO each with remote control and a removable mechanical key The KEYLESS GO function is integrated into the SmartKey On these vehicles the validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is checked when you grasp an outside door handle If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is valid your vehicle unlocks e the doors e the tailgate e the fuel filler flap Locking and unlocking P80 35 2285 31 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 1 Lock button 2 Unlock button for tailgate 3 Locking tab for mechanical key 4 Unlock button Battery check lamp 6 Panic button gt page 100 Controls in detail Locking
104. gearshift control Automatic transmission 198 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 338 Storage compartments 36 315 Cup holder 320 Cup holders 320 Door pockets 36 Front center console 317 Glove box 315 Parcel net Front passenger footwell 319 Parcel nets Front seat backrest 319 Rear seats In front of 318 Storage telephone compartment Armrest Front 317 Storing tires 386 Stranded vehicle 542 Submenus see Control system submenus Sun visors 210 Sunroof see Power tilt sliding sunroof Sunshade Rear panorama roof 212 Suspension tuning see Air suspension program Symbols used in this Operator s Manual 16 T Tar stains 426 Tele Aid 331 Tachometer 29 153 Technical data 547 Call priority 337 Displaying current gear range 197 Air conditioning refrigerant 563 564 Emergency calls 333 Overspeed range 153 Brake fluid 563 564 Hands free microphone 34 Taillamps 511 Capacities fuels coolants lubricants Information 336 Cleaning lenses 429 etc 562 563 Initiating an emergency call Messages in the multifunction Coolant 563 567 manually 334 display 481 Dimensions Vehicle 560 Messages in the multifunction Replacing bulbs 505 513 Electrical system 559 display 483 Tailgate Engine 553 Remote door unlock 337 Closing from the inside Engine oil 562 564 Roadside Assistance 335 Electrically 125 Engine oil additives 564 SOS button 334 Closing from the outside Fuel requirements 565 Stolen Vehicle Recovery vehicles without Fuels coolants lubrican
105. gt Disengage sun visor Q from 7 Mounting cover 4 mounting 7 gt page 211 gt Swing sun visor Q up gt Pivot sun visor Q to the side gt gt Controls in detail Good visibility gt gt E 7o avoid damage to vanity mirror cover 4 Rear window defroster gt page 211 make sure it is closed before pivoting sun visor Q to the side The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power To keep battery drain to a minimum switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear The de froster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside tem perature gt Adjust sun visor 4 by pushing or pull ing in the direction of arrows gt Swing down additional sun visor when you experience additional glare through the windshield Rear panorama roof sunshade Mounting li The rear panorama roof sunshade over the gt a Warning A third row seats prevents the sun from shin Bitton ing directly into the vehicle Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driv You can open and close the sunshade by Closing ing Visibility could otherwise be impaired hand ang gt Grasp on handle and insert clips endangering you and others T Always guide the sunshade Do not let it into mounting 1 snap back abruptly as it could be damaged gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 The
106. gt Switch off all electrical consumers Read and observe safety instructions 1 Battery cover and precautions gt page 528 gt Enter the rear passenger compartment gt Open the front passenger door and remove main battery cover Q i Open doors only when conditions are safe to do so gt Move the front passenger seat to the most forward position gt page 46 Practical hints Battery Step 3 Disconnecting 2 Perforated floor carpet gt Cut the floor carpet 2 along the dotted white line see illustration until you reach the perforated part Start cutting at the point indicated by the arrows Cut carpet using a sharp object knife etc gt Enter the front passenger compart ment gt Move the front passenger seat to the most rearward position gt page 46 gt D Practical hints Battery ag f the vehicle battery is discharged and you Step 4 Disconnecting had the vehicle jump started turn off the engine gt Remove SmartKey from starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status O Turn off the engine or all electrical systems using the KEYLESS GO start stop button Open the driver s door With the driver s door open the vehicle s x 2 Perforated floor carpet unfolded gt Fold the floor carpet piece 2 in on board electronics have status 0 Air channel direction of the a
107. have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehi cle condition If such information is provid ed it can be found on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt page 374 Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi mately 1 5 psi 0 1 bar per 18 F 10 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature Checking tire inflation pressure Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than 3 hours the reading will be approximately 4 psi 0 3 bar higher than the cold reading This is normal Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure Otherwise the tire will be underinflated Operation Warning Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflate
108. hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution The left license plate lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible malfunctioning gt page 514 The right license plate lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible malfunctioning gt page 514 The left low beam lamp is Halogen headlamp malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 507 Bi Xenon headlamp gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible The right low beam lamp is Halogen headlamp malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 507 Bi Xenon headlamp gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol rO eNA 1 Display message Marker Lamp FON Lew it Marker Lamp Front Right Parking Lamp FPO Lett Parking Lamp Front RTONL Foglamp Neale ler Reverse Lamp Lert Reverse Lamp Right Possible cause consequence Possible solution The left front side markerlampis gt malfunctioning The right front side marker lamp gt is malfunctioning The front left parking lamp is gt malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The right front parking lampis malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The left rear fog lamp is malfunc gt tioning The left backup lamp is gt malfunctioning The ri
109. hot after an air bag has inflated Do not touch inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center For your protection and the protection of others when scrapping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be fol lowed These instructions are available from any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Given the considerable deployment speed required inflation volume and the textile structure of the air bags there is the possibility of abrasions or other potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment A Warning Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the front side impact air bags or the rear side impact air bags Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for availability When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operators Manual Safety and Security Front air bags 1 Driver air bag 2 Passenger air bag Driver and front passenger front air bags are deployed e inthe event of certain frontal impacts e if impact exceeds a preset deploymen
110. in the electrical connector Insert front fog lamp 2 back into bumper Fasten retaining screws 3 Reinsert cover and press it in until it engages Additional turn signal lamps bulbs The additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func tion the entire turn signal unit must be re placed Have the turn signal unit replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs for rear lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear lamp do the following first gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position W gt page 143 Tail lamp unit To access the bulb socket you have to remove the cover in the corresponding side trim panel of the cargo compartment gt Open the tailgate gt page 122 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Opening the side trim panels Aa 1 Lock 2 Storage compartment 1 Lock gt Insert a suitable object such as a coin 2 Cover in left side trim panel into the slot of lock Q gt Turn lock Q 90 in direction of arrow Turn lock Q counterclockwise by 90 gt Fold down cover in direction of arrow gt Remove storage compartment 2 Opening the passenger side trim panel pace Fe s 1 Lock 2 Cover in right side trim panel gt Insert a suitable object such as a coin into the slot of lock Q gt Turn
111. inflation pressure recom mended for the vehicle operating condition Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires Observe the recommended tire inflation pres sure on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 388 Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds gt page 394 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition gt page 394 If such information is provided it can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 gt Press button or on the mul tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu ap pears in the multifunction display gt page 155 gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until you see the following message Tire Pressure Monitor Active Menu R Button Operation Press the reset button gt page 152 The following message will appear in the multifunction display Restart tire pressure monitor Press button ES The following message will appear in the multifunction display Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted After driving a few minutes the system verifies that the current tire inflation pressures are within the system s specified range Afterwards the current tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference pressures and then moni tored If you wish to cancel activation gt Press button
112. is not available in the COMAND system the messages for the audio systems such as radio or CD player will appear in English regardless of the language selected For more information see separate COMAND operating instructions Available languages German English French ltalian Spanish Dutch Swedish Danish Turkish Portuguese Russian Canada only Controls in detail Selecting display digital speedometer or outside temperature for status indicator gt Move the selection marker with button or E tothe Instrument Cluster submenu gt Press button PAM or Keg repeatedly until the message Status Line Display appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Status Line Display Speed Outside Temperature Control system gt Press button or E to select the desired setting The selected display is then shown continuously in the status indicator lower display The other display now appears in the menu of the standard display gt page 162 e Digital speedometer or e Outside temperature Controls in detail Control system Time Date submenu Access the Time Date submenu via the Settings menu Use the Time Date submenu to change the time and date settings The following functions are available Function Page Setting the time 174 Setting the date 174 Q If your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module se
113. it engages gt Third row seat Fold the seat backrest rearward gt page 305 Installing gt Second row seat Fold the seat backrest forward gt page 134 gt Third row seat Fold the seat backrest forward gt page 305 gt Insert head restraint into openings on the seat backrest gt Push head restraint 1 down until it au dibly engages gt Push release button 2 and adjust head restraint to the desired posi tion gt page 135 gt Second row seat Fold the seat backrest rearward until it engages gt Third row seat Fold the seat backrest rearward gt page 305 For more information on seats see the Getting started section gt page 45 Lumbar support The curvature of the driver s seat can be adjusted to help enhance lower back sup port and seating comfort The lever for lumbar support adjustment is located on the right hand side of the driver s seat backrest Controls in detail Seats 1 Adjustment lever gt Move adjustment lever Q in direction of arrows until you have reached a comfortable seating position Controls in detail Seats Multicontour seat The multicontour seat has an extendable seat cushion and inflatable air chambers built into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support The seat cushion depth seat backrest cushion height and curvature can be con tinuously varied with switches on the in side
114. key immediately to your car insurance company gt Have the mechanical lock replaced if necessary Any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to supply you with a re placement Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so C Locking knob 2 Inside door handle If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS GO opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following With the SmartKey e nsert the SmartKey in the starter switch e Press the or button on the SmartKey With KEYLESS GO e Grasp an outside door handle e Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 43 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be inside the vehicle Front doors gt Pull on inside door handle on the respective front door to open door If the door was locked locking knob 1 will move up Rear doors gt Pull up locking knob Q on the respec tive rear door to unlock door gt Pull on inside door handle 2 on the re spective rear door to open door Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Tailgate Power tailgate Warning A N Make sure the tailgate is closed when the engine is running and while driving Among other dangers deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle interior
115. lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The turn signal in the left exteri or rear view mirror is malfunc tioning This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working The turn signal in the right exte rior rear view mirror is malfunc tioning This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working Possible solution gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 511 gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 511 gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 509 gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 509 gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Display symbol Display message Reserve Fuel Ultra Low sulfur Diesel Fuel Only Tele Aid Inoperative Tele Aid Battery Function unavailable Top Up Washer Fluid Practical hints Possible cause consequence The fuel level has gone below the reserve gt mark Vehicles with diesel engine only gt The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark gt On
116. loss of vehicle control Driving systems For more information see Off road driv ing gt page 355 The DSR is an aid for driving downhill DSR regulates your vehicle s speed when driv ing downhill to the value set in the control system gt page 183 The steeper the downhill gradient is the greater the brake application On flat road surfaces DSR brakes only slightly or not at all DSR regulates the vehicle s speed in auto matic transmission positions D or R i In addition make use of the engine s braking effect by shifting the automatic transmission into a lower gear You can drive slower or faster than the set speed at any time by braking the vehicle or depressing the accelerator pedal Controls in detail Driving systems oO Whenever DSR is switched on DSR will use the programmed default speed to regulate the vehicle s speed The default speed programmed at the factory is 4 mph Canada 6 km h The default speed can be reprogrammed using the control system gt page 183 The next time DSR is switched on DSR will use the newly pro grammed default speed to regulate the vehicle s speed Once DSR is switched on you can adjust the set speed using the cruise control lever gt page 265 Keep in mind that adjusting the set speed using the cruise control lever with DSR switched on will not change the programmed default speed If DSR is switched off and then switched on again DSR will
117. may vary from data shown in the illustration below Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle Se TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 AMM seors ANAL FOR REAR P195 70RI4 200KPA 29PSI ADDITIONAL INFORMATION P40 00 2062 31 1 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard The Tire and Loading Information placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 388 gt Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Infor mation placard The combined weight of all occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue load if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement Seating capacity The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle Observe front and rear seating capacity The Tire and Loading Information placard showing the seating capacity is located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 388 Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration purposes only Seating data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual d
118. minutes if nor door was opened Switch on the ignition gt page 42 Door windows C Left front door window 2 Right front door window 3 Right rear door window 4 Left rear door window Controls in detail Opening the door windows gt Press switch 2 or gt page 247 to the resistance point The corresponding door window moves downwards until you release the switch Closing the door windows p gt Pull switch G 2 or gt page 247 to the resistance point The corresponding door window moves upwards until you release the switch Warning AN If you pull and hold the switch up when clos ing the door window and upward movement of the door window is blocked by some ob struction including but not limited to arms hands fingers etc the automatic reversal will not operate Power windows Fully opening the door windows Express open gt Press switch V 2 3 or gt page 247 past the resistance point and release The corresponding door window opens completely Fully closing the door windows Express close p gt Pull switch 2 or gt page 247 past the resistance point and release The corresponding door window closes completely Warning AN Driver s door only If within 5 seconds switch is again pulled past the resistance point and released the automatic reversal will not function Controls in detail
119. multifunction display 477 Replacing bulbs 511 Brake pads 348 Messages in the multifunction display 467 Brakes 348 Warning lamp 437 Break in period 346 Bulbs replacing see Replacing bulbs Button for Voice control system 30 156 C California retail buyers and lessees Important notice for 11 Camera see Rear view camera Can holder see Cup holder Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 562 Card holder 33 37 320 Cargo compartment cover blind 310 Cargo net 312 Cargo tie down rings 302 Carpets Cleaning 433 Carriers 295 Catalytic converter gasoline engine 371 CD changer 165 315 CD player 165 Center console Lower part 33 Upper part Vehicles with enhanced off road package 32 Upper part Vehicles without enhanced off road package 31 Central locking Automatic 128 Locking unlocking from the inside 128 Switch 128 Certification label 550 CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp 439 440 Checking tire pressure electronically with the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring system Advanced TPMS Canada only 401 Checking tire pressure electronically with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS USA only 398 Checklist Off road driving 357 Returning from off road driving 363 Children inthe vehicle 91 Airbags 77 91 Blocking rear door window Operation 98 Indicator lamp Front passenger front airbag 85 Infant and child restraint systems 86 92 LATCH type child seat anchors 95 Occupant Classification S
120. never exceed the GVWR indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door B pillar GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle weight of the vehicle including all options passen gers fuel and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load It is indicated on certification label located on the driver s door B pillar Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure There are 6 9 kPa to 1 psi another metric unit for air pressure is bars There are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight total load limit and production options weight Maximum tire inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kilograms 150 Ibs Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 Ibs 2 3 kilograms in excess of those standard items which they replace not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight including heavy d
121. not flash three times one of the following elements may not be properly closed e adoor e the tailgate Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again Disarming the alarm system gt Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS GO gt page 40 The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed Indicator lamp Q goes out Gp The alarm system will rearm automatically again after approximately 40 seconds if neither a door nor the tailgate is opened Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm With the SmartKey gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch or gt Press the or button on the SmartKey With KEYLESS GO gt Grasp an outside door handle The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be within 3 ft 1 m of the vehicle or gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 43 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be inside the vehicle Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Automatic transmission Transfer case Differential locks Good visibility Climate control 3 zone automatic climate control Power windows Power tilt sliding sunroof Driving systems Loading Useful features Controls in detail Locking and unlocking In the Controls in detail section you will find detailed information on how to oper ate the equipment install
122. of each front seat base after the ignition is switched on gt page 41 Te 1 Seat cushion depth 2 Backrest side bolsters 3 Backrest center 4 Backrest bottom gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 Seat cushion depth gt Adjust the seat cushion depth to the length of your upper leg with switch Q Backrest contour Adjust the contour of the seat backrest to the desired position with switch or gt Move the backrest support to the bot tom with button or to the center with button Backrest side bolsters gt Adjust the side bolsters so that they provide good lateral support using switch 2 Seat heating The switches for front seat heating are lo cated in the center console 1 Seat heating switch front seats 2 Indicator lamps The switches for second row seat heating are located in the rear center console BRB l A j j pnm e 2 1 Seat heating switch second row seats 2 Indicator lamps 1 off Level Controls in detail The red indicator lamps in the switch come on to show which heating level you have selected Three indicator lamps on highest level The seat heating automatically switches to level 2 after approx imately 5 minutes Two indicator lamps on The seat heating automatically switches to level 1 after approx imately 10 minutes One indicator lamp on lowest level The seat heating automatically switches of
123. on board electronics have status 0 before replacing a wiper blade Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury Warning A Wiper blades are components that are sub ject to wear and tear Replace the wiper blades twice a year preferably in the spring and fall Otherwise the windows will not be properly wiped As a result you may not be able to observe surrounding traffic condi tions and could cause an accident Warning are folded forward Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the wind Shield glass without a wiper blade inserted Make sure the wiper blades are properly installed Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Removing gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 gt page 44 T Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts They could tear engage 1 Wiper blade 2 Cover 3 Attachment 4 Tab Removing gt Press tabs together and tilt wiper blade C to detach tabs on both recesses of attachment 3 Wiper blade 1 is released on one end gt Maintaining its til
124. only go out if both the driver and front passenger s seat belt are fastened or the vehi cle is standing still and a front door is opened Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence USA only The TPMS USA only or Advanced TPMS Combination low tire Canada only detects a loss of pressure in pressure TPMS malfunction at least one tire telltale for the TPMS illuminates continuously Canada only Low tire pressure telltale for the Advanced TPMS illuminates continuously USA only There is a malfunction in the TPMS Combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale for the TPMS flashes 60 seconds and then stays illuminated Suggested solution gt gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers Observe the traffic situation around you Read and observe messages in the multifunction display If the tire inflation pressure in the respec tive tire s has have been corrected the combination low tire pressure TPMS mal function telltale goes out after few minutes driving gt Read and observe messages in the multifunction display Have the TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center After the malfunction has been remedied the combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after few minutes driving Warning A N Each tire including the spare if provided shou
125. only the service brake For information on driving downhill see Driving downhill gt page 360 Operation Driving instructions Warning A N Sand dirt mud and other material having friction property can cause exceptional wear and tear as well as brake failure Have the brakes checked for dirt build up and cleaned There is otherwise a risk that full braking power may not be available in an emergency Warning A N Please be aware that by raising the vehicle level the center of gravity also rises There fore always ensure that the vehicle level is as low as possible With higher ride height the ESP may activate earlier in certain situations Operation Driving instructions Read this chapter carefully before you be gin off road travel Familiarize yourself with the vehicle char acteristics and gear changing before you attempt any difficult terrain off road driv ing We recommend that you start out with easy off road travel Special driving features for off road driving The following driving features are available for specific kind of operation e Off road ABS gt page 102 e Off road ESP gt page 106 e Off road 4 ETS gt page 108 e Hill start assist system gt page 196 e LOW RANGE mode gt page 201 e Differential locks gt page 204 e Downhill Speed Regulation DSR gt page 273 e Off road driving program Vehicles without enhanced off road packa
126. open Deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon sciousness and death Controls in detail Loading The gross vehicle weight which is the weight of the vehicle including fuel tools spare wheel installed accessories pas sengers and luggage cargo must never exceed the load limit and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR for your vehicle as specified on the placard located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 550 In addi tion the load must be distributed in such a way so that the weight on each axle never exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axle The GVWR and GAWR for your vehicle are indi cated on the certification label which can be found on the driver s door B pillar gt page 550 For more information see Tire and Load ing Information gt page 388 The handling characteristics of a fully load ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis tribution It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustra tions shown with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle Please pay attention to and comply with the following instructions when loading the vehicle and transporting cargo e Always place items being carried against front or rear seat backrests and fasten them as securely as possi ble e The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possi ble agains
127. or diesel fuel avoid inhaling fumes and skin or cloth ing contact extinguish all smoking materi als Direct skin contact with gasoline or diesel fuels and the inhalation of gasoline or diesel fuel vapors are damaging to your health mix diesel fuel with gasoline Otherwise the fuel system and engine could be damaged In addition the vehicle could catch fire T Damage resulting from mixing gasoline with diesel is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty T Diesel engine When filling the diesel fuel tank using fuel containers place a filling filter a suede cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter Otherwise particles from the fuel container could clog the fuel lines and or the diesel injec tion system The fuel filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear Locking unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO automatically locks unlocks the fuel filler flap D In case the central locking system does not release the fuel filler flap see Fuel filler flap gt page 497 1 Fuel filler flap 2 Fuel filler cap gt Turn off the engine gt Vehicles with SmartKey Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Open the driver s door this puts the starter switch in position 0 same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch The driver s door then can be closed again gt Briefly push
128. order items the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator s Manual any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating proce dures The Operator s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes Benz including e New Light Truck Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont only e State Warranty Enforcement Laws Lemon Laws Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price if Mercedes Benz USA LLC and or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or mal functions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 m
129. overcome the vehicle rolling resistance and reduces the likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the ground Do not initiate jumps with the vehicle It interrupts the forward momentum of the vehicle Always drive onto slopes with the engine running and the vehicle in gear Do not shift automatic transmission to position N A Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure before driving through sand However if you do so remember to correct the tire inflation pressure gt page 395 before continuing your trip Driving with reduced tire inflation pressure increases the risk of losing control of the vehicle and rolling over Warning Driving instructions Checklist before off road driving Engine oil level e Check the engine oil level with the oil dipstick gt page 380 Only with a proper oil level can the vehicle obtain a trouble free oil supply even on steep gradients T If the engine oil level warning lamp page 473 comes on while driving stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon at is safe to do so Check the engine oil level gt page 380 The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Driving instructions Tires Check the tread depth and maintain specified tire inflation pressure a placard with the recommended tire inflation pr
130. page 302 in the cargo compartment floor 1 Holder in B pillar 2 Holder in C pillar Passenger use of seats behind installed cargo net is restricted because of the footwell being taken up by the net With the cargo compartment expanded in part gt page 305 use holders above C pillars 2 and the cargo tie down rings behind the third row seat backrest gt page 303 With the cargo compartment fully ex panded gt page 306 use holders above B pillars Q and the cargo tie down rings in the second row foot well gt page 303 Open the hook and loop fasteners on the cargo net package Roll out the cargo net Unfold the cargo net The cargo net bars must audibly engage Installing the cargo net la n ee ae ae 74 OE pan 2330 Cargo net bar hung up behind the B pillar 1 Holder 2 Cargo net bar gt Hang cargo net bar 2 on holder 1 as indicated by the arrow gt Push cargo net bar 2 forward into holder Q in direction of arrow L a apie Esnnnan danuta T g the cargo net tight Pullin Belt hook attached in the second row foot well 1 Belt hook 2 Cargo tie down ring 3 Tightening belt Hook belt hook Q into cargo tie down ring 2 in direction of arrow gt Pull tightening belt 3 by the loose end in direction of arrow until the cargo net is pulled tight gt After driving a short distance make sure the cargo net is still tight and
131. point The seat backrest folds down gt Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the seat backrest Controls in detail Loading Controls in detail Loading Folding third row seats electrically a Use the left button indicated by L to fold down the left third row seat Use the right button indicated by R to fold down the right third row seat There are several ways to fold the third row seats Two buttons are located on the right side trim of the third row seats Example button for the left third row seat C Button for returning third row seats to upright position 2 Button for folding the third row seats It is only possible to fold the third row seats down when the rear right door is open Two buttons are located on the passenger side in the cargo compartment ee H LA y i j j pe a i o Example button for the right third row seat 1 Button for returning third row seats to upright position 2 Button for folding the third row seats gt Push in the head restraints of the third row seats all the way gt page 135 a It is only possible to fold the third row seats down when the tailgate is open gt Remove cargo compartment cover blind gt page 311 gt Press and hold button 2 for each side until the third row seats are fully fold ed The cargo compartment is fully extend ed If a third row seat is not engaged
132. pressure as required gt page 395 If necessary change the wheel gt page 519 Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Level Selection The selected vehicle level cannot adjust Reduce vehicle speed Not Permitted ed because gt Set the desired vehicle level again e you are driving too fast for the desired gt page 279 vehicle level e you are towing a trailer e you are using accessories that are connected to the trailer power socket e g a bicycle rack Malfunction The air Suspension is malfunctioning gt Do not drive faster than 50 mph 80 km h depending on the set vehi cle level gt Have the vehicle checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Compressor You have selected a higher vehicle level gt Let the compressor cool until the Cooling Down Due to frequent level changes within a message disappears kon patee do COT Due Wns The selected level will be set once the cool down compressor has cooled down T When the message Compressor Cooling ride height of the vehicle is not yet reached so The selected level will be set once the compres Down appears in the multifunction display you can damage the underbody of the vehicle sor has cooled driving is still possible Keep in mind that the 486 Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence P
133. properly for example the message 3rd Row Of Seats Right Not Locked appears in the multifunction display gt page 155 gt Press and hold button 2 again until the message disappears Controls in detail Loading Returning seats to their original position Step 1 gt Return third row seats to its original Warning A N position gt page 308 Step 2 Make sure all seats are properly locked in p l position before driving off Do not drive with seats not properly locked Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat not properly locked as this can be danger ous The seat could move forward and the seat backrest could fold You could slide un der the seat belt during braking vehicle ma neuvers or in an accident If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or even fa Seat backrest tal injuries Lever The seat backrest and seat belt provide the gt Pull and hold lever 2 in direction of best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly arrow at resistance point upright position and the belt is properly po sitioned on the body gt 3 Seat cushion gt Fold seat cushion G rearward until it locks into position Fold seat backrest 1 rearward until it engages gt Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on seat backrest Q Controls in detail Loading Cargo compartment cover blind The cargo compartment cover
134. rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction The traction grades from highest to low est are AA A B and C Those grades rep resent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance A The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Warning Temperature The temperature grades are A the high est B and C representing the tire s resis tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high tem perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and ex cessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which a
135. release button gt page 54 Allow the retractor to completely re wind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate i Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanism This can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt and or cause damage to the door and or door trim panel Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Damaged seat belts must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Locking Warning A N To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors Be espe cially careful when small children are around Before closing doors make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock your vehicle Do not leave children un attended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury i The exterior lamps switch off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or open the driver s door When the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp are switched on and you remove the SmartK
136. resulting in unconsciousness and death A minimum height clearance of 7 4 ft 2 25 m is required to open the tailgate T The tailgate swings open upwards automat ically Always make sure there is sufficient over head clearance Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Tailgate Opening the tailgate from the outside Vehicles without KEYLESS GO The vehicle must be unlocked gt page 40 The handle is located above the rear license plate recess P72 20 2571 31 gt Pull on the handle The tailgate opens slightly gt Pull tailgate upwards to open Opening the tailgate from the inside gt Lift handle Q in direction of arrow You can unlock the tailgate from the The tailgate is released and can be third row seats and then open it manually opened manually The handle is located on the right of the f you do not open the tailgate within a few tailgate s window trim seconds the tailgate lock will automatically engage again Additionally the tailgate will relock automatically if the vehicle was locked when the tailgate was released from the inside Ifthe tailgate lock does not engage automatically and if applicable the tailgate does not relock after a few seconds you have to close the tail gate manually gt page 123 1 Handle 2 Push Lift gt Push handle in direction of arrow 2 and hold it there Closing the tailgate from the outside A To prevent poss
137. screws for clamping claws counterclockwise until the crossbars can be lifted from the roof rails Shortening the cover strip The cover strips reduce the wind noise caused by the crossbars In order to install add on roof equipment it may be neces sary to shorten the cover strips 12 Cover strip gt Pull cover strip out of groove Controls in detail Loading gt Attach add on roof equipment to the Loading instructions crossbars gt Place cover strip flush against the ae add on roof equipment and mark the WAC ee A end of crossbar on cover strip i p Always fasten items being carried as secure gt Cut off cover strip G at marked loca ly as possible using cargo tie down rings and tion fastening materials appropriate for the gt Press cover strip 2 piece by piece into weight and size of the load groove of the crossbar In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause in jury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle i Cover strips are available as Mercedes Benz accessories Contact your Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver always use tie down rings and if so equipped always use the cargo net when transporting cargo POO 01 3398 31 Load distribution Never drive vehicle with the tailgate
138. seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt the seat belt and top tether strap or lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer s instructions Safety and Security Occupant safety Always sit as upright as possible properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant restraint toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag Note the following im portant information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat e Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the OCS senses the weight of a typical 12 month old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat b gt b gt Safety and Security Occupant safety A child in a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be serious ly injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle The only means to completely eliminate this
139. see Tire size designation load and speed rating gt page 406 If you are uncertain about the correct reading of the information given on a tire s sidewall any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to assist you i For information on speed ratings for winter tires see Winter tires gt page 420 For additional general information on tire speed markings on the tire sidewall see Tire speed rating gt page 418 Driving instructions Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads Is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration braking and steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions When the vehicle is in danger of skidding shift the automatic transmission to position N Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action For information on driving with snow chains see Snow chains gt page 421 Operation Driving instructions Warning A N On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of control loss Do not engage the transfer case in position LOW when driving on ice or packed snow At speeds below 18 mph 30 km h vehicle steering is adversely affected by the Off road ABS gt page 102 Road salts and chemi
140. sliding sunroof make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure If the tilt sliding sunroof encounters an ob struction that blocks its path in a circum stance where you are closing the tilt sliding sunroof by moving the tilt sliding sunroof switch past the resistance point or by pressing and holding button on the SmartKey by pressing and holding the lock button vehicles with KEYLESS GO on the door handle the automatic reversal function will not operate The opening closing procedure of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halt ed by releasing the switch or if the switch was moved past the resistance point and re leased by moving the switch in any direc tion Controls in detail The tilt sliding sunroof is made out of glass In the event of an accident the glass may shatter This may result in an opening in the roof In a vehicle rollover occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts prop erly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compart ment When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock your vehicle Do not leave children un attended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child
141. small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant During an accident they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts Posi tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul der not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 Ib until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster When the child restraint is not in use remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if the children are secured ina child restraint system A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Safety and Security Child seat anchors LATCH type This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren type anchors at each of the outer rear seats for the installation of a LATCH child seat with matching mounting fittings Warning A N Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts P
142. suitable object such as a coin into the slot of lock gt page 544 Turn lock 4 counterclockwise by 90 in direction of arrow Remove cover 2 Install cover 2 in reverse order Fuse box in passenger compartment SSS a ap The fuse box is located behind a cover in the dashboard on the front passenger side F 7 hy z 7s ga D en E Ar 7 r creas 7 i s i Sal 3 5 1 Cover i Do not use sharp objects such as a screw driver to open the fuse box cover Q in the dash board as this could damage the fuse box cover or the dashboard Practical hints Opening gt Open the front passenger door gt Open the glove box gt page 315 gt Insert flat blunt object as a lever into the edge of the cover Q at the position indicated by the arrow gt Loosen cover Q from dashboard using lever gt Using your hands pull cover Q out and remove Closing gt Hook cover Q into the opening at the front gt Press cover Q back on until it engag es Fuses Emergency engine shut down If the engine cannot be turned off as de scribed in the Getting started section gt page 68 you may use the following emergency procedure gt Take the fuse chart from the vehicle tool kit gt page 492 gt Open the fuse box in engine compart ment gt page 544 gt Remove fuse 120 Find its location in the fuse chart Technical data Parts servic
143. sure normal balanced handling characteristics On packed snow they can reduce your stopping distance compared to summer tires Stopping distance however is still consid erably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice Exercise appro priate caution i Avoid spinning of a drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire speed rating local speed limits should be obeyed Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to pre vailing conditions A Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi mum speed rating of the tires Warning Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and or serious injury and possible death for you and for others An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph 210 km h Operation The factory equipped tires on your vehicle may have a tire speed rating above the maximum speed permitted by the electronic speed limiter Make sure your tires have the required tire speed rating as specified for your vehicle in the Technical data section gt page 555 for example when purchasing new tires For information on how to identify the tire speed rating on a tire s sidewall
144. sure that they are se cure and tighten them if necessary Repeat these checks at regular intervals as road surface conditions dictate and at least after every 1500 miles 2500 km of contin UOUS use Otherwise the crossbars mounted acces sories and the objects attached to them could come loose from the vehicle causing an accident thereby injuring you and other persons and or causing damage to proper ty including damage to your vehicle Do not use lubricant on the screws of the crossbars The screws could work loose and the crossbars could become detached from your vehicle together with the objects at tached to them causing an accident thereby injuring you and other persons and or caus ing damage to property including damage to your vehicle Warning A N Only install the crossbars at the exact loca tions designated on the roof rails The desig nated locations for the front crossbars are between the markings engraved on the in side of the roof rails gt page 298 The des ignated locations for the rear crossbars are between the gaps on the roof rails gt page 298 Otherwise the crossbars gt page 298 mounted accessories and the objects at tached to them could come loose from the vehicle causing an accident thereby injuring you and other persons and or causing dam age to property including damage to your vehicle Warning A N A roof load creates a greater surface area exposed to the wind and c
145. sure the vehicle level is set to highway gt page 279 A Your vehicle is equipped with air suspen sion Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate while mounting a spare wheel The vehicle could rise or lower to a previously se lected level You or others could be injured as a result Warning Drive to the nearest Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible to have the Minispare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel gt Park the vehicle in a safe distance from moving traffic on a hard flat surface when possible gt Turn on the hazard warning flasher Never operate the vehicle with more than gt page 149 one spare wheel mounted Do not switch off the ESP when a Minispare wheel is mounted Flat tire gt Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in a straight ahead position Set the parking brake gt page 59 Set the automatic transmission to park position P gt page 191 Turn off the engine gt page 41 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway Open door only when conditions are safe to do so gt Vehicles with SmartKey Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Open the driver s door this puts the starter switch in position 0 same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch The driver s door then can be closed again gt Remove the KEYLESS GO start stop button from the s
146. the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle Adapt your driving accordingly Warning BE When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the automatic transmission must be in neutral position N If you turn off the engine e using the SmartKey and e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or e open a front door e or when using the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open a front door the automatic transmission will shift to park position P automatically Practical hints If you want the gear position to remain in neutral position N observe the following instructions A When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch do not leave children unattended in the vehicle It is possible for children to switch on the ignition which could result in unsupervised use of vehicle equipment A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning Towing the vehicle Vehicles with SmartKey gt With the vehicle at a standstill and the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N If engaged release the parking brake gt page 59 Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt With the vehicle at
147. the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed Warning Close attention to road and traffic condi tions is imperative at all times regardless of whether or not Distronic is activated Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a continuous speed Distronic will not react to stationary objects in the roadway e g a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Distronic will also not respond to oncoming vehicles Switch off Distronic e when changing from the left to the right lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in the left lane e when entering a turn lane or highway off ramp e incomplex driving situations such as in highway construction zones In these situations Distronic will continue to maintain the set speed unless deactivated Distronic is designed and intended only to maintain a set speed and keep a set dis tance from moving objects in front of it i USA only This device has been approved by the FCC as a Vehicular Radar System The ra dar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only Removal tampering or alter ing of the device will void any warranties and is not permitted by the FCC Do not tamper with alter or use in any non approved way Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority
148. the hood can no longer engage af ter an accident for example The hood could gt Press and hold handle otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in The hood is unlocked motion and endanger you and others 2 Handle for opening the hood gt Pull up on the hood in direction of ar row and then release it gt Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft 30 cm The hood will lock audibly The hood will be automatically held 1 Release lever open at shoulder height by gas filled gt Pull release lever Q downwards struts gt Check to make sure the hood is fully The hood is unlocked Handle pro closed trudes slightly from the radiator grille If you can raise the hood at a point If not lift the hood slightly above the headlamps then it is not properly closed Open it again and let it T To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or drop with somewhat greater force hood never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield 379 Operation Engine compartment Engine oil Checking engine oil level Open the hood gt page 378 Pull out oil dipstick 4 Wipe oil dipstick clean Fully insert oil dipstick Q into the e the vehicle must have been stationary dipstick guide tube e the vehicle is new or wes 5 minutes with the engine gt Pull out oil dipstick again after urned o e the vehicle is driven frequently at approximately 3 seconds to ob
149. the right side Two buttons are located on the trim of the third row seats passenger side in the cargo compartment ea Bs Folding third row seats electrically ao Use the left button indicated by L to fold down the left third row seat Use the right button indicated by R to fold down the right third row seat There are several ways to fold the third row seats isis Example button for the left third row seat Example button for the right third row seat C Button for returning third row seats to 4 Button for returning third row seats to upright position upright position 2 Button for folding the third row seats 2 Button for folding the third row seats a It is only possible to fold the third row seats ce It is only possible to fold the third row seats down when the rear right door is open down when the tailgate is open gt Push in the head restraints of the third row seats all the way gt page 135 gt Remove cargo compartment cover blind gt page 311 gt D Controls in detail Loading gt gt Press and hold button for each side until the third row seats are fully fold ed IK Ve ee dee A If a third row seat is not engaged properly for example the message 3rd Row Of Seats Right Not Locked appears in the multifunction display gt page 155 gt Press and hold button 2 again until the message disappears Expanding cargo compartmen
150. the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the door win dow the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing a door window by pulling and holding the switch or by pressing and hold ing button on the SmartKey by press ing and holding the lock button vehicles with KEYLESS GO on a door handle the automatic reversal function will not operate When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury i You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey see Summer opening fea ture gt page 249 and see Convenience clos ing feature gt page 250 Depending on the current position the power windows may also open or close when the air recirculation button aj on the control panel of the climate control gt page 216 or automatic climate control page 230 is pressed and held After switching off the ignition gt page 41 or removing the SmartKey from the starter switch the windows can be operated e until you open the driver s or front passenger door e foratleast 5
151. third row sunshade engages Opening gt Press on button to disengage the third row sunshade from mounting Q Activating gt Press button on the climate con trol panel gt page 216 or the automat ic climate control panel gt page 230 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Deactivating gt Press button uM once more The indicator lamp on the button goes out EJ ifthe rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing too many electrical consumers are operating simul taneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery The system responds automatically by switching the rear window defroster off As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage the rear window defroster switches back on auto matically Controls in detail Good visibility Controls in detail Climate control GI GIO Gee 0000 Driver s door air vent fixed Left side air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side and door air vent Windshield air vents Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent Left center air vent adjustable Right center air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side and door air vent Right side air vent adjustable Front passenger door air vent fixed Climate control panel Footwell air vents
152. this chapter Safety and Security Occupant safety Self test Occupant Classification System After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button once or twice the indicator lamp gt page 85 located in the center console illuminates If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the front passenger seat and the system senses the occupant as being an adult the indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after approxi mately 6 seconds If the seat is not occupied and the system senses the front passenger seat as being empty the indicator lamp will illuminate and not go out Warning A N If the indicator lamp should not illuminate the system is not functioning You must see an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 447 Warning A N Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat e g pillow since it reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi cation System The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident instead of increasing protec tion for the child Follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation of child seats Seat belts The use of seat belts an
153. this vehicle feature such intelligent limited slip differ ential technology ideally suited for on road and light off road driving Transfer case position LOW gt page 201 also en hances off road driving capabilities gt page 355 More extreme off road conditions may call for another solution engaging a differen tial lock or preventing the differential from operating altogether This vehicle comes with two differential locks transfer case center and rear Each can be engaged simply by operating a rotary switch located on the center console gt page 205 When the transfer case center differential is locked the combined or average speed of the front wheels is identical to the com bined rear wheel speed When the rear differential is locked both rear wheels turn at the same speed independent of the in dividual torque Please be aware that en gaging the differential locks will significantly reduce the steering ability of the vehicle For your safety and the safety of others and to prevent damage to the vehicle the differential locks must not be engaged when driving on paved roads It is impor tant to understand that during on road paved driving differentials are absolutely necessary for providing the es sential control and steering ability of the vehicle The differential locks therefore must not be engaged when driving on paved roads and should only be used to the extent necessary to negotiate off road
154. to leather upholstery e Wipe with light pressure only e Do not clean with abrasive cleaning agents such as scouring milk or powder e Do not soak the leather upholstery As leather is a natural product it could otherwise harden or become porous e Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet MB Tex upholstery gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care onto a soft lint free cloth and apply with light pressure for cleaning the upholstery Wood trims gt Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle pa Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive Practical hints What to do if Where will I find Unlocking locking in an emergency Resetting activated head restraints Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Bleeding the fuel system diesel engine only Battery Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses Practical hints What to do if Lamps in instrument cluster Problem The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on while the engine is running General information bulb self check when switching on the If any of the following lamps in the instru ignition have the respective bulb checked ment cluster fails to come on during the and replaced if necessary Possible cause consequence Suggest
155. torque of 110 Ib ft 150 Nm Only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle s rims For information on wheel change see the Practical hints section gt page 490 and gt page 519 Operation Winter driving Before the onset of winter have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center This service includes e Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration e Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system Add MB Concentrate MB SummerFit to a premixed wind shield washer solvent antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point gt page 569 e Battery test Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature A well charged battery helps to make sure that the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures e Tire change Mercedes Benz recom mends M S rated radial ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 7 in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45 F 7 C and whenever wintry road conditions prevail Not all M S rated tires provide special winter performance Make sure the tires you use show the mountain snowflake marking on the tire sidewall These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association RMA and Th
156. tuned station appears in the multifunction display diet A 1011 Fi 1 Waveband setting 2 Station frequency gt Press button BVA or EAN repeatedly until the desired station is found The station search depends on the se lected setting in the Vehicle submenu of the control system gt page 180 Pressing button RA or BA will either start a frequency scan or select the next stored radio station i You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio Refer to separate COMAND system operating instruc tions You can also operate the radio in the usual manner Selecting satellite radio station The satellite radio is treated as a radio application gt Select satellite radio with the corresponding soft key on the COMAND system C SAT mode 2 Channel name or number gt Press button BV or EAN repeatedly until the desired channel is found ay Additional optional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to satellite radio service pro vider are required for satellite radio operation Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for details and availability for your vehicle For more information refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions Operating CD player Selecting CD track gt Turn onthe COMAND system and select CD Refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions gt Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the
157. unlocking switch This can be useful for example if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un locked with the central locking or unlock ing switch A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning The switches are located in the drivers door if i l G j j Fo r f r j r J li Pa fi j pn 1 Central unlocking switch 2 Central locking switch Locking gt Press central locking switch 2 If all doors and the tailgate are closed the vehicle locks Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Unlocking gt Press central unlocking switch Q The vehicle unlocks You can open a locked door from inside at any time Open door only when conditions are safe to do so If the vehicle was previously centrally locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS GO it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch e andthe SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is set to factory settings the complete vehicle is unlocked when a front door is opened from the inside
158. use of snow chains is not permissible with the spare wheel T Vehicles with ADS When driving with snow chains do not select SPORT mode page 279 a gt When driving with snow chains you may wish to deactivate the ESP gt page 105 before setting the vehicle in motion This will improve the vehicle s traction Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow Winter driving Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains e Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel tire combinations gt page 555 e Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels Follow the manufac turer s mounting instructions e Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes Benz Any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to advise you on this subject e Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains e Do not use snow chains on the spare wheel gt page 558 Operation Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indicator display T Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenan
159. used for long periods of time You can use the power outlets except for the power outlet in the front center console even if the ignition is switched off An emergency shut off feature ensures that the vehicle s electrical voltage does not fall below a minimum level If the voltage drops to this mini mum level the power outlets are automatically switched off This ensures that enough power re mains to start the engine Power outlets are located e inthe front center console gt page 324 e inthe front passenger footwell gt page 324 e in the second row footwell gt page 325 e onthe left hand side of the cargo com partment gt page 325 Power outlet in front center console 1 Power outlet cover gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 gt Open cover plate gt page 317 gt Pull out cover Q and insert electrical plug cigarette lighter type a Depending on vehicle configuration the storage compartment contains an ashtray with cigarette lighter gt page 323 instead Power outlet in front passenger footwell 12V MAX 20A gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 gt Flip up cover and insert electrical plug cigarette lighter type Controls in detail Useful features Power outlet in second row footwell Power outlet in cargo compartment Floormats e OC Warning A N Whenever you are using floormats make 1 2 V sure there is enough clearance
160. using the exterior lamp switch gt page 143 gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 511 gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 511 Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Cornering Lamp The left corner illuminating front gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Left fog lamp is malfunctioning gt page 510 Cornering Lamp The right corner illuminating gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Right front fog lamp is malfunctioning gt page 510 Front Foglamp The left front fog lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Left malfunctioning gt page 510 Front Foglamp The right front fog lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Right malfunctioning gt page 510 High Beam The left high beam lamp is Halogen headlamp Lert malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 508 Bi Xenon headlamp gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible High Beam The right high beam lamp is Halogen headlamp Right malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 508 Bi Xenon headlamp gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Display symbol 10 oe I Display message License Plate Lamp Left License Plate Lamp Right Low Beam Left Low Beam Right Practical
161. vehicle and those directly ahead of it but does not register stationary objects in the road e g e a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam e a disabled vehicle e an oncoming vehicle The driver must always be alert observe all traffic and intercede as required by means of steering or braking the vehicle Warning A N Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy road conditions The most likely cause for a malfunctioning system is a dirty sensor located behind the hood grille especially at times of snow and ice or heavy rain In such a case Distronic will switch off and the message DISTRONIC Currently Unavailable See Qperator s Manual appears in the multi function display For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen sor see Cleaning the Distronic system sensor cover gt page 430 if the message DISTRONIC Available Again appears during driving the dirt e g slush has dissolved Distronic works again if you reactivate it gt page 266 Controls in detail Turns and bends P54 70 2205 31 In turns or bends Distronic may not detect a moving vehicle in front or it may detect one too soon This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Driving systems Offset driving P54 70 2206 31 A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from your direct line of travel may not be detected by Distronic There will be insuffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead Controls in deta
162. volume Adjusting air distribution gt Move airvent slider to the left right up or down to direct the air in the de sired direction Front defroster You can use this setting to defrost the windshield for example if it is iced up You can also use it to defog the windshield and door windows i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the door windows are clear again Activating gt Press button gt page 216 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Controls in detail The climate control switches to the follow ing functions automatically e most efficient blower speed and heating power depending on outside temperature e air flows onto the windshield and the door windows side air vents must be open e the air conditioning compressor switches on at outside temperatures above approximately 41 F 5 C for air drying Adjustments You can adjust the air volume and the tem perature when the front defroster is switched on The air flow will remain on the windshield and door windows gt Press button to decrease or button to increase air volume gt page 216 to the desired level Climate control The air volume decreases increases to the next lower higher blower speed and heating switches to the tempera ture that was set before the front de froster was switched on The indicator lamp on button goes out The indicator lamp on button comes on or gt Turn tem
163. ways a When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently Adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments a The set value is decreased in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments each time you press the cruise control lever down to the resis tance point gt Briefly press the cruise control lever down to the resistance point in direc tion of arrow 2 gt page 265 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle speed decreases in incre ments of 1 mph Canada 1 km h Controls in detail Driving systems Adjustment in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments i The set speed value is decreased in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments each time you press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point gt Briefly press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point in direc tion of arrow 2 gt page 265 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle set speed decreases in increments of 5 mph Canada 10 km h Q The new speed is set and the vehicle will decelerate Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed Setting to last stored speed Resume function A The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit Possible acceleration or decelera tion diff
164. when you are driving off road Controls in detail e Air suspension program There are two components available e Vehicle level control gt page 279 which controls the vehicle level e Adaptive Damping System ADS gt page 278 which adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics Parktronic gt page 288 and rear view camera gt page 293 which serve as a parking aid For information on the ABS BAS EBP ESP and 4 ETS see Driving safety sys tems gt page 101 Driving systems Cruise control J The cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle The use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extend ed periods of time You can set or resume cruise control at any speed above 20 mph 30 km h The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left hand side of the steering column gt page 24 The cruise control should not be activated during off road driving Controls in detail Driving systems Warning A N The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle s speed and for safe brake operation Only use the cruise control if the road traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel
165. winter operation You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion In doing so do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle A prerequisite for a thor ough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection Dam aged areas need to be re undercoated Operation Vehicle care Your vehicle has been treated at the facto ry with a wax base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle Post production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others ap plied later We have selected car care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology You can obtain Mercedes Benz approved car care products at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center scratches corrosive deposits corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car care products recommended here In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important how to information as well as references to Mercedes Benz approved car car
166. your vehicle For further information you can find us on the Mercedes Benz web site www mbusa com or www mercedes benz ca Warning A To help avoid personal injury be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment which may in turn result in personal injury If you have questions about carrying out any type of service turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore information illustrations and descriptions in this Operators Manual might differ from your vehicle Reprinting translation and copying even of excerpts is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing Press time March 23 2007 GSP TID Printed in U S A
167. 1 Storage compartment cover 2 Release button gt Briefly press release button 2 on storage compartment cover Q The storage compartment opens automatically a Depending on vehicle configuration the middle storage compartment contains an ashtray gt page 322 Parcel nets Warning VAN Do not place objects with a combined weight of more than 4 4 Ib 2 kg into the parcel net on the back of the front passen ger seat Otherwise the Occupant Classifi cation System OCS gt page 81 may not be able to properly approximate the occupant weight category Parcel nets are intended for storing light weight items only Heavy objects objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the parcel nets In an accident during hard braking or sudden maneuvers they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident Controls in detail Parcel net in front passenger footwell A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell It is intend ed for small and light items such as road maps mail etc g 1 Parcel net Useful features Parcel nets on front seat backrests A small convenience parcel net is located on each of the front seat backrests It is in tended for small and light items such as road maps mail etc 1 Parcel net Contr
168. 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty During severe operating conditions e g stop and go traffic the coolant temperature may rise close to 248 F 120 C Controls in detail Calling up digital speedometer or outside temperature gt Press button BYA or FA repeatedly until the digital soeedometer or the outside temperature appears in the multifunction display Digital speedometer Outside temperature Control system You can select whether the digital soeedom eter or the outside temperature is shown in the multifunction display You can change the setting in the submenu Instrument Cluster via the function Status Line Display see Selecting display digital speedometer or outside temperature for status indicator page 173 Controls in detail Control system AUDIO menu The functions in the AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on If no audio equipment is currently turned on the message AUDIO Off appears in the multifunction display The following functions are available Function Page Selecting radio station 164 Selecting satellite radio station 164 Operating CD player 165 Selecting radio station gt Turn onthe COMAND system and select radio Refer to separate COMAND system operating instruc tions Press button or repeatedly until the currently
169. 376 381 Messages in the multifunction display 470 472 Temperature 372 Temperature display 162 Corner illuminating front fog lamps 147 Messages in the multifunction display 478 Replacing bulbs 510 Crossbars 295 Crossing obstacles 361 Cruise control 255 Activating 257 Messages in the multifunction display 452 Cup holders 320 Cleaning 321 Front center console 321 Front center console Removing Installing 321 Rear armrest 320 Curb weight 416 D Date display Setting 174 Daytime running lamp mode 145 Setting 175 Deep water see Standing water Defogging windshield 221 235 Defrosting Front 221 235 Defrosting Rear 212 Delayed shut off Exteriorlamps 176 Interior lighting 177 Department of Transportation see DOT Diesel engine Preglow indicator lamp 29 Differential locks 204 A few words about 204 Messages in the multifunction display 488 Switching 205 Difficulties While driving 65 While starting 59 Digital clock see Clock Digital speedometer 155 163 Dimensions Vehicle 560 Direction of rotation tires 387 Displays Digital speedometer 155 163 Distronic 263 Maintenance service indicator 422 Messages in the multifunction display 449 Multifunction display 155 Outside temperature Selecting 173 Symbol messages 466 Text messages 451 Vehicle status message 168 449 Vehicle system settings Control system 159 161 168 155 163 Distance to empty range Trip Computer 184 Distronic
170. 8 Cruise control 452 Distronic 453 Doors 474 Downhill Speed Regulation 467 EBP 468 Engine coolant 470 472 ESP 441 Fog lamps Front 478 Fog lamps Rear 480 Front passenger front airbag 460 461 462 463 Fuelcap 474 Headlamps 477 478 480 482 Hood 474 Key SmartKey 476 Key SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 475 476 Lamps 477 478 479 480 482 Low tire pressure 464 484 485 Parking brake 468 Parking lamps 480 Tele Aid 483 Telephone 483 Turn signals 482 Vehicle battery 466 Windshield washer fluid 483 Multifunction steering wheel 30 156 Button operation 156 N Navigation system 166 See separate COMAND System operating instructions Net Cargo 312 Net Parcel 319 Neutral gear position Automatic transmission 189 New vehicle Break in period 346 Night security illumination 146 176 Normal occupant weight 417 Number Vehicle Identification VIN 550 Occupant distribution 417 Occupant safety 74 Active head restraint 90 Airbags 76 Children and airbags 77 91 93 Children in the vehicle 91 Fastening the seat belt 53 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 81 85 86 Infant and child restraint systems 92 LATCH type child seat anchors 95 OCS 81 OCS Messages in the multifunction display 460 461 462 463 Seat belts 53 78 OCS 81 Self test 86 Odometer 153 155 162 Off road 4 ETS 108 Off road ABS 102 Off road ESP 106 Off road driving Checklist 357 363
171. 88 Terminology 415 Tire Identification Number see TIN 298 299 300 Tire inflation pressure Checking manually 395 Checking tire pressure electronically with the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System Advanced TPMS Canada only 401 Checking tire pressure electronically with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS USA only 398 Recommended tire inflation pressure 393 Tires 384 555 Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring system Advanced TPMS Canada only 401 Air pressure 415 Care and maintenance Chains 421 Cleaning 386 Combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale USA only 27 Direction of rotation Spinning 387 385 Driving instructions 351 Hydroplaning 352 Important guidelines 384 Important notes Tire inflation pressure 394 Inflation pressure 377 393 395 Information placard 388 Inspection 385 Load rating 406 407 417 Loading Information 388 Loading terminology 415 Loading the vehicle 387 Low tire pressure telltale Canada only 27 444 Maximum load 418 Messages in the multifunction display 444 Ply composition and material used 418 Problems under overinflation 405 Retreads 384 Rims and tires 555 Rotating 387 Run Flat Indicator Canada only 396 Service life 385 Sizes 406 Snow chains 421 Spare wheel 494 520 Speed rating 353 408 418 Storing 386 Temperature 394 414 Terminology 415 TIN 410 417 Tire Identification Number see TIN Tire Pressu
172. 9 Switching off gt Press button Q repeatedly until all indicator lamps 2 go out Y Memory function Prior to operating the vehicle the driver should check and adjust the seat height seat position fore and aft and seat back rest angle if necessary to ensure adequate control reach and comfort The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height See also the section on air bags gt page 76 for proper seat posi tioning In addition adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control reach operation and comfort Both the interior and exterior rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision Fasten seat belts Infants and small chil dren should be seated in a properly se cured restraint system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan dards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 With the memory function you can store up to three different configurations Each stored position on the driver s side includes the following settings e Seat position e Multicontour seat previously saved setting e Steering wheel position e Exterior rear view mirrors position Each stored position on the passenger side includes the following settings e Seat position e Multicontour seat previously saved setting A Do not activate the memory function while driving Activating the memory function while driving could cause the drive
173. Automatic climate control on off Air distribution passenger side Air distribution passenger side AC cooling on off Residual heat ventilation Display Decreasing air volume Air recirculation Air distribution driver s side Air distribution driver s side Interior temperature sensor Adopting driver s side settings for all zones A When operating the automatic climate con trol the air that enters the passenger com partment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold depending on the set tem perature This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Warning Always keep sufficient distance between un protected parts of the body and the air vents If necessary use the air distribution controls page 230 to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin The automatic climate control is a 3 zone intelligent automatic climate control sys tem Your vehicle interior is divided into 3 zones P83 00 2175 31 Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control With the help of a sun sensor the automat ic climate control determines the relation of the sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts the inside temperature for every individual zone The automatic climate control is operation al whenever the engine is running It cools the vehicle s interior according to the an gle
174. CD currently being played appear in the multifunc tion display coa Track 1I 1 Current CD for CD changer 2 Current track gt Press button BV or BA repeatedly until the desired track is selected aD To select a CD from the CD changer magazine press a number on the COMAND system key pad located in the center console Controls in detail Control system Selecting MP3 CD track gt Turn on the COMAND system and se lect MP3 Refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions gt Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the MP3 CD currently being played appear in the multifunction display Smalltown Vv GEOG 4 MP3 mode 2 Current track gt Press button BV or EAN repeatedly until the desired track is selected Controls in detail Control system NAV menu The NAV menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system gt Press button or repeatedly until the message NAV appears in the multifunction display The message shown in the multifunction display depends on the status of the navi gation system e With the COMAND system switched off the message NAV Off appears in the multifunction display e With the COMAND system switched on but route guidance not activated the direction of travel and if applicable the name of the street currently traveled on appear in the multifunction display e With the COMAND syste
175. CDI GL 320 CDI GL 450 GL 450 GL 450 Rims light alloy 8 Jx 18 H2 8 5 Jx 19 H2 8 5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset 2 36 in 53 mm 2 20 in 56 mm 2 20 in 56 mm Summer tires 275 50 R20 109W All season tires 265 60 R18 110H M S 275 55 R19 111H M S Rims light alloy 8 Jx 18 H2 8 5 Jx 19 H2 8 5 Jx 19 H2 Wheel offset 2 36 in 53 mm 2 20 in 56 mm 2 20 in 56 mm Winter tires 265 60 R18 110H M S 265 55 R19 109H M S 265 55 R19 109H M S All terrain tires 265 60 R18 110H M S 275 55 R19 111H M S 275 55 R19 111H M S Radial ply tires 2 Not available as factory equipment Model AMG rims light alloy Wheel offset All season tires Rims light alloy Wheel offset Winter tires All season tires Radial ply tires GL 550 10Jx21H2 1 46 in 37 mm 295 40 R21 111V XL Extra Load M S 8 5 Jx 19 H2 2 20 in 56 mm 265 55 R19 109H M S 265 55 R19 109H M S 2 Must not be used with snow chains 3 Not available as factory equipment Technical data Rims and tires Technical data Rims and tires Minispare wheel Model Rim Wheel offset Minispare tire 1 Must not be used with snow chains i Please compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the Minispare wheel rim If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the Minispare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator s Manual
176. Canada only While the vehicle is being driven the Run Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each wheel s rota tional speed This allows the system to de tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire If a wheel s rotational speed changes due to falling tire inflation pressure you will see a corresponding warning message in the multifunction display The Run Flat Indicator may function in a restricted manner or with a delay e if snow chains are mounted to the vehicle e in presence of ice and snow e if you are driving on a loose surface e g sand or gravel e if you are driving in a very sporty manner involving rapid acceleration or high speeds in curves Warning A N When the multifunction display shows the message Tire Pressure Check Tires one or more of your tires is significantly un derinflated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper tire inflation pressure as indicat ed on the vehicle s Tire and Loading Information placard or if available on the tire inflation pressure label Driving on a sig nificantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Un derinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Each tire in cluding the spare should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recom mended tire inflation pres
177. Center after a Vehicles without Rear seat entertain ion in direction of arrow as far as it rear end collision ment system will go gt Adjust the head restraint cushion downward in direction of arrow 2 as far as it will go i Pressing the head restraint cushion back requires high force If you encounter difficulties when pushing the head restraint back please have the procedure performed at an authorized p Firmly press the top of the active head Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center restraint cushion towards the head restraint cover in direction of arrow 3 until it engages gt gt Practical hints Resetting activated head restraints gt gt gt Repeat this procedure on the active Vehicles with Rear seat entertainment head restraint for the second front system seat gt Take the reset tool out of the Mercedes Benz vehicle literature pouch For information on active head restraints see Active head restraint gt page 90 For information on head restraint adjust ment see Seats gt page 45 P91 16 2550 31 1 Reset tool 2 Active head restraint 3 Rectangular opening gt Guide reset tool Q into rectangular S i i is eae opening 8 of active head restraint 2 1 Reset tool gt Press reset tool G downward in 2 Active head restraint direction of arrow until you hear the head restraint release mechanism audibly disengage gt Pull out reset tool Q gt F
178. Controls in detail Climate control Deactivating the climate control system Warning When the climate control system is switched off the outside air supply and cir culation are also switched off Only choose this settings for a short time Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others Deactivating gt Press button gt page 216 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Reactivating gt Press button RA gt page 216 You can also press button gt page 216 on the climate control panel If you press button gt page 216 to reactivate the climate control system the defrosting mode is activated Operating the climate control system in automatic mode i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature air volume and air distri bution In automatic mode cooling with dehumidify is switched on This function can be switched off if necessary page 225 Activating gt Press button R gt page 216 while the engine is running The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air volume and air distri bution are adjusted automatically Use temperature controls Q and 7 gt page 216 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment The interior air temperature is adjusted automatically The settings for the passenger side are also
179. Doing so could impair the function of the KEYLESS GO system Controls in detail To lock or unlock the vehicle the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located outside the vehicle within ap proximately 3 ft 1 m of the respective door or the tailgate If the vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS GO function In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO e The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located in the vehicle e The KEYLESS GO start stop button must be inserted in the starter switch gt page 43 e The brake pedal must be firmly depressed Do not depress the accelerator Locking and unlocking If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is positioned farther away from the vehi cle the system may no longer recog nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO The vehicle then cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS GO system If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 57 you can turn it off again by e pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 69 e inserting the SmartKey into the starter switch when the vehicle is at a standstill and the automatic transmission is in position P gt page 69 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is removed from the vehicle e g if a passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEY
180. EN on the multifunction steering wheel When the highway level is reached indica tor lamp gt page 281 goes out The following message appears in the multi function display for 5 seconds AIRMATIC G o Compass NE The vehicle is lowered automatically to the highway level if e the vehicle speed is above 55 mph 88 km h e the speed stays between 40 mph 64 km h and 55 mph 88 km h for approximately 20 seconds Vehicles with enhanced Off road Package The switch is located on the upper part of the center console 1 Rotatable outer adjustment ring 2 Set higher vehicle level 3 Indicator lamps 4 Set lower vehicle level Controls in detail Driving systems Basic settings The following vehicle chassis ride heights can be selected using the vehicle level switch in the center console Level Off road 3 Driving situation For slow driving on rough terrain Lower middle and upper indi cator lamps are on Off road 2 Off road driving Lower and middle indicator lamps are on Off road 1 For driving on easy ter rain Lower indicator lamp is on Highway For normal driving In dicator lamps are off a gt Another available level is the high speed level that is set automatically Controls in detail Driving systems The following is the approximate change in ride height for each of the level settings Level Ride height Off road 3 4 3 in 110 mm
181. GHWAY DIESEL FUEL 500 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM e any other diesel fuel with a sulfur content of above 15 ppm The use of such non approved fuels and or special additives is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Low outside temperatures diesel engine To prevent malfunctions diesel fuel with improved cold flow characteristics is of fered in the winter months Check with your fuel retailer BE Do not fill the tank with gasoline Do not blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine The fuel system and engine will otherwise be dam aged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Check regularly and before a long trip gt Open the hood gt page 378 Example illustration GL 450 GL 320 CDI GL 550 similar C Brake fluid 2 Coolant level 3 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system Engine oil level For more information on engine oil see Engine oil gt page 380 Brake fluid T If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center immediately Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem For more information see Brake fluid gt page 564 Coolant For normal replenishing use water pota ble water quality For more information see Coolant lev
182. GO Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being in Tailgate closing switch jured To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when clos ing the tailgate Be especially careful when small children are around To stop the clos ing procedure do one of the following e Press tailgate closing switch gt page 126 e Press KEYLESS GO locking closing switch vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt page 127 e Press the button on the SmartKey gt page 112 or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 115 e Press or pull the remote tailgate switch on the driver s door gt page 124 Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the tailgate closing switch can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Do not place the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the open cargo compartment You may lock yourself out Warning A N Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being in jured To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening w
183. Indicator lamps see Lamps Indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems see Children in the vehicle Inflation pressure see Tires Inflation pressures Information button see Tele Aid Infrared reflecting windshield 344 Inside door handle 120 Instrument cluster 26 28 152 Illumination brightness 153 Lamps 436 Messages in display see Multifunction display messages Multifunction display 155 Outside temperature indicator 153 Selecting language 172 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster Illumination brightness Instrument panel see Instrument cluster Instruments and controls see Cockpit Interior lighting 149 Delayed shut off 177 Interior rear view mirror 51 Antiglare positions 208 Auto dimming mirrors 208 Interior storage spaces see Storage compartments Intermittent wiping Windshield wipers 63 J Jack 492 493 Lifting the vehicle 520 Jump starting 536 K Key Mechanical 496 Key SmartKey 112 Batteries 120 502 Battery check lamp 112 Checking battery condition 120 Closing the power windows Convenience closing feature 250 Closing the tilt sliding sunroof Convenience closing feature 250 Closing Power tailgate 126 Factory setting 114 Locking unlocking 40 70 112 Locking unlocking Global setting 114 Loss of 120 Messages in the multifunction display 476 Opening the power windows Summer opening feature 249 Opening the tilt sliding sunroof Summer opening feature 249 Remote control 112 Repla
184. LESS GO e when pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button or trying to lock the vehicle with the look button on an outside door handle the mes sage Key Not Detected appears in the multifunction display e with the engine running the mes sage Key Not Detected appears in the multifunction display while driving off Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or change its present location immediate ly e g place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket Remember that the engine can be started by anyone with a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO that is left inside the vehicle Possibility 1 One SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the vehicle one SmartKey with KEYLESS GO outside the vehicle If you leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO behind when exiting and locking the vehicle no message appears in the multifunction display Possibility 2 One SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the vehicle no SmartKey with KEYLESS GO outside the vehicle When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle the message Key Detected In Vehicle will appear inthe multifunction display The vehicle will not be locked Factory setting Global unlocking gt Grasp an outside door handle All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is dis armed The vehicle will lock again automatically and rearm the anti theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if e neither a door
185. LESS GO gt Grasp an outside door handle Starter switch positions All turn signal lamps flash once The ve hicle unlocks The locking knobs in the pee doors move up The anti theft alarm enn A system is disarmed The locator light ing comes on if the feature is enabled in the control system gt page 176 With the KEYLESS GO function you can lock or unlock the vehicle without using the remote control buttons on the SmartKey and start the engine without in serting the SmartKey into the starter When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO switch from the starter switch take it with you and fthe vehicle has been parked for more than lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat yA me P H a Ai 72 hours you must pull an outside door handle tended in the vehicle or with access to an ee E in order to activate the KEYLESS GO function unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised further than approximately 3 feet 1 meter away from the respective door gt Enter the vehicle access to a vehicle could result in an l accident and or serious personal injury For more information see SmartKey with Warning N _ KEYLESS GO gt page 115 When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could resul
186. O to starter switch position O and remove or press KEYLESS GO start stop button vehi cles with KEYLESS GO Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock vehicle when leaving Operation Tires Warning A N If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance or you suspect that possi ble damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on the hazard warning flash ers carefully slow down and drive with cau tion to an area which is a safe distance from the road Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or tire dealer for repairs Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced Driving instructions The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread Warning A N Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately in 1 6 mm we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level As tread depth approaches in 3 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced Depending u
187. Page Item Page eM Left turn signal 7 Speedometer with Brake warning lamp 437 indicator lamp KEE 436 USA only To dim instrument cluster 153 System ABS Brake warning lamp 437 illumination indicator lamp Canada only Reset button for Me Variable speed limiter Electronic Stability 441 e Resetting trip odometer 153 Ine Carton lamp Program ESP warning lamp e Resetting all settings 169 visialice SANE O POEA lamp 440 Combination low tire 444 D edt ea lee Lamp without function It illuminates when the pressure TPMS mal e ASTET UNIAO ignition is on It should go out when the engine is function telltale EE Right turn signal running USA only indicator lamp 2 Vehicles without Distronic Warning lamp without function It illuminates when the ignition is on Low tire pressus Clock 174 It should go out when the engine is running telltale Canada only 444 3 glance as Instrument cluster 145 5 Miles 26753 P54 30 9561 31 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page Item Page Item Page Multifunction display with Fuel gauge with e Distance warning func 183 e Trip odometer 153 Fuel tank reserve warning 446 tion indicator lam Canada only e Main odometer 155 p EA aap ee mode Tachometer with EF Fuel filler flap indica 374 eee tor The fuel filler flap Seat belt telltale 89 is located on the rear e Downhill Speed Regula 275 442 right hand side tion DSR indicator K n ea indicator 9 Multifunction
188. Q For draft free ventilation move the sliders for center air vents and side air vents to the middle position Controls in detail Climate control Controls in detail Climate control GO Sle Temperature control left Air distribution and air volume automatic manual Front defroster Increasing air volume Air distribution directs air through the windshield and side air vents Rear climate control on off Air supply for rear passenger compartment on off USA only Canada only Temperature control right 000000 AC cooling on off Residual heat ventilation Air distribution directs air through center and side air vents Air distribution directs air through the footwells and side air vents Air volume display Decreasing air volume Rear window defroster Air recirculation Interior temperature sensor Climate control on off The climate control is operational whenev er the engine is running You can operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature Warning A N When operating the climate control the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold depending on the set temperature This may cause burns or frostbite to unpro tected skin in the immediate area of the air vents A
189. Regulation programmed default speed In the DSR menu you can program the default speed the DSR is set to when it is activated You can program the default speed be tween 4 10 mph Canada 6 18 km h The set value is increased in 1 mph Canada 2 km h increments gt Press button or repeatedly until the message DSR Speed appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Controls in detail Control system gt gt Press button or E repeatedly until the desired speed is shown in the multifunction display When DSR is switched on DSR will use the programmed default speed to regu late the vehicle s speed Once DSR is switched on you can adjust the set speed using the cruise control lever gt page 276 Trip computer menu Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle The following information is available Function Page Fuel consumption statistics 184 since start Fuel consumption statistics 185 since last reset Resetting fuel consumption 185 statistics Distance to empty 185 i When you enter the trip computer menu you will always see the fuel consumption statistics since start first Fuel consumption statistics since start gt Press button or repeatedly until the message From Start appears in the multifunction display From Start TOM 1 Distance driven since start 2 Time elapsed since start 3
190. The bow wave could force wa ter into the engine and auxiliary equipment thus damaging them If you must drive through standing water drive slowly to prevent water from entering the pas senger compartment or the engine compart ment Water in these areas could cause e damage to electrical components e wiring of the engine or transmission or could result e in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe inter nal engine damage Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty i Select the raised level gt page 279 before driving through standing water For more information see Driving through water gt page 360 Off road driving Warning A N Do not load items on the crossbars It may cause instability during some maneuvers which could result in an accident Drive slowly in unknown terrain This will make it easier to recognize unexpected ob stacles and avoid damage to the vehicle To help avoid the vehicle rolling over never turn it around on steep inclines If the vehi cle cannot complete the attempted climb back it down in reverse gear Do not drive along the side of a slope The vehicle might otherwise rollover If in doing so the vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll immediately steer into a line of gravity straight up or downhill Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle You may lose control of the vehicle if you use
191. The lower and middle indicator lamps 3 gt page 283 comes on continuously While the vehicle is adjusting from off road level 2 to off road level 3 you will see for example the following message in the multifunction display OFF road G NE fog Max 20 MPH Controls in detail Driving systems gt COnce off road level 3 is reached you will e lf you continue to increase your speed Once off road level 2 is reached you will see for example the following message in the message remains in the multifunc see for example the following message in the multifunction display tion display the multifunction display The new level will not be shown until the vehicle has been able to adjust to a level appropriate for the speed at which you are currently driving OFF road OFF road G o NE fos Mas 20 MPH Ga NE Fog e lf you maintain or reduce your speed T SSE i you will see for example the following ae The message Max 20 MPH reminds you of message in the multifunction display While driving the vehicle is automatically the maximum permissible driving speed with while the vehicle is lowering lowered as follows off road level 3 e Atspeeds above 55 mph 88 km h or Off road f if the speed lies between 40 mph 64 km h and 55 mph 88 km h for Szo HE Fog Uf i approximately 20 seconds the na SOO ii off road level 2 setting is canceled and l the vehicle is lowered to the off road
192. The seat backrest folds forward The front passenger seat moved slightly forward Controls in detail Seats For setting the front passenger seatback gt To exit the vehicle when seated on a into the stored position see Recalling po third row seat pull up and hold sitions from memory gt page 142 easy exit strap Q For information on how to fold down the The right second row seat backrest second row seats completely see Folding folds forward second row seats gt page 306 M Pull and hold once easy entry strap 1 Easy exit feature for third row seats gt Lift up the right second row seat until it folds forward The easy exit strap is located on the right rear of the second row seat base You should now have sufficient space to exit the vehicle s third row seat Easy entry exit position While the easy entry feature is activated you will see for example the following message in the multifunction display 2nd Row Of Seats Right Not Locked a Vehicles with memory function The front passenger seat moved slightly forward While the easy entry feature is activated you will see for example the following message in the multifunction display 2nd Row Of Seats Right Not Locked gt gt gt Return seat into its original position gt page 132 2 4 i sony r i Pe AV Oe I L WA ARNT T l i iF PAL g INUN KLO 3 INi N i 29 PT wa 1 A ee ATAA a ATRAN i
193. W RANGE is in neu tral position There is no connection between the engine and the drive wheels Possible solution gt vy Do not drive faster than 50 mph 80 km h Have the vehicle checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Continue driving with added caution The lock function is unavailable Wait for the lock system to cool down The differential locks will be reactivat ed as soon as they have cooled down Do not attempt to continue driving You could otherwise damage the vehicle s drivetrain Stop the vehicle in a safe location or soon as it is safe to do So Engage the parking brake Perform the shifting procedure again gt page 202 Display symbol LR R Display message Service Required If parked engage pk brake Max Speed 25 MPH Max Speed 40 MPH SMe res ly ONE Shifting Process Canceled Reactivate Practical hints Possible cause consequence The LOW RANGE system is malfunctioning Speed too high for shifting proce dure Speed too high for shifting proce dure You have reduced engine speed You may now carry out a shifting proce dure The shifting procedure was not car ried out What to do if Possible solution gt Do not drive faster than 50 mph 80 km h Engage the parking brake if parked Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible gt Continue driving more slowly gt Con
194. a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the telephone when road weather and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Only operate the COMAND system if road weather and traffic conditions permit Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximate ly 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements a Various mobile phone cradles can be in stalled in the front center armrest see separate installation instructions for the mobile phone cradle These mobile phone cradles can be ob tained from an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center The functions and services available to you while using the mobile phone depend on your service provider and the type of mobile phone you are using See also separate operating manual for in structions on how to use your mobile phone When the mobile phone is inserted in the cradle you can operate the telephone us ing the following devices e mobile phone keypad e COMAND system see separate operat ing instructions e buttons and on the multi function steering wheel gt page 156 e Voice Control System see separate operating instructions Please note that these functions are only ava
195. a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed With the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to park position P Release the brake pedal gt gt Practical hints Towing the vehicle Remove the KEYLESS GO start stop button from the starter switch gt page 43 gt gt gt gt Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO into the starter switch Switch on the ignition Depress the brake pedal gt Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N Release the brake pedal gt If engaged release the parking brake gt page 59 gt Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch T Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed towing eye bolt Never attach a tow cable tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis frame or suspension parts L To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning flasher in use set the starter switch to position 2 and activate combination switch for left or right turn signal in usual manner only the selected turn signal will operate Upon canceling the turn signal the hazard warn ing flasher will operate again Installing towing eye bolt Depending on whether you are towing a vehicle or you are being towed the towing eye bolt can be screwed into threaded holes which are located behind covers on the right hand side of each bumper WN P88 20 2753 31 A
196. ad and sidewall Tire manufac turers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others Tire speed rating Part of tire designation indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved Total load limit Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms 150 Ibs times the vehicle s designated seating capacity Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only er in 1 6 mm of tread remains TWR Tongue Weight Rating Maximum permissible weight on trailer tongue Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two Rotating tires A Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are of the same dimension Warning If your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimensions fron
197. afety chains between your tow vehicle and the trailer The chains should be criss crossed under the trailer tongue They must be attached to the hitch receiver and not to the vehicle s bumper or axle Make sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners a separate brake system at various trailer weights a break away switch on trailers with a separate brake system Check with your local state laws for specific requirements The switch activates the trailer brakes in the possible event that the trailer might separate from the tow vehicle T Do not connect a trailer brake system if trailer is so equipped directly to the vehicle s hydraulic brake system as your vehicle is equipped with antilock brakes If you do neither the vehicle s brakes nor the trailer s brakes will function properly The provided vehicle electrical connector for trailer towing has a brake signal wire for hook up to a brake controller You should consider using a trailer sway control system For further information contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P gt page 191 gt Set the parking brake for the vehicle gt page 67 Start the engine gt page 56 Set the vehicle level to Highway gt page 279 gt Vehicle with ADS Set the ADS to AUTO or COMFORT gt page 278 gt Turn off the engine gt page 68 Operation
198. age 227 The climate contro must be switched on gt page 227 gt Press button EUR The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air volume and air distri bution are adjusted automatically i The temperature is adjusted according to the settings for the front passenger side made on the front climate control panel gt page 219 Operating from the front Deactivating gt Press button on the front climate control panel gt page 216 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Reactivating gt Press button on the front climate control panel gt page 216 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The rear climate control is adjust ed automatically Controls in detail Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution controls or to adjust the air distribution for the rear passenger compartment The following symbols are found on the controls Symbol Function Directs air to the center air vents Directs air to the footwells and the side air vents Adjusting manually gt Press the desired air distribution control or The indicator lamp in the J button goes out Climate control Adjusting automatically gt Press button Ag gt page 226 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air distribution is adjust ed automatically Adjusting air volume The air volume for the rear zone corre sponds to the air volume settings for the front pas
199. age 263 will go out and an acoustic warning will sound Controls in detail Warning A N Distronic switches off and releases the brakes when the vehicle decelerates below the minimum speed of 20 mph 30 km h by operation of the system At that time the driver must apply the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop T Setting the automatic transmission to N while driving cancels the Distronic However the automatic transmission should not be set to N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads a gt Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the Distronic After a brief accelera tion e g for passing the Distronic will resume the last set speed Driving systems Setting the following distance in Distronic You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1 0 and 2 0 seconds Us ing this time setting and the current speed of your vehicle Distronic calculates and sets the required following distance to the preceding vehicle The set distance will be shown in the multifunction display gt page 265 The distance setting switch for the time setting is located on the cruise control le ver on the left hand side of the steering column A It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to select the appropriate setting given road conditions traffic driver s preferred driving styl
200. ages see Installation of infant and child restraint system gt page 96 For information on LATCH type child seat mounts see Child seat anchors LATCH type gt page 95 The use of infant or child restraints is re quired by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territories and all Canadian provinces Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions for the child restraint that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 A statement by the child restraint manu facturer of compliance with these standards can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint When using any infant or child restraint system make sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Please read and observe warning labels affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to infant or child restraints Warning According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be
201. ails Make sure clamping claw lies flush Controls in detail gt Store key and Allen wrench back into the storage well gt page 490 Adjusting the clamping widths of the crossbars against the inside of roof rail 0 as shown in the illustration gt page 298 If necessary adjust clamping width of crossbars gt page 299 gt Slightly tighten screw 4 on both sides by turning it clockwise gt On the front and rear crossbars tighten screws 4 Observe a tightening torque of 4 lb ft 6 Nm Warning A N Have the tightening torque checked after mounting the crossbars The screws could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 4 lb ft 6 Nm gt Attach cover caps gt page 298 and lock them Warning A N Only install the crossbars at the exact loca tions designated on the roof rails The desig nated locations for the front crossbars are between the markings engraved on the in side of the roof rails gt page 298 The des ignated locations for the rear crossbars are between the gaps on the roof rails gt page 298 Otherwise the crossbars gt page 298 mounted accessories and the objects at tached to them could come loose from the vehicle causing an accident thereby injuring you and other persons and or causing dam age to property including damage to your vehicle Loading The clamping widths of the crossbars are factory set for your vehicle These cl
202. ain i If the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically press hazard warning flasher switch Q once to switch it off Interior lighting The controls for interior lighting are locat ed in the overhead control panel Lighting P54 25 4942 31 1 Front left reading lamp switch 2 Rear interior lighting switch 3 Automatic control switch 4 Front interior lighting switch Front right reading lamp switch 6 Front right interior lamp 7 Front right reading lamp Front left reading lamp 9 Front left interior lamp Controls in detail Lighting i An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery Automatic control amp The interior lighting is factory set to automatic mode Deactivating gt Press switch 3 The switch engages in the recessed position The interior lighting and the locator lighting gt page 176 remain switched off even when you e unlock the vehicle e open a door e open the tailgate e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Activating gt Press switch 3 The switch disengages from its recessed position back to its original position The interior lighting and the locator lighting gt page 176 come on when you e unlock the vehicle e open a door e open the ta
203. aired Practical hints What to do if Problem The front passenger front air bag off indica tor lamp does not illu minate and or does not remain illuminated with the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint or less onthe front passenger seat Warning If the indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the 448 Possible Suggested solution cause consequence The system is malfunction ing Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and check installation of the child seat Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat are present Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are present e g objects such as books briefcases etc lodged behind or around the seat head restraints pushing against roof etc The system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out have the system checked as soon as pos sible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Do not transport a child on the front passen ger seat until the system has been repaired Also note any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps gt page 460 weight of a typical 12 month old child in a the front passenger seat until the system standard child restraint or less on the front has been repaired passenger seat do not transport a child on
204. aking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty If the yellow ESP warning lamp comes on while driving the 4 ETS is being switched off temporarily to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes In addition the message ESP Unavailable See Operator s Manual appears in the multifunction display For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 436 and gt page 449 Off road 4 ETS With the off road driving program switched on gt page 277 or with the transmission in LOW RANGE mode gt page 201 the 4 ETS designed for off road use is auto matically activated Y Anti theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle Activating With the SmartKey gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch With KEYLESS GO gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 43 on the starter switch once The engine is turned off gt Open the driver s door Deactivating With the SmartKey gt Turnthe SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 gt page 41 With KEYLESS GO gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 cb Starting the engine will also deactivate the immobilizer In case the engine cannot be started yet the vehicle s battery is charged the system is not operational Contact an authorized Mer
205. also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of in compatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing One or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Practical hints What to do if Problem The yellow fuel tank reserve warn ing lamp in the fuel gauge comes on while driving ES The red SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving Warning A N In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi cated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center immedi ately to have the system checked otherwise Possible cause cons
206. also switched off Suggested solution gt Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Problem Practical hints Possible cause consequence Fiend USA only The yellow engine malfunc There is a malfunction in tion indicator lamp comes Canada only a on while driving i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on Check local require ments The fuel management system e The ignition system e The emission control system e Systems which affect emissions Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp home emergency opera tion mode What to do if Suggested solution gt Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center An on board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through the read out of diagnostic trouble codes It is lo cated in the front left area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal Practical hints What to do if Problem ENNE k USA only The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while Canada onl CUS OGE The red d
207. amp ing widths are solely intended for the des ignated positions Only install the crossbars at the designat ed locations and pay attention to the stickers FRONT and REAR gt page 298 4 Screw for clamping claw Clamping claw 1 Screws for adjusting clamping width 2 in total for each side 12 Cover strip gt gt gt gt gt Controls in detail Loading Pull cover strip out of groove until you see screws 1 on each end of the crossbar gt Turn screws 1 on both sides counter clockwise approximately 2 rotations gt Place the crossbar at designated loca tions gt page 298 on roof rails gt On both sides make sure the clamping claws 5 lie flush against the roof rails If necessary pull out or push in the clamping claws gt Tighten screws Observe a tightening torque of 4 lb ft 6 Nm The width of the clamping claws is correctly adjusted A Have the tightening torque checked after mounting the crossbars The screws could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 4 lb ft 6 Nm Warning gt Press cover strip piece by piece into groove of crossbar gt Install the crossbars as described gt page 298 Removing the crossbars P 40 2079 31 O Key 2 Cover cap 3 Sticker FRONT or REAR 4 Screw for clamping claw Clamping claw gt Unlock cover cap 2 with key 1 gt Remove cover cap 2 gt Turn
208. an approxi mately 4 seconds after the engine was started e does not come on at all e comes on after the engine was started or while driving Warning A N Modifications to or work improperly con ducted on restraint systems such as seat belts and anchors emergency tensioning devices seat belt force limiters or air bags or their wiring as well as tampering with in terconnected electronic systems can lead to the restraint systems no longer function ing as intended Air bags or emergency tensioning devices for example could deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the de celeration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded Therefore never modify the re straint systems Do not tamper with elec tronic components or their software Safety and Security Warning In the event that the EGE indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all the SRS self check has detected a malfunction For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center immedi ately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not deploy when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fa tal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury In addition improper work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera tive or causing unintended air bag deploy ment Work on the SRS must ther
209. an be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired This could result in an accident Warning T When driving down long and steep grades relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine s braking power This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear When using the engine s braking power a drive wheel may not spin for an extended period of time e g on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty After hard braking it is advisable to drive on for some time rather than immediately park so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster Operation Driving instructions Parking brake When driving on wet roads or dirt covered surfaces road salt and or dirt can get into the parking brake To prevent corrosion and areduction in the braking power of the parking brake observe the following gt From time to time lightly engage the parking brake before driving off gt Drive a distance of approximately 110 yds 100 m at a maximum speed of 12 mph 20 km h A While performing this procedure please assure that the vehicle is stopped before applying the parking brake Otherwise the rear wheels could lock up You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident In addition the vehicle s brake lights do not light up when the parkin
210. and intensity of the sun s rays the out side temperature and the selected temperature You can operate the auto matic climate control in either the auto matic or manual mode Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Nearly all dust particles pollutants and Deactivating the automatic climate odors are filtered out before outside air en Warning A control system ters the passenger compartment through _ the air distribution system Follow the recommended settings for heat ing and cooling given on the following pag Warning VAN f es Otherwise the windows could fog up Warning A N aa E SEn impairing visibility and endangering you and When the automatic climate control system others is switched off the outside air supply and Severe conditions e g strong air pollution i circulation are also switched off Only may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will f the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the in a we songs ora snort One Sues reduce the air volume to the interior and the terior before driving off see Summer opening tee Hees ae eS oP Dae feature gt page 249 The automatic climate visibility and endangering you and others windows could fog up impairing visibilit ae pa j 2 H a 6 7 y control will then adjust the interior temperature and enaangering you and others Have a to the set value much fas
211. and telephone Front left interior lamp Page 149 339 Soul 331 149 Y Door control panel Oo oO At a glance Item Inside door handle Central unlocking switch Central locking switch Exterior rear view mirror adjustment Selection buttons for exteri or rear view mirror adjust ment Power folding exterior rear view mirrors Switches for opening clos ing front and rear door windows Rear door window override switch Hinged quarter window switch Remote tailgate release switch power tailgate Page 120 129 129 51 51 209 246 98 248 124 123 Door control panel At a glance Storage compartments P68 00 4458 31 O A OQ QO 2OGQ 8800 Item Parcel net in front passen ger footwell Glove box CD changer Door pocket Parcel net on front passen ger seat backrest Door pocket Cup holder Vehicle tool kit spare wheel First aid kit Cup holder Door pocket Parcel net on driver s seat backrest Page 319 315 319 321 490 490 321 319 At a glance Item Door pocket Holder for gas cards Depending on vehicle con figuration Storage compartment Ashtray Cup holders Storage telephone com partment with coin holder Rear storage compartment Cup holder in rear armrest 317 321 320 317 318 320 Storage compartments a ss LL Getting started Unlocking Ad
212. and unlocking A When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning iH To prevent possible malfunction avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment a Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i You can also open and close e the door windows e the hinged quarter windows e the tilt sliding sunroof using the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO see Summer opening feature
213. andard display menu The following functions are available Checking coolant temperature In the standard display the main odometer Function Page ings and the trip odometer appear in the multi Checking tire inflation pressure 395 earning A function display Checking coolant temperature 162 e Driving when your engine is overheated Calling up digital speedometer 163 can cause some fluids which may have or outside temperature leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously Calling up maintenance service 424 burned indicator e Steam from an overheated engine can E 2 cause serious burns which can occur Trip odometer just by opening the hood Stay away 2 Main odometer from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it gt If you see another display press Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from button ar repeatedly until other traffic Turn off the engine get out of the standard display appears the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle gt Press button BVA or EAN to select until the engine has cooled down the functions in the standard display menu gt Press button BV or BAY repeatedly until the coolant temperature appears in the multifunction display Y f van 80 120 C T Excessive coolant temperature triggers a warning message in the multifunction display page 470 The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F
214. anner that it has a Tongue Weight TW between 8 and 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW i Maximum trailer weight ratings are calculat ed assuming the vehicle plus driver The weight of other accessories passengers and cargo will reduce the maximum trailer weight and Tongue Weight TW your vehicle can tow Operation Driving instructions Checking weights of vehicle and trailer To assure that the tow vehicle and trail er are in compliance with the maximum permissible weight limits have the load ed rig tow vehicle including driver pas sengers and cargo trailer fully loaded weighed on a commercial scale Check the vehicle s front and rear Gross Axle Weight GAW the Gross Trailer Weight GTW and Tongue Weight TW The values as measures must not exceed the weight limits listed under Vehicle and trailer weight and ratings gt page 365 Attaching a trailer A While you are coupling or decoupling a trail er make sure that you do not Warning e lock or unlock e open or close a vehicle door or the tailgate The vehicle s level could change and you could endanger yourself and or others as a result Make sure that you do not operate the ADS button page 279 or the vehicle level control system gt page 279 when cou pling decoupling the trailer Observe maximum permitted trailer dimensions width and length Most states and all Canadian provinces require s
215. another function on the COMAND system while reverse gear Ris engaged To display the image again disengage and reengage reverse gear R P54 00 2515 31 gt Shift the automatic transmission into P N or D to switch off the rear view camera 1 Rear view camera Vv Loading Carriers A Only use carriers when the crossbars have been completely mounted The left and right roof rails are only stabilized by means of the crossbars mounted Warning Follow the manufacturers installation instructions Otherwise an improperly at tached roof rack system or its load could be come detached from the vehicle Do not exceed the maximum roof load of 198 Ib 90 kg Take into consideration that when the roof is loaded the handling characteristics are dif ferent from those when operating the vehi cles without a roof loaded Controls in detail BB Load the carriers in such a way that the vehicle cannot be damaged while driving Make sure e the tailgate can be completely opened e the tilt sliding sunroof can be completely raised at the rear The following accessories are available for your Mercedes Benz e Roof Cargo Container Small Medium or Large e Skiand Snowboard Carrier Standard e Ski and Snowboard Carrier Deluxe Only in connection with corresponding adapter For more information on Mercedes Benz acces sories contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Loading
216. ansmitter buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Gate operator Canadian programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator regardless of where you live by using the programming procedures replace step 4 with the following Controls in detail Useful features Step 4 gt Press and hold the signal transmitter button or Do not release this button until it has been successful ly trained gt While still holding down the signal transmitter button or cycle your hand held remote control button as follows Press and hold button 6 for 2 seconds then release it for 2 seconds and again press and hold it for 2 seconds Repeat this se quence on the hand held remote con trol until the frequency signal has been learned Upon successful training indicator lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds gt Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete a Upon completion of programming the inte grated remote control make sure you retain the hand held
217. any components on the vehicle Comply with all relevant safety precautions Warning A N To help prevent personal injury stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or may even restart after the engine has been turned off Stay clear of fan blades Warning Vehicles with gasoline engine The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components ignition coils spark plug sockets diagnos tic socket of the ignition system e with the engine running e while starting the engine e if ignition is on and the engine is turned manually Warning A N Vehicles with diesel engine The engine is equipped with a high voltage electronic control unit for the injection system Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components of the injection system injectors electrical wires Operation Engine compartment Closing Warning A N When closing the hood use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone e with the engine running e while starting the engine e when the ignition is switched on The hood lock release lever is located in the driver s footwell Make sure that the hood is securely en PB8 40 2595 31 gaged before driving off Do not continue driving if
218. around a possible obstacle However do not drive by relying on the distance warning function as this will result in an emergency braking application This will not always enable you to avoid a collision especially when traveling on varying road surface conditions and with varying driver reaction Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by the distance warning function This could result in wrong or miss ing distance warnings gt Switch on the distance warning function in the control system gt page 183 Controls in detail Downhill Speed Regulation DSR Warning A N Downhill Speed Regulation is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation The system must be set to be appropriate for the topographical and weather conditions encountered which can change quickly The driver is and must remain at all times responsible for the vehi cle speed and for safe brake operation Depending on the programmed speed page 183 actual vehicle speed and gra dient switching on the DSR while driving can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly and you may hear a sound which is caused by the activation of the vehicle s brake sys tem through the DSR Sudden and unex pected deceleration can result in loss of vehicle control causing an accident and or serious personal injury to you and others Do not switch on the DSR in a circumstance where rapid deceleration could result in a
219. arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center For services such as labor and or towing charges may apply Refer to the Roadside Assistance Manual for more information The following is only available in the USA e Sign and Drive services Services such as jump start a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable Controls in detail Useful features amp The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self check after switching on the ignition together with the SOS button and the Informa tion button See system self check gt page 332 if the indi cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call e g the rele vant cellular phone network was not available The message Call Failed appears in the mul tifunction display Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us ing the button on the multifunction steer ing wheel or the END Button on the COMAND system Information button The Information button is located below the center armrest cover gt gt Open the storage compartment
220. as it could otherwise lead to an accident and or serious injury to you or others If you are driving too fast while using off road level 3 you will see the following message in the multifunction display id This message cannot be deactivated gt Turn outer adjustment ring gt page 283 repeatedly until indicator lamp gt page 283 of the desired Reduce speed to level flashes under 20 MPH 30 km h e Off road level 1 lower indicator Additional an acoustic signal sounds ari P RASHES e Off road level 2 lower and middle indicator lamps flashes For more information see Display message gt page 487 Only use the off road levels when neces sary Otherwise Off road level 3 lower middle and upper indicator lamps flashes The vehicle adjusts to the correspond ing off road level For example the following message appears in the multifunction display while the level is being set fuel consumption may increase handling characteristics of the vehicle may be unfavorable Start the engine gt page 41 OFf road G20 NE Fog The vehicle is raised from off road level 1 to off road level 2 Controls in detail Driving systems i The message can be cleared by pressing the BA or button EN on the multifunction steering wheel When the off road level 2 is reached the following message appears in the multi function display for 5 seconds OFF road S o NE fog
221. assenger or cargo compartment unless they are firmly secured in place For more in formation see Loading gt page 295 and Useful features gt page 315 Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child s risk of injury in the event of e strong braking maneuvers e sudden changes of direction e an accident Infant and child restraint systems We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion All lap shoulder belts except the driver s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints To fasten a child restraint follow child restraint instructions for mounting Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract During seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is acti vated The belt is now locked Push down on child restraint to take up any slack To deactivate release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely To deacti vate the special seat belt retractor for the front passenger seat the front passenger seat must be in the most backward posi tion The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner A Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated Warning For information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchor
222. at a constant speed e The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed e The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control e Deactivate the cruise control when driving in fog The Resume function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed Warning The cruise control brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded The brake pedal depresses when the cruise con trol engages the brakes Keep driver s foot area clear at all times including the area under the brake pedal Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the cruise control system Do not place your foot under the brake pedal your foot could become caught Keep in mind that the cruise control is a con venience system designed to assist the driv er during vehicle operation The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle s speed and for safe brake operation Adjustment in 1 mph increments to the resistance point or 5 mph increments past the resistance point Canada 1 km h or 10 km h 2 Setting current or lower speed Adjustment in 1 mph increments to the resista
223. at least 10 seconds gt page 41 gt Return the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O gt page 41 gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 gt page 41 and hold it there for a maximum of 40 seconds or until the engine runs surge free If the engine does not start gt Wait for approximately 2 minutes gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 gt page 41 and hold it there for a maximum of 40 seconds or until the engine runs surge free If the engine still does not start do not make any further attempts to start the engine Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance gt page 335 When the RA malfunction indicator lamp USA only or the fg malfunction indicator lamp Canada only has been illuminated for the above condition it will remain illuminated until the engine was cycled on and off four times in a row Practical hints Practical hints Battery The battery is located under the front passenger seat Warning A o Mercedes Benz recommends to have the battery replaced at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Wear eye protection Observe all safety instructions and precau Rinse any acid spills immediate tions when handling automotive batteries ly with clear water Contact a physician if necessary The battery should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated ser vice lif
224. ata specific to your vehicle SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL REAR PISS TORI SPARE 7125 70015 AT0KPA 6075 INFORMATION P40 00 2063 31 ZO00KPA 29P5 1 Seating capacity information on the Tire and Loading Information placard Steps for determining correct load limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Operation Tires and wheels Step 1 gt Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s Tire and Loading Information placard Step 2 gt Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Step 3 gt Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs bb Operation Tires and wheels gt gt Step 4 Step 6 if applicable gt The resulting figure equals the avail gt If your vehicle will be towing a trailer able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ibs passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and lug
225. ate MB SummerFit and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze for temperatures below freezing Follow suggested mixing ratios gt page 569 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their Suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals Therefore only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet USA only or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center i Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System or chang ing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Please follow Maintenance System recommen dations for scheduled oil changes Failure to do so will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Engine oil additives pg Do not blend oil additives with engine oil They may damage the engine Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not cove
226. ates Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied e Always sit as upright as possible prop erly use the seat belts and use an appro priately sized infant restraint toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants If you sell your vehicle it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information Be sure to give the buyer this Operator s Manual Safety and Security Warning A N Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat It should be noted that with respect to both front side impact air bags or the rear side impact air bags there is a possibility for a side impact air bag related injury if occu pants especially children are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job To help avoid the possibility of injury please follow these guidelines 1 Always sit as upright as possible properly use the seat belts and for all children 12 years old and under use an appropriately sized infant restraint toddler restraint or booster seat recom mended for the size and weight of the child 2 Always wear seat belts properly Occupant safety i Air bags are
227. ating easy entry exit fea ture Compass calibration Setting fold in func tion for exterior rear view mirrors Audio search function Setting automatic cen tral locking Limiting opening height of tailgate Controls in detail Control system Instrument cluster submenu Selecting speedometer display mode Selecting language Access the Instrument Cluster submenu gt Move the selection marker with gt Move the selection marker with via the Settings menu Use the button or E to the button or E to the Instrument Cluster submenu to change Instrument Cluster submenu Instrument Cluster submenu Cie iio PUNE C LE Cis MAy SELNES gt Press button 4M or A repeatedly Press button EAN or A repeatedly The following functions are available until the message Display Unit until the message Language appears in Digital Speedometer appears in the the multifunction display F ion P i i i unge Bee MAACO Spies The selection marker is on the current Selecting speedometer display 172 The selection marker is on the current setting mode setting Selecting language 172 Language Selecting display digital 173 Display Unit DaN 6 Digital Speedometer Deutsch speedometer or outside g temperature for status indica onl We tor i is Ba ns e gt Press button or E to select gt Press button or E to set the language to be used for the speedometer unit to Km or Miles multifunction display messages Qe If you select a language that
228. ats may not be moved to the rearmost position Otherwise you could damage the front and second row seats T When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and head restraint height make sure the sun visor is folded up gt page 210 Ifthe head restraint is in the uppermost position it could hit and damage the sun visor Vehicles without memory function The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes after either front door has been opened The counter resets each time e you open or close a front door e you insert the SmartKey into the starter switch e you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch e you switch the ignition on or off i The memory function gt page 141 lets you Store the settings for the seat positions together with the settings for the steering wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors Seat fore and aft adjustment gt Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow Seat height gt Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow Seat cushion tilt gt Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow 2 until your upper legs are lightly supported Seat backrest tilt gt Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow Getting started Head restraint height Warning A N Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an accident With a rear seat occupied make sure
229. attery 2 Positive terminal of discharged battery 4 Positive terminal of charged battery Negative terminal of charged battery Practical hints Jump starting gt Connect positive terminal and with the jumper cable Clamp cable to charged battery first gt Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed gt Connect negative terminals and of the batteries with the second jumper cable Clamp the cable to negative terminal G of the charged battery first BE vever invert the terminal connections gt Start the engine of the disabled vehi cle You can now turn on the electrical consum ers Do not switch on the headlamps under any circumstances gt Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals Q and G and then from positive terminals 2 and You can now switch on the headlamps gt Have the battery checked at the near est authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center 537 Practical hints Towing the vehicle Mercedes Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equipment This method is preferable to other types of towing pE Do not tow start the vehicle T Use flatbed or wheel lift dolly equipment with the SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0 Do not tow with sling type equipment Towing with sling type equipment over bumpy roads wil
230. attery voltage out Regardless of the temperature and air volume set on the automatic climate control panel an The residual heat is automatically turned off interior temperature is aimed at by 72 F 22 C when the ignition is switched on and the blower runs on low speed to protect the vehicle battery e after about 30 minutes e ifthe coolant temperature is too low e if the battery voltage drops Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Left rear center air vent adjustable Right rear center air vent adjustable Temperature control Air distribution and air volume automatic manual Air distribution directs air through the center air vents Air distribution directs air through the footwells and side air vents Rear automatic climate control on off Decreasing air volume ClO To Re ol cS Indicator lamps for air volume settings Increasing air volume i The stored values for the rear automatic climate control are erased from memory after the ignition has been switched off for more than 30 minutes Once the front automatic climate control is switched on again the rear automatic climate control operates in automatic mode at a preset temperature of 72 F 22 C Activating rear automatic climate control The automatic climate control must be switched on gt page 233 gt Press button Eig The indicator lamp on the button comes on The temperature air vol ume
231. auses the cooling fan could be malfunctioning the poly V belt could be broken gt gt gt gt Stop the vehicle in safe location or as soon as it safe to do so Apply the parking brake gt page 67 Turn off the engine Check the poly V belt If it is broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center If it is intact gt Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limit ed Warranty Continued on next page Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution gt Observe the coolant temperature in the multifunction display gt page 162 If the temperature raises again gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center immediately During severe operation conditions and Warning A stop and go city traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to 248 F 120 C e Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have T The engine should not be operated with the leaked into the engine compartment to coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C catch fire You could be seriously Doing so may cause serious damage which is not bume
232. auses the vehicle to have a higher center of gravity thereby changing the vehicle s driving characteris tics Accordingly the additional weight on the roof of the vehicle can have a detrimen tal effect on braking cornering and acceler ation Controls in detail Never exceed the maximum permissible roof load or the maximum permissible vehi cle weight even when accessories for the crossbars e g ski racks bicycle racks etc are being used Overloading the vehicle could result in an accident When calculat ing the weight placed on the roof please make sure to add the weight of the cross bars accessory racks and the load carried together Always adapt your driving style to the road traffic and weather conditions and drive with added caution when the roof is loaded Always drive with extreme care when the roof rack is loaded Take into consideration that when the roof rack is loaded the han dling characteristics are different from those when operating the vehicles without a roof rack loaded Loading Warning A N Do not use accessories which have not been approved by Mercedes Benz for use in con junction with these crossbars If non ap proved accessories are used these accessories and or the objects attached to them could come loose from the vehicle thereby injuring you and other persons and or causing damage to property includ ing damage to your vehicle T Have a second person assist you when ins
233. be caused by residual wax on the windshield When leaving the car wash make sure that the mirrors are folded out Otherwise they may vibrate Operation Ornamental moldings For regular cleaning and care of ornamen tal moldings use a damp cloth i Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental moldings Although ornamental moldings may have chrome appearance they could be made of anodized aluminum that will be damaged when cleaned with chrome cleaner Instead use a damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you are sure are chrome plated use a chrome clean er Ifin doubt whether an ornamental molding is chrome plated contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Vehicle care Headlamps brake lamps tail lamps side markers turn signal lenses gt Usea mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Sham poo with plenty of water BE Only use window cleaning solutions that are suitable for plastic lamp lenses Window clean ing solutions which are not suitable may damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps There fore do not use abrasives solvents or cleaners that contain solvents Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens surface Operation Vehicle care Cleaning t
234. belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts gt page 86 Getting started Driving Warning A N According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child For additional information see Children in the vehicle gt page 91 A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Getting started Driving
235. bility and per formance premium unleaded gasoline must be used If premium unleaded gasoline is not avail able and low octane fuel is used follow these precautions e Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded gasoline as soon as possible e Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration e Donot exceed an engine speed of 3000 rom if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage e Do not exceed of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain Fuels coolants lubricants Fuel requirements Gasoline engine Only use premium unleaded fuel e The octane number posted at the pump must be 91 min It is an average of both the Research Octane Number RON and the Motor Octane Number MON RON MON 2 This is also known as the ANTI KNOCK INDEX Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol IPA IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 MTBE must not exceed 15 The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3 plus additional cosolvents Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed Gasohol which contains 10 ethanol and 90 unleaded gasoline can be used Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such
236. ble a vehicle equipped with trailer hitch receiver should be pulled backward in its own previously made tracks Vv Fuses The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to switch off malfunctioning power circuits If a fuse is blown the components and sys tems secured by that fuse will stop operat ing A Only use fuses approved by Mercedes Benz with the specified amperage for the system in question and do not attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse Using other than ap proved fuses or using repaired or bridged fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire and or cause damage to electrical components and or systems Have the cause determined and remedied by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Warning i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appro priate spare fuse recognizable by its color or the fuse rating given on the fuse of the amperage recommended in the fuse chart Any Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to advise you on this subject Practical hints If a newly inserted fuse blows again have the cause determined and rectified by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center A fuse chart explains the fuse allocation and fuse amperages It is located in the cargo compartment with the vehicle tool kit gt page 490 The electrical fuses are located in different fuse boxes e Fuse box in engine compartment gt page 544 e Fuse box in cargo compartment gt page 544
237. bove 186 mph 300 km h ZR above 149 mph 240 km h At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for exam ple 245 40 ZR18 To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire the service description for the tire must be referred to The service description is comprised of the tire load rating gt page 406 and the tire speed rating gt page 406 If your tire includes ZR in the size designation and no service description and 6 gt page 406 is given the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed ca pability Operation If a service description and gt page 406 is given the speed capa bility is limited by the speed symbol in the service description Example 245 40 ZR18 97Y In this example 97Y is the service description The letter Y designates the speed rating and the speed capabil ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph 300 km h Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph 300 km h must include a ZR in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis Example 275 40 ZR 18 99Y The Y speed rating in paren thesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186 mph 300 km h Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissib
238. by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B Pillar or if available the tire inflation pressure label on the fuel filler flap If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle plac ard or the tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illu minates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible Driving on a signif icantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may effect the vehi cle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driv er s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Operating radio transmission equipment e g wireless headsets two way radios in or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal function Operation Tires and wheels Tire inflation pressure warnings If the system de
239. by trying to move it up and down and in and out before driving off Make sure that e you can reach the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent at the elbows e you can move your legs freely e all displays including malfunction and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster are clearly visible The steering wheel adjustment release handle is located on the lower left of the steering column 1 Release handle gt To unlock the steering column pull release handle Q out to its stop limit Move steering wheel to the desired position Push release handle 1 back to its original position to relock the steering column The steering column is locked into po sition again Make sure the steering column is securely locked by trying to move the steering wheel up and down as well as in and out before driving off Steering wheel adjustment electrical A Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driv ing could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in t
240. cals can adversely af fect braking efficiency Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal brake effect Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt strewn roads can bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to normal If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated roads the braking efficien cy should be tested as soon as possible af ter driving is resumed A Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers Warning A If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow make sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running Otherwise deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle in terior resulting in unconsciousness and death Warning To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation open a window slightly on the side of the ve hicle not facing the wind A The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose In dicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice Warning For more information see Winter driving gt page 420 Standing water iH Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth Before driving through water determine its depth Never accelerate before driving into water
241. cator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on gt Push inthe exterior lamp switch to first stop The rear fog lamp switches off The yellow indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out The front fog lamps remain lit Combination switch 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher High beam gt gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position gt page 143 Push the combination switch in direction of arrow Q to switch on the high beam The high beam headlamp indicator lamp Ep in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 26 Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam The high beam headlamp indicator lamp Bey in the instrument cluster goes out High beam flasher gt Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2 Controls in detail Lighting Corner illuminating front fog lamps The corner illuminating front fog lamps im prove illumination of the area in the direc tion into which you are turning The corner illuminating front fog lamps will operate with the engine running and with the exterior lamp switch in position gt page 143 or the exterior lamp switch in position W gt page 143 or the daytime running lamp mode activated gt page 145 i The corner illuminating front fog lamps will only come on in low ambient lighting conditions If you are driving faster than 25
242. ce Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times mileage will result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator mes sage will notify you when the next mainte nance service is due Starting approximately 1 month before the next maintenance service is due one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition exam ple service A Service A In XXXXX Miles Km Service A In XXX Days Service A In X Day Service A Due Now The maintenance services will be indicated by showing a service type A through type H in the multifunction display Types A through H are classified based on estimat ed time needed to perform the mainte nance service ranging from Service A approximately 1 hour to Service H approximately 8 hours Service A In 2730 Miles Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of maintenance services and intervals they need to be performed at 0 The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since the last maintenance service and calcu lates other maintenance service work required Clearing the maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator mes sage is automatically cleared e after approximately 10 seconds when you switch on the ign
243. ce a damaged tire Recommended minimum tire tread depth e Summer tires in 3 mm e Winter tires in 4 mm j l wamne A 1 TWI Tread Wear Indicator Although the applicable federal motor safety The treadwear indicator appears as a solid laws consider a tire to be worn when the band across the tread treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately in 1 6 mm we recom mend that you do not allow your tires Direction of rotation Unidirectional tires offer added advantag es such as better hydroplaning perfor mance To benefit however you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation spinning of the tire Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation spinning even with a unidi rectional tire for temporary use only until the reg ular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced Always observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel Loading the vehicle Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry 1 The Tire and Loading Information placard can be found on the driver s door B pillar This placard tells you im portant information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle It also contains information on the proper size and rec
244. cedes Benz Light Truck Center or call 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA or 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Anti theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens e adoor e the tailgate e the hood The alarm will stay on even if the activat ing element a door for example is imme diately closed Safety and Security Anti theft systems The alarm system will also be triggered when e the vehicle is opened with the mechan ical key see Unlocking the vehicle gt page 496 e adoor is opened from the inside see Opening the doors from the inside gt page 120 i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 331 provided that the Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS cover age are available Safety and Security Anti theft systems Arming the alarm system The alarm system indicator lamp is located to the lower left of the hazard warning flasher 1 Alarm system indicator lamp gt Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS GO gt page 70 The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked The alarm system is armed within ap proximately 10 seconds Alarm system indicator lamp flashes a If the turn signal lamps do
245. cel METS accentsteesesnsaideniartacaenar eens 319 Cup Nolders cccsescceseecensseees 320 ASNT AVS adrcwrcce eencaonaresvicecan eaters 321 Cigarette lighter cee eeeeeeeeees 323 Power Outlets ccccccssseecneeees 324 FIOOPMAtS csseecccsesccceeeseeeeeeees 325 Seat cover under third row seats 326 Heated steering wheel 327 Telephone ccccseseecceesecceeeees 328 Tele Aid scontoneusmiannscenenseesntiaadieaersend 331 Garage door OPeNnel seeceees 338 COMPASS wikncswsanesarwesnnseasinndesctedserses 344 Infrared reflecting windshield 344 _ SSS Operation ccc ccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeees 345 The first 1000 miles 1500 km 346 Driving instructions cccceeeeeeeeeees 347 Drive sensibly save fuel 347 Drinking and riving eeecee 347 POCA E E A T 347 Power assistance neesesseeessee 348 AOS AE A N 348 Driving Off secueseaaieieumrnnceiaunatesaeoseane 350 EU E AEE 350 IEE e EE 351 HyCroplaning cccccsseseeeeeeseees 352 Tire traction sncenecamisexanmeentavierensaaens 352 Tire speed rating c sccccseseeees 353 Winter driving instructions 353 Standing Water cccccccssscceeseees 355 Off road driving cceeeeceeeeeeeees 355 Trailer tOWING ceecccccseseeeeeeeeees 364 Passenger compartment 370 Driving abroad eeccceseeeeeeeeeeees 370 C
246. cing batteries 502 Selective setting 114 Starter switch positions 42 Starting the engine 56 Turning off the engine 69 Key SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Batteries 120 502 Battery check lamp 115 Checking battery condition 120 Closing the power windows Convenience closing feature 250 Closing the tilt sliding sunroof Convenience closing feature 250 Closing locking Power tailgate 127 Factory setting 118 Important notes 117 Locking unlocking 41 70 115 Locking unlocking Global setting 118 Lossof 120 Messages in the multifunction display 475 476 Opening the power windows Summer opening feature 249 Opening the tilt sliding sunroof Summer opening feature 249 Remote control 115 Replacing batteries 502 Selective setting 119 Start stop button 43 Starter switch positions Starting the engine 57 Turning off the engine 69 42 43 Kickdown 196 Kilopascal 416 L Labels 550 Certification 550 Emission control information 551 Engine number 551 Paintwork code 550 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 550 Lamp sensor see Light sensor Lamps exterior 505 Front 505 Light sensor Messages in the multifunction display 477 Messages in display 477 Messages in the multifunction display 477 479 481 Rear 505 Switch 143 Lamps indicator and warning ABS 27 436 Adaptive Damping System ADS 279 Alarm system 110 Battery SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 119 Battery SmartKey 114 Brakes 27 437 438 Center conso
247. commended tire inflation pressure gt page 393 for proper tire inflation A Warning Never exceed the max tire inflation pressure Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride com fort wear unevenly increase stopping dis tance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road de bris potholes etc Operation Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance 1 Treadwear 2 Traction 3 Temperature resistance a For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration Tires and wheels Quality grades can be found where appli cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Operation Tires and wheels Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rat ing based on the wear
248. could result in serious inju ries in case of an accident Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents includ ing rollovers The integrated restraint system includes SRS driver air bag pas senger front air bag side impact air bags window curtain air bags for side windows ETD seat belt emergency tensioning device and front seat knee bolsters The system is designed to en hance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal front air bags and ETD and side side impact window curtain air bags and ETD im pacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers win dow curtain air bags and ETD Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm against your neck or off your shoul der In a frontal crash your body would move too far forward That would in crease the chance of head and neck in juries The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen which could severely injure internal or gans such as your liver or spleen Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing such as eyeglasses pens SmartKeys etc as these might cause injuries Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdo men If the belt is positioned across your abdomen it could cause serious injuries in a crash Never use
249. ctivating driver s seat 181 For third row seats 130 Easy entry exit feature 48 EBP 107 Indicator and warning lamps 438 468 Electrical connections Trailer 365 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electrical system Technical data 559 Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP Electronic Stability Program see ESP Electronic Traction System see 4 ETS Emergency calls Tele Aid 333 Emergency operation Fuel filler flap 497 Locking unlocking the vehicle 496 497 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 200 Emergency operations Exit for third row seats 132 Remote door unlock Tele Aid 337 Tailgate Opening from the inside manually 122 Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD Emergency In case of Battery Jump starting 536 Engine shut down 545 First aid kit 490 Flat tire 519 Fuses 543 Hazard warning flasher 149 Instrument cluster Indicator lamps 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 446 Roadside Assistance 12 335 Towing the vehicle 538 Emission control 372 Information label 551 System warranties 10 Engine Belt layout GL 450 GL 550 552 Belt layout GL 320 CDI 552 Break in recommendations 380 Cleaning 427 Compartment 378 Emergency engine shut down 545 Malfunction indicator lamp 29 Maximum engine speed 153 553 Number 551 Starting 56 Starting with KEYLESS GO 57 Starting with the SmartKey 57 Tachometer 29 153 Technical data 553 Turning off with KEYLESS GO 69 Turning off with the SmartKey 69 Engine coolant see Coolant
250. d covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Top Up Coolant See Operator s Manual Warning J Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts You could be seriously burned i Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system The engine will overheat causing major engine damage Possible cause consequence Possible solution The coolant level is too low gt Add coolant gt page 381 gt If you have to add coolant frequently have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Check engine oil level at next refueling The engine oil le
251. d like the interior lighting to remain on for 10 seconds during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu gt Press button JA or Re repeatedly until the message Interior Lighting Delayed Shut off appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting i f gt Press button or E to switch the interior lighting delayed shut off feature On or Off Interior Lighting Delayed Shut off 177 Controls in detail Control system Vehicle submenu Compass adjustment Access the Vehicle submenu via the This function is not available if your vehicle Settings menu Use the Vehicle submenu is equipped with the COMAND system and to make general vehicle settings navigation module The following functions are available Determine your location on the basis of the following zone maps Function Page Compass adjustment 178 Compass calibration 179 Audio search function 180 Setting automatic central 180 locking E P82 86 4818 31 Limiting opening height of 181 Pai Zone map South America tailgate n ce gt Press button or RSH to move the selection marker to the Vehicle submenu a P82 86 4817 31 Zone map North America gt Press button aM or eg repeatedly until the message Compass Setting Zone appears in the multifunction display The selection marker
252. d Distronic display in the multi function display Preceding vehicle if detected 2 Actual distance to the preceding vehi cle 3 Preset distance threshold to the pre ceding vehicle 4 Your vehicle Cruise control lever The Distronic system is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left hand side of the steering column Driving systems 1 Setting current or higher speed Adjustment in 1 mph increments to the resistance point or 5 mph increments past the resistance point Canada 1 km h or 10 km h 2 Setting current or lower speed Adjustment in 1 mph increments to the resistance point or 5 mph increments past the resistance point Canada 1 km h or 10 km h 3 Deactivating Distronic 4 Activating Distronic or resuming to last set speed Controls in detail Driving systems Activating Distronic You can activate Distronic when the vehi cle speed is between 20 mph 30 km h and 110 mph 180 km h When Distronic is activated the standard display in the multifunction display will show a message such as DISTRONIC 55 MPH If Distronic has not been activated after pressing the cruise control lever you will see the message DISTRONIC Off in the multifunction display In the following cases you cannot activate Distronic e upto 2 minutes after starting the engine e when you brake e when you have set the parking brake
253. d direction gt Turn thumbwheel 1 down to decrease the air volume or gt Turn thumbwheel Q up to increase the air volume Air vents in the roof liner over the third row seats Adjusting air distribution gt Move air vent slider 2 to the left right up or down to direct the air in the de sired direction C Thumbwheel for air volume control 2 Air vent adjustable Controls in detail Power windows The door windows and the hinged quarter windows are opened and closed electri cally The switches for all door windows and the hinged quarter windows are located on the drivers door control panel The switches for the respective door win dows are located on the front passenger door and the rear doors The hinged quar ter windows can be operated from the driver s seat only Warning When closing the windows make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure Activate the override switch gt page 98 when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle The children could otherwise in jure themselves e g by becoming trapped in the window opening The closing of a door window can be imme diately halted by releasing the switch or if switch was pulled past the resistance point and released by either pressing or pulling the respective switch If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled
254. d infant and child restraint system is required by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territories and all Canadian provinces Even where this is not the case all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion For more information see Fastening the seat belts gt page 53 ap For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle gt page 91 Warning A N Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts Warning A N Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position a
255. d ratings Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is the maximum permissible vehicle weight 6944 Ib 3150 kg Gross Vehicle Weight GVW Comprises weight of vehicle including fuel tools spare wheel installed accessories passengers cargo and trailer tongue It must never exceed the GVWR Operation Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight GL 320 CDI Front 3306 Ib 1500 kg Rear 3968 Ib 1800 kg GL 450 GL 550 Front 3240 Ib 1470 kg Rear 3968 Ib 1800 kg The Gross Trailer Weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo equipment luggage etc loaded on the trailer The maximum permissible gross trailer weight to be towed 7500 Ib 3402 kg Trailer Tongue Weight Rating TWR is the maximum permissible weight on the trailer tongue 600 Ib 272 kg limit for Mercedes Benz approved hitch receiver Driving instructions Loading a trailer e When loading a trailer you should ob serve that neither the permissible GTW nor the GVWR are exceeded Maximum permissible values are listed on the safety compliance certification labels for the vehicle and for the trailer to be towed The lowest value listed must be select ed when determining how the vehicle and trailer are loaded e The tongue weight at the hitch ball must be added to the GVW to prevent exceeding your Mercedes Benz tow vehicle s rear GAWR We recommend loading the trailer in such a m
256. d restraints 46 133 Active head restraint 90 133 Front seats Adjusting 46 Rearseats 91 Rear seats Adjusting 135 Rear seats Removing and installing 136 Headlamp aim Adjusting 514 Headlamp cleaning system Reservoir capacity 563 Headlamp shut off delay see Delayed shut off Exterior lamps 208 383 Headlamps Automatic headlamp mode 144 Bi Xenon 477 508 Cleaning lenses 429 Cleaning system 208 383 Halogen 507 High beam see High beam flasher High beam see High beam headlamps Light sensor Messages in the multifunction display 477 Low beam see Low beam headlamps Manual headlamp mode 144 Messages in the multifunction display 477 478 479 480 481 482 Replacing bulbs 504 505 Switch 61 143 Heated seats see Seat heating Heated steering wheel 327 Height adjustment Vehicle level control Vehicles with Air suspension program 281 Vehicle level control Vehicles with enhanced Off road Package 283 High beam flasher 61 147 High beam headlamps Indicator lamp 29 Messages in the multifunction display 478 Replacing bulbs 505 507 508 Switching on 61 147 High mounted brake lamp 505 Hill start assist system 196 Hinged quarter windows see Power windows Hood 378 Messages in the multifunction display 474 Opening 378 Hooks Loading 304 Horn 25 HVAC see Climate control or automatic climate control 3 zone Hydroplaning 352 l Identification labels see Labels Ignition 42 44 57 Immobilizer 109
257. d tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Tires and wheels Checking tire inflation pressure manually Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure gt Remove the cap from the valve on one tire gt Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve gt Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recom mended tire inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 388 or if available the inside of the fuel filler flap If necessary add air to achieve the recommended tire in flation pressure gt D Operation Tires and wheels gt gt fyou have overtilled the tire release tire in flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e g a tip of a pen Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge gt Install the valve cap gt Repeat this procedure for each tire Run Flat Indicator
258. da 1 km h increments The set value is increased in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments each time you lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance point gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 gt page 265 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle speed increases in incre ments of 1 mph Canada 1 km h Adjustment in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments id The set value is increased in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments each time you lift the cruise control lever up past the resistance point Controls in detail gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 gt page 265 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle speed increases in incre ments of 5 mph Canada 10 km h i The new speed is set and the vehicle will accelerate Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed Setting a lower speed A If you decrease the set vehicle speed keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed Warning Decelerate the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit Otherwise sudden and unexpected deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and or serious in jury to you and others Driving systems You can reduce the set speed in two
259. designed to deploy only in certain frontal impacts front air bags and in side impacts side impact and window curtain air bags which exceed preset thresholds and in certain rollovers window curtain air bags Only during these events will they provide their sup plemental protection The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts Otherwise it is not possible for air bags to provide their supplemental protec tion In case of other types of impacts and impacts be low air bag deployment thresholds air bags will not deploy The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible pro tection in a rollover We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt It is important to your safety and that of your pas sengers that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants Safety and Security Occupant safety Safety guidelines for the seat belt aa e No modifications of any kind may be e Never place your feet on the instrument RAEE tensioning device and made to any components or wiring of panel dashboard or on the seat Always air bag the SRS This includes changing or keep both feet on the floor in front of the removin
260. dition of components to the doors create a risk of rendering the side impact air bags inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment Work on the doors must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center p Ff 1 Front side impact air bag 2 Window curtain air bag 3 Rear side impact air bag The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are deployed e onthe impacted side of the vehicle e in impacts exceeding a preset deploy ment threshold e independently of the front air bags In addition the window curtain air bags 2 are deployed in certain vehicle rollovers The side impact air bags and window cur tain air bags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system s deploy ment threshold The front passenger side impact air bag will not deploy if the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is empty and the front passenger seat belt is not fastened latch plate is not inserted into the buckle With an empty front passenger seat and the seat belt fastened latch plate properly in serted into buckle the front passenger side impact air bag will deploy indepen dently of the empty seat A Only use seat covers which have been test ed and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the front side impact air bags or the rear side impact air bags
261. door or the tailgate open Possible solution gt gt gt gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Close the door s Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Check the fuel cap gt page 374 If it is not closed properly gt Close the fuel cap If it is closed properly gt gt gt Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as it is safe to do so in a safe location Close the hood gt page 379 or the tailgate gt page 123 Close all doors and or the tailgate gt page 123 Display symbol Display message Key Not Detected Key Not Detected Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution The SmartKey with gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as KEYLESS GO is not detected soon as it is safe to do so while the engine is running vy Apply the parking brake gt page 67 because Search for the SmartKey with e the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO KEYLESS GO is not in the vehicle Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine be started e there is strong again after the engine is stopped radio frequency interference The SmartKey with gt Change the position of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is momentarily KEYLESS GO in the vehicle Ber cle gt Opera
262. e gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 gt Press button EAN or Re on the multifunction steering wheel until the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display With a spare wheel without wheel sensor mounted the system may still indicate the tire inflation pressure of the removed wheel for some Tire Pressure f minutes If this happens keep in mind that the 30 y 33 f indicated value where the spare wheel is mount N 32 a 34 ed does not reflect the actual spare tire inflation psi pressure i When the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes the message lire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes appears in the multifunction display Warning A N The TPMS does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar or if available the supplemental tire inflation pressure infor mation on the inside of the fuel filler flap The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care fully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Warning TS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended
263. e If you use your vehicle mostly for Fire open flames and smoking Risk of explosion Keep children away short distance trips you will need to have are prohibited when handling the battery charge checked more batteries Avoid creating sparks frequently Follow the instructions in this Operator s Manual When replacing the battery always use Battery acid is caustic Do not Batteries contain materials that can harm batteries approved by Mercedes Benz allow it to come into contact the environment if disposed of improperly If you do not intend to operate your vehicle with skin eyes or clothing RECYVCINE BiRattclise penile prererrer l l l method of disposal Many states require for an extended period of time consult an Wear suitable protective cloth l l l sellers of batteries to accept old batteries authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck ing especially gloves apron and f i Center about steps you need to observe faceguard AR T The battery is a valve regulated lead acid VRLA battery also referred to as fleece bat tery Such batteries do not require topping up of the electrolyte level VRLA batteries therefore do not have cell caps and the battery cover is non removable Do not attempt to open the bat tery as otherwise the battery will be damaged Even though VRLA batteries do not require top ping up of the electrolyte level and cannot be opened to check the electrolyte level the bat tery condit
264. e Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly V belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system Main Dimensions Weights Fuels coolants lubricants Technical data Parts service The Technical data section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle All authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Centers maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts required for mainte nance and repair work In addition strate gically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service More than 300000 different parts for Mercedes Benz models are available Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts are subject ed to stringent quality inspections Each part has been specifically developed man ufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes Benz vehicles Therefore Genuine Mercedes Benz parts should be installed T The use of non genuine Mercedes Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes Benz could damage the vehicle which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or could compromise the vehicle s durability or safety Y Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet Your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will exchange or repair any defec tive parts originally installed on the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the follow ing warranties e
265. e products Power washer T Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface Do not aim directly at electrical parts electrical connectors seals or other rubber parts Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Ifa door handle is hit by a strong jet of water and a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in close proximity i e within approximately 3 ft approxi mately 1 m the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked Tar stains Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove A tar remover is recommended Paintwork painted body components BE Affixing stickers adhesive tape or similar materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork Mercedes Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not bead up This should normally be done every 3 to 5 months depending on the climate and washing detergent used Mercedes Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding i e loss of gloss Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot gt Us
266. e separate COMAND system operating instruc tions for information on how to set the date and time Setting the time This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Time Date submenu gt Press button PA or Ke repeatedly until the message Clock Set Hour or Clock Set Minute s appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the hour setting Setting the date This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module gt Move the selection marker with button or MSH to the Time Date submenu gt Press button PA or ed repeatedly until the message Date Set Month Date Set Day or Date Set Year appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the month setting Date Set Month m3 207 2005 Example illustration for setting the hour gt Press button or E to set the hour Example illustration for setting the month gt Press button or E to set the month Lighting submenu Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu Use the Lighting submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle The following functions are available Function Page Setting daytime running lamp 175 mode USA only Setting locator lighting 176 Setting night security illumination 176 Se
267. e Rubber Association of Can ada RAC and have been designed specif ically for use in snow conditions Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS ESP 4 ETS and EBP in winter operation For safe handling make sure all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design A Winter tires with a tread depth of less than 1 in 4 mm must be replaced They are no longer suitable for winter operation Warning Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver Such notices are available from your tire dealer or from any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center A If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced Adapt your driving style accordingly Warning Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Operation Snow chains i Even on vehicles with all wheel drive use snow chains on rear tires only Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance for snow chains To help avoid serious damage to your vehicle or tires
268. e and applicable laws and driving recom mendations for safe following distance Warning Controls in detail Driving systems 1 Distance setting switch 2 To decrease distance 3 To increase distance Increasing distance Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater following distance to the preceding vehicle gt Turn distance setting switch Q in direction of arrow Decreasing distance Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a smaller following distance to the preceding vehicle gt Turn distance setting switch in direction of arrow 2 Driving with Distronic This section describes a number of driving situations where special precaution is re quired on the part of the driver Be pre pared to brake in such situations Braking will deactivate the Distronic system Warning AN Distronic works to maintain the speed se lected by the driver unless a moving obsta cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the same travel direction is detected e g fol lowing another vehicle ahead of you at your set distance This means that e Your vehicle can pass another vehicle after you have changed lanes e While in a sharp turn or if the preceding vehicle is in a sharp turn Distronic could lose sight of the preceding vehicle Your vehicle could then accelerate to the previously selected speed Distronic regulates only the distance be tween your
269. e at a vehicle speed of between 3 mph and 6 mph 5 km h and 10 km h When calibration was successful the following message appears in the mul tifunction display Compass Calibration Completed Successful ly if the message Compass Calibration Completed Successful ly does not appear in the multifunction display drive another full circle f calibration does not succeed within 3 minutes the message Compass Calibration appears in the multifunction display again Calibrating the compass has failed due to outside influences Repeat compass calibration in a different location Audio search function Use of the Audio search function to select a radio station will enable you to start a frequency scan Frequency gt page 164 or select a radio station stored in memory Memory gt Move the selection marker with button or MRM to the Vehicle Submenu gt Press button BA or Ke repeatedly until the message Audio Search Function appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Audio Search Function gt Press button ES or E to alent Frequency or Memory Setting automatic central locking Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking With the automatic central locking system activated the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h gt Move the selection marker with button or MMM to the
270. e cargo compartment cover blind and flip it forward Otherwise the strap of the securing hook could damage the cargo compartment cover blind You can now access the vehicle tool kit To remove the vehicle tool kit storage well casing proceed as described on gt page 495 Practical hints Where will I find gt To remove vehicle jack 0 loosen hook and loop fastener T Depending on vehicle production date your vehicle may be equipped with a scissors type Jack located under the cargo compartment floor If so equipped only use this jack when Jacking up the vehicle as otherwise the vehicle s underbody can be damaged See separate instructions for scissors type jack pg To prevent damage always disengage the strap of the securing hook and lower the cargo compartment floor page 490 before closing the tailgate Example illustration 6 Alignment bolt 7 Towing eye bolt Wheel wrench 9 Hook and loop fastener Vehicle jack QD Wheel bolts 2 Collapsible wheel chock 3 Fuse chart Vehicle tool kit storage well casing Depending on production date your vehicle may be equipped with a scissors type vehicle jack Thus appearance and alignment of the items may vary If your vehicle is equipped with a scissors type vehicle jack a reversible ratchet is also included Vehicle jack A Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes If
271. e engine with the SmartKey turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 and repeat starting procedure gt If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS GO Close any doors that may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Or gt Remove KEYLESS GO start stop button from starter switch gt page 43 gt Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio signals from another source may be interfering with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt Repeat the starting procedure gt page 56 Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery gt Geta jump start gt page 536 If the engine does not start after several starting attempts there could be a mal function in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance Parking brake Getting started Driving A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake which could result in an acci dent and or serious personal injury Warning gt Release the parking brake by pulling on release handle 1 The warning lamp USA only or Canada only in the instrument cluster goes out Gettin
272. e entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive only with at least one win dow fully open at all times Coolant temperature During severe operating conditions e g stop and go traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to approximately 248 F 120 C The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious en gine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Driving instructions Warning N e Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Operation At the gas station Refueling Warning A N Warning A N Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline Do not Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flamma ble and poisonous They burn violently and can cause serious personal injury Never allow sparks flame or smoking mate rials near gasoline or diesel fuel Turn off the engine before refueling Whenever you are around gasoline
273. e gear selector lever returns to its original position Shifting from N to R or from N to D gt or With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed Move gear selector lever up past the re sistance point to select reverse gear R Move gear selector lever down past the resistance point to select drive position D i The gear selector lever returns to its original position gt gt gt Release the parking brake gt page 59 Release the brake pedal Carefully depress the accelerator pedal to drive off when it is safe to do so Shifting from P to R gt With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed Move gear selector lever up past the re sistance point to select reverse gear R The gear selector lever returns to its original position gt gt gt Release the parking brake gt page 59 Release the brake pedal Carefully depress the accelerator pedal to drive off when it is safe to do so Shifting from P to D gt gt With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed Move gear selector lever down past the resistance point to select drive position D The gear selector lever returns to its original position gt gt gt Release the parking brake gt page 59 Release the brake pedal Carefully depress the accelerator pedal to drive off when it is safe to do so
274. e multi function display f the battery is disconnected the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator To arrive at the true maintenance service dead line you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indi cator message or maintenance service indicator display Do not confuse the maintenance service indica tor with the engine oil level indicator P Resetting the maintenance service indicator In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center you can have the maintenance service indicator reset The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the informa tion for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance relevant information for your vehicle Such informa tion is available from any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or di rectly from Mercedes Benz BE if the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset have an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center correct it Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Vv Vehicle care
275. e or more main functions of the gt Tele Aid system are malfunctioning The emergency power battery for the gt Tele Aid system is malfunctioning If the vehicle battery is also malfunctioning or drained Tele Aid will not be operational This display appears if button or on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone The fluid level has dropped to about 0f gt total reservoir capacity What to do if Possible solution Refuel at the next gas station gt page 374 Refuel at the next gas station gt page 374 Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Add washer fluid gt page 383 Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Tire Pressure s Please Correct Tire Pressure Caution Tire Defect Caution Tire Defect Warning A N Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire Possible cause consequence Vehicles with Advanced TPMS The pressure is too low in one or more tires One or more tires are de
276. e out er second row seats or the third row seats can be adjusted manually gt While seated reach behind you with both hands and find lower edge of the head restraint gt Adjust the head restraint to the desired position by pushing or pulling on the lower edge of the head restraint cush ion Head restraints Warning A N Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints installed when the rear seats are occupied Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident With a rear seat occupied make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non use position and have the oc cupant adjust the head restraint properly For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will re duce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Second row seat head restraint 1 Head restraint 2 Release button Removing gt Second row seat Fold the seat backrest forward gt page 134 gt Third row seat Fold the seat backrest forward gt page 305 gt Pull head restraint 4 to its uppermost position gt Push release button 2 and pull out head restraint gt Second row seat Fold the seat backrest rearward until
277. e outside e The exterior rear view mirrors automat ically fold out as soon as the vehicle is unlocked and the driver s or front pas senger door are subsequently opened Good visibility Synchronizing exterior rear view mirrors The power folding rear view mirrors may have to be synchronized after the vehicle battery has been disconnected or dis charged If the exterior rear view mirrors do not fold properly upon locking or un locking the vehicle although the corre sponding function in the control system is activated gt page 182 do the following gt Fold each exterior rear view mirror in completely gt page 210 gt Fold each exterior rear view mirror out completely gt page 210 When the exterior rear view mirrors fold properly upon locking the vehicle the exte rior mirrors are synchronized Otherwise repeat the above steps Controls in detail Good visibility Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in and out manually i The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if they are not folded out completely The button is located on the door control panel 1 Button for folding exterior rear view mirrors in and out gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 Folding in gt Briefly press button Q Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in i Ifyou are driving at more than approximately 30 mph 47 km h you will not be able to fold the exterior mirrors in Folding out
278. e spinning the ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes However the ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle A Switch on the ESP immediately if the afore mentioned circumstances do not apply any Warning A Warning The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circum stances described below Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in stan dard driving maneuvers Do not switch off the ESP when a spare wheel is mounted more Otherwise the ESP will not stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a wheel is spinning When you switch off the ESP the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle the engine output is not limited which The ESP switch is located on the upper part of the center console allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip To improve the vehicle s traction switch off the ESP in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as e the 4 ETS will still apply the brake to a spinning wheel ESP switch e the ESP continues to operate when 2 e when driving with snow chains you are braking gt With the engine running press ESP e in deep snow in sand or gravel you cannot activate the cruise control or the Distronic system the cruise control or the Distronic system switch off i
279. e suffi cient clearance Ruts A number of off road tracks or other by ways have deep ruts which can cause the underbody to come in contact with the ground e Make sure the off road driving program gt page 277 or if equipped the LOW RANGE mode gt page 201 is switched on e Set the raised level gt page 279 i Check that the ruts are not too deep and your vehicle s clearance is sufficient Otherwise e your vehicle may be damaged e the underbody of the vehicle may come in contact with the ground and you may get stuck e Avoid high engine speeds e Shift automatic transmission to position 1 gt page 197 e Drive next to the ruts rather than through them if at all possible e fthe ruts are too deep to drive in drive with one side of the vehicle on the grassy center strip if the route permits Operation Returning from off road driving Warning A N If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance or you suspect that possi ble damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on the hazard warning flash ers carefully slow down and drive with cau tion to an area which is a safe distance from the roadway Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible damage If the vehicle or tires ap pear unsafe have it towed to the nearest Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or tire dealer for repairs Damage to the vehicle may influence driving comfort and pose the ri
280. e the appropriate MB Touch Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage i e chips from stones vehicle doors etc Engine cleaning Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical compo nents and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents Corrosion protection such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine compartment after every en gine cleaning Before applying all control linkage bushings and joints should be lu bricated The poly V belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax Vehicle washing In the winter thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible When washing the vehicle underbody do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Ifa door handle is hit by a strong jet of water and a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in close proximity i e within approximately 3 ft approxi mately 1 m the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked Hand wash Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight gt Only use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo Operation Vehicle care gt Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif fused jet of water Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake gt Use plenty of water and rinse the Sponge and chamois frequently gt Rinse with clean water and thorou
281. e the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket If you do not position the jack correctly in the jack take up bracket the vehicle can e fall off the jack e seriously or fatally injure you or others BE Do not position the jack on the body of the vehicle as this may cause damage to the vehicle Depending on production date your vehi cle may be equipped with either a screw type vehicle jack or a scissors type jack see Vehicle jack gt page 492 Practical hints T Depending on vehicle production date your vehicle may be equipped with a scissors type jack located under the cargo compartment floor If so equipped only use this jack when jacking up the vehicle as otherwise the vehicle s underbody can be damaged See separate instructions for scissors type jack PaO 10 4287 31 Screw type jack 2 Take up bracket 3 Jack 4 Crank Flat tire P40 10 4906 31 Scissors type jack 2 Take up bracket 3 Jack 4 Ratchet gt Vehicles with scissors type jack Attach reversible ratchet 4 to vehicle jack in such a way that the word UP can be seen Place jack on firm ground Position jack 3 under the take up bracket 2 so that it is always vertical plumb line as seen from the side even if the vehicle is parked on an incline gt gt Practical hints Flat tire b gt P40 00 2040 31 Screw type jack example illustration P40 00 27081 31
282. e vehicle interior and damage the vehicle s electronics as well as the interior equipment e There is avery high level of driving re sistance in water The surface is slip pery and may not be firm making pulling away in water difficult and dan gerous e Make sure that only small bow waves are formed when driving the vehicle through water e Clean mud off the tire tread after driv ing through water e Todry the brakes apply pressure to the brake pedal several times while driving after leaving the water Driving instructions Crossing obstacles P00 00 3777 31 i Obstacles can damage the vehicle underbody or suspension components If possi ble use the assistance of a second person out side the vehicle to scout the path you intend to take and check for adequate ground clearance when you cross obstacles with your vehicle The person assisting you outside the vehicle should always be a safe distance away from the vehicle and positioned so that he or she cannot get hurt in case of any unexpected vehicle movement After off road driving or crossing obstacles in spect vehicle for any damage especially vehicle underbody and suspension components Failure to do so can adversely affect the vehicle s future performance including increased chance of an accident Operation Driving instructions When driving over tree stumps big rocks and other obstacles observe the following rules Make sure the
283. eam bulb halogen headlamp Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp do the following first gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position W gt page 143 gt Open the hood gt page 378 P82 10 4190 31 1 Housing cover for low beam halogen headlamp Q Low beam headlamp cover 2 Housing cover for high beam halogen bulb high beam and high beam flasher 3 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp bulb 4 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb Bulb socket for side marker lamp bulb Paz 10 4192 31 2 Bulb socket for low beam headlamp Practical hints Replacing bulbs Turn cover 1 counterclockwise Remove cover 1 Turn bulb socket 2 counterclockwise Pull bulb socket 2 out of the headlamp housing vvv iv gt Pull the low beam bulb out of bulb socket 2 gt Insert the new low beam bulb into bulb socket 2 gt Insert bulb socket into the headlamp housing gt Turn bulb socket clockwise until it engages gt Place cover 1 on the opening in the headlamp housing gt Turn cover Q clockwise until it engag es Bi Xenon low beam high beam headlamp Warning A N Do not remove the low beam high beam cover for the Bi Xenon headlamp Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps it is danger ous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician High bea
284. easing the brake pedal The hill start assist system is inactive e when starting off on a level road or downhill grades e with the transmission in neutral position N e with the parking brake set e if the ESP has switched off due to a malfunction Controls in detail Towing a trailer If you tow a trailer note the following points e Manually shift to a lower gear range gt page 197 if the transmission hunts between gears on inclines A lower gear range and reduction of speed reduces the chance to overload or overheat the engine For more information on trailer towing see the Operation section gt page 364 Gear ranges With the automatic transmission in drive position D you can select a gear range for the automatic transmission to operate within You can limit the gear range by pressing the left gearshift button on the steering wheel gearshift control and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the right gear shift button on the steering wheel gearshift control gt page 198 Automatic transmission The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display 1 Current gear range Effect The transmission shifts through sixth gear only The transmission shifts through fifth gear only The transmission shifts through fourth gear only The transmission shifts through third gear only With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine
285. eave the vehicle and move to a safe loca tion The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle s approximate location if they re ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occu pants Roadside Assistance button The Roadside Assistance button is located below the center armrest cover gt 1 Roadside Assistance button ai 3 e Open the storage compartment gt page 318 Press and hold button Q for longer than 2 seconds A call to a Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting Call will appear in the multifunction display When the connection is established the message Call Connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and location subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals g While the call is connected you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV button on the COMAND system unit A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established gt Describe the nature of the need for as sistance Controls in detail Useful features The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes Benz technician or
286. ed Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the Advanced TPMS checked by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been removed the TPMS or Advanced TPMS automati cally becomes active again after a few minutes driving Practical hints What to do if Symbol messages Display symbol Display message Replace air filter Possible cause consequence The air filter is clogged a The battery is no longer charging gt Possible causes e alternator malfunctioning gt e broken poly V belt Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping dis tance is increased Possible solution Have the air filter checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Apply the parking brake gt page 67 gt Check the poly V belt If it is broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center If it is intact gt Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Adjust drivi
287. ed in your vehicle If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba sic functions of the vehicle refer to the Getting started section of this manual The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment For more information on locking and un locking see the Getting started section gt page 40 and gt page 70 SmartKey Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys each with remote control anda removable mechanical key The SmartKey provides an extended oper ating range To prevent theft however it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks e the doors e the tailgate e the fuel filler flap P80 35 2285 31 SmartKey with remote control Lock button Unlock button for tailgate 3 Locking tab for mechanical key 4 Unlock button Battery check lamp 6 Panic button gt page 100 A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning T To prevent possible mal
288. ed solution ABS has detected a malfunction and has gt Continue driving with added caution switched off The BAS ESP EBP and 4 ETS Wheels may lock during hard braking are also switched off see messages in multi reducing steering capability function display gt Read and observe messages in the The brake system is still functioning normally multifunction display gt page 449 but without the ABS available gt Have the system checked at an If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning authorized Mercedes Benz Light other systems such as the navigation Truck Center as soon as possible system or the automatic transmission may a a E malfunctioning also be 8 increases the risk of an accident The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value 10 volts The ABS has switched off again the ABS is operational again and The battery might not be charged sufficiently the ABS indicator lamp should go out If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out gt Have the generator alternator and the battery checked Practical hints Problem Possible cause conse quence The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on while The self diagnosis has not yet the engine is running been completed yet USA only The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the Canada only Warning A N Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi nated can result in an accident Have your brake system
289. eeeeereees 565 GL 320 CDI surera 552 Fuel requirements 565 GL 450 GL 550 cece eens 552 Gasoline additives PAON E errer ne mre N 953 gasoline engine 566 Rims and tireS essisiirecrrsersosssisssossrii 555 Coolant e sesansinicivrsenseareamabtnerens 567 Same size THPES cccccessssressessenees 556 Windshield washer system and Minispare wheel 558 headlamp cleaning system 569 Electrical system csssscccseseeeeees 559 Main Dimensions sssssssseeeessessseseeses 560 SET VV CUZ reran 901 MNO GX caccnsssennssoaensseetarneateanraneeameteateness 57 1 Y Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest We recommend using Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model We have tested these parts to determine their reliability safety and special suitability for Mercedes Benz vehicles We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them even if in indi vidual cases an official approval or authori zation by governmental or other agencies should exist Use of such parts and acces sories could adversely affect the safety performance or reliability of your vehicle Please do not use them Introduction Product information Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at any authorized Me
290. efore only be performed by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Occupant safety If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact a local authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 for details Safety and Security Occupant safety Air bags Warning A N Air bags are designed to reduce the poten tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts front air bags side impacts side impact air bags and window curtain air bags or rollovers window curtain air bags However no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities The deployment of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags This dust however is neither injurious to your health nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle The dust might cause some tem porary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door Warning To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated posit
291. ehicle traction e The center differential compensates for differences in wheel rotation be tween the front and rear axle e The rear axle differential compensates differences between the rear wheels i At the front axles the 4 ETS system page 107 compensates for any traction problems A few words about differentials and differential locks When a vehicle negotiates a turn wheels on the outside of the curve must travel far ther and rotate faster than the inside wheels The differential the operation of a set of gears that allows the powered wheels in a vehicle to turn at different speeds makes this essential function pos sible The drawback is that the differential also sends most of the engine s power to the wheel with the least load or strain on it For example if one of a vehicle s powered wheels sits on a patch of snow and spins because there is no traction all of the en gine s power will go to that wheel because the power will take the path of least resis tance Meanwhile the opposite wheel sit ting on dry pavement where it could get enough grip to start the vehicle moving sits idle because it receives no power The Electronic Traction System ETS ad dresses this problem and provides for good control and steering ability by auto matically slowing the slipping wheel and thus increasing the power to the other non slipping drive wheels to get the vehicle moving The ESP and ETS in
292. el gt page 381 and see Fuels coolants lu bricants gt page 562 Operation At the gas station Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system For more information on refilling the wash er reservoir see Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 383 Vehicle lighting Check function and cleanliness For infor mation on replacing light bulbs see Re placing bulbs gt page 504 For more information see Exterior lamp switch gt page 143 Tire inflation pressure For more information see Checking tire inflation pressure gt page 395 Operation Engine compartment Hood Warning A N Do not pull the release lever while the vehi cle is in motion Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow This could cause the hood to come loose and injure you and or others Opening Warning If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment or if the coolant tem perature display indicates that the engine is overheated do not open the hood Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled If necessary call the fire department Warning A N You could be injured when the hood is open even when the engine is turned off Parts of the engine can become very hot To prevent burns let the engine cool off com pletely before touching
293. ell your vehicle erase the codes of all three channels Programming tips If you are having difficulty programming the integrated remote control here are some helpful tips e Check the frequency of hand held remote control typically located on the reverse side of the remote The in tegrated remote control is compatible with radio frequency devices operating between 280 390 MHz e Put anew battery in hand held remote control This will increase the likeli hood of the hand held remote control sending a faster and more accurate sig nal to the integrated remote control e While performing step 3 hold hand held remote control at differ ent lengths and angles from the signal transmitter button or you are programming Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 to 5 in 5 to 12 cm away or the same angle at varying distances Controls in detail e If another hand held remote control is available for the same device try the programming steps again using that other hand held remote control Make sure new batteries are in the hand held remote control before beginning the procedure e Straighten the antenna wire from the garage door opener assembly This may help improve transmitting and or receiving signals ce Certain types of garage door openers are in compatible with the integrated remote control If you should experience further difficulties with programming the integrated remote control
294. ep 4 gt Using both hands simultaneously press hand held remote control button 6 and the desired signal trans mitter button or Do not release the buttons until step 5 is com pleted Indicator lamp will flash first slowly and then rapidly Indicator lamp flashes immediately the first time the signal transmitter button Is programmed If this button has already been programmed the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds Step 5 gt After indicator lamp Q changes froma slow to a rapidly flashing light release the hand held remote control button and the signal transmitter button Step 6 gt Press and hold the just trained signal transmitter button or and observe indicator lamp Q If indicator lamp Q stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the respective signal transmitter button or is pressed and re leased i Ifindicator lamp Q flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the rolling code feature Step 7 gt To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener or other rolling code devices with the rolling code feature follow these instructions after complet
295. equence Suggested solution The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark Refuel at the next gas station gt page 374 There is a malfunction in the restraint systems gt Drive with added caution to the The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Device nearest authorized ETDs could deploy unexpectedly or fail to Mercedes Benz Light Truck deploy unexpectedly in an accident Center the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpect edly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and or injury to you or to others Practical hints What to do if Lamp in center console Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution The front passenger The system is malfunctioning gt Have the system checked as soon as front air bag off indica possible by an authorized tor lamp illuminates Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center and remains illuminat gt Also read and observe any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps gt page 460 ed with the weight of a typical adult or some one larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat Warning A N If the indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passen ger seat do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been rep
296. er s instructions Installation of infant and child restraint system This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at the second row seat backrest For installing an infant and child restraint system at the third row seats use the cargo tie down rings in the cargo compartment gt page 303 C Anchorage ring cover gt Remove anchorage ring cover 1 from seat backrest of the seat on which a child seat is to be installed 2 Anchorage ring 3 Hook For safety make sure hook 3 has attached to anchorage ring 2 beyond the safety catch as illustrated gt Move the respective head restraint to its uppermost position gt page 135 P91 20 2162 31 2 Anchorage ring 3 Hook 4 Top tether strap gt Guide top tether strap between head restraint and top of seat backrest Safety and Security Occupant safety gt Securely fasten hook 3 which is part of the tether strap to anchorage ring 2 Make sure e the top tether strap is not twisted e the head restraint is installed and positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back rest e top tether strap is positioned be tween the seat backrest and the cargo compartment cover blind if installed the top tether strap is positioned between the seat backrest and the cargo net if installed gt D Safety and Security b gt Occu
297. eratures may fall below freezing point Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system reservoir Operation Tires and wheels Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for information on test ed and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase A Replace rims or tires with the same designa tion manufacturer and type as shown on the original part Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for fur ther information If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted Warning e The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged e The operating clearance of the wheels and the tires may no longer be correct A Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Warning When replacing rims only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident Retreaded tires are not tested or recom mended by Mercedes Benz since previous damage cannot always be recognized on re treads The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are used Important guidelines Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make Tires must be of the correct size for the rim Break in new tires for ap
298. erence that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Activating gt Press and hold button Q for at least 1 second An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate briefly Deactivating gt Press button Q again or gt Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch or gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 43 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be in the vehicle Y Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems e ABS Antilock Brake System e BAS Brake Assist System e ESP Electronic Stability Program e EBP Electronic Brake Proportioning e 4 ETS Electronic Traction System Safety and Security A The following factors increase the risk of accidents Warning e Excessive speed especially in turns e Wet and slippery road surfaces e Following another vehicle too closely The driving safety systems described in this section cannot reduce these risks or pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle Always adapt your driving style to the pre vailing road and weather conditions and keep a safe distance to other road users and objects in the street a In winter operation the maximum effective ness of the ABS the BAS the ESP the EBP a
299. erences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and or serious injury to you and others Warning gt Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 page 265 The Distronic resumes to the last set speed gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The last set speed or if no speed is stored the current set speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds Deactivating Distronic There are several ways to deactivate the Distronic system gt Step on the brake pedal or gt Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow gt page 265 Distronic will be deactivated The last set speed will be stored in memory The following message appears in the multi function display for approximately 5 seconds DISTRONIC Off The last stored set speed is deleted when the engine is turned off The Distronic switches off automatically when e you step on the brake pedal e you depress the parking brake pedal In this case the Distronic speed segments in the speedometer gt page 263 will go out e the vehicle speed falls below 20 mph 30 km h e the ESP is in operation e the ESP is switched off with the ESP switch gt page 105 e the ESP has switched off due to a malfunction gt page 441 e you set the automatic transmission to N while driving The Distronic speed segments in the speedometer gt p
300. erratic indications and should be taken into consideration Warning A N Make sure no persons or animals are in the area in which you are maneuvering You could otherwise injure them The Parktronic system is an electronic parking aid and designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you e switch on the ignition or start the engine and e release the parking brake and e set the automatic transmission to position D R or N The Parktronic system deactivates at vehicle speeds exceeding approximately 11 mph 18 km h At lower vehicle speeds the Parktronic system turns on again The Parktronic system also deactivates when you set the automatic transmission to position P or depress the parking brake pedal The Parktronic system monitors the sur roundings of your vehicle with six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper P54 65 3034 31 1 Sensors in the front bumper Controls in detail Range of the sensors To function properly the sensors must be free of dirt ice snow and slush Clean the sensors regularly being careful not to scratch or damaging the sensors see Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors gt page 430 T During parking maneuvers pay special attention to objects located above or below the height o
301. ert mechanical key into opening Batteries contain materials that can harm gt Press mechanical key Q indirection of the environment if disposed of improperly ALLON Recycling of batteries is the preferred The battery compartment 2 is method of disposal Many states require unlatched sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling gt Pull battery compartment 2 out of the SmartKey housing 3 Batteries 4 Contact spring P80 35 2284 31 Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries Pull out batteries G Using a line free cloth insert new batteries 3 under contact springs with the positive terminal side facing up Return battery compartment 2 into housing until it locks into place Slide mechanical key Q back into the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Check the operation of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Practical hints Replacing bulbs Bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling It is there fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as semblies are in good working order at all times Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced See an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for headlamp adjustment i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of hi
302. es Press button Bg or FA The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which they have occurred For malfunctions and warning messages see Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display gt page 449 After you have scrolled through all recorded status messages the first recorded message appears again Should the vehicle s system record any conditions while driving the number of messages will reappear in the multifunc tion display e when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position O or removed from the starter switch or e when you turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 69 in the starter switch once and open the driver s door this puts the starter switch in position 0 same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch a The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the start er switch to position 1 or 2 or when you press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once or twice without depressing the brake pedal You will then only see high priority messages in the multifunction display gt page 449 Settings menu In the Settings menu there are two functions e The function Reset to factory settings with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory settings e A collection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle gt Pre
303. es Benz Light Truck Center Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or result in property dam age or personal injury Practical hints What to do if Switching on the ignition causes all Warning A instrument cluster lamps except high beam headlam indicator lamp and turn signal No messages will be displayed if either the indicator lamps unless activated as well as the instrument cluster or the multifunction multifunction display to come on Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working display is inoperative i order before starting your journey As a result you will not be able to see infor mation about your driving conditions such as speed or outside temperature warn ing indicator lamps malfunction warning messages or the failure of any systems Driving characteristics may be impaired If you must continue to drive please do so with added caution Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible On the pages that follow you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may appear in the multifunction display For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections e Text messages gt page 451 e Symbol messages gt page 466 Text messages Display message ABS ABS ESP Inoperative See Operator s Manual ABS ESP Unavailable
304. es for the system to signal a malfunction using the TPMS telltale flashing and illumination se quence The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes driv ing if the malfunction has been corrected i Operating radio transmission equipment e g wireless headsets two way radios in or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal function Tire inflation pressure warnings If the system detects a significant loss of tire inflation pressure in one or more than one tire a message appears in the multi function display 3 Example illustration f In addition a warning signal sounds Restarting the TPMS A It is the driver s responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold infla tion pressure Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You might lose control over the vehicle Warning The TPMS must be restarted when you have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new level e g because of different load or driving conditions The TPMS is then recalibrated to the current tire inflation pressures gt Using the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 388 or if available the supplemental tire inflation pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt page 374 make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct amp Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire in flation pressure to the
305. eset Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer gt page 26 denotes excessive engine speed T Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Instrument cluster To help protect the engine the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking Outside temperature indicator A The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Warning Indicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road sur face is free of ice The road may still be icy especially in wooded areas or on bridges The outside temperature is displayed in the multifunction display gt page 155 Controls in detail Instrument cluster The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area Due to its location the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by com parison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor not by comparison to external displays e g bank signs etc When moving the vehicle into colder ambi ent temperatures e g when leaving your garage you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed A delay also occurs when ambient temper ature
306. essive engine speeds drive with moderate engine speeds max 3000 rpm e Utilize the engine s braking power when descending a slope observe the engine speed do not overrev the en gine Apply the service brake as need ed i For maximum engine speed see Instru ment cluster gt page 26 and see Engine gt page 553 e Check the brakes after a lengthy down grade drive A Never turn the vehicle around on steep inclines The vehicle might roll over If the vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb back it down in reverse gear Warning Operation amp The hill start assist system supports you when driving uphill For more information see Hill start assist sys tem gt page 196 Traction in steep terrain The maximum vehicle climbing ability is a 100 grade which is equivalent to a slope angle of 45 degrees Keep in mind that the climbing ability of the vehicle depends on terrain conditions Be easy on the accelerator and watch for continuous wheel traction when driving in steep terrain The 4 ETS helps greatly when starting out on a steep incline when the front wheels have then the tendency to slip due to the weight shifting towards the rear axle The 4 ETS recognizes the situation and limits the torque for the front wheels by braking them Simultaneously the torque for the rear wheels is increased Driving instructions i Vehicles with enhanced off road package
307. essories approved by Mercedes Benz may be used Both driver and the front passenger should always use the indicator lamp as an indi cation of whether or not the front passen ger Is properly positioned Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning J If the indicator lamp illumi nates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front passenger seat have the front passenger re position himself or herself in the seat until the indicator lamp goes out or check whether objects are caught under or around the seat More information about air bag display mes sages gt page 460 In the event of a collision the air bag control unit will not allow front passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS classified the front passenger seat occupant as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child re straint or if the front passenger seat is sensed as being empty When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat occupant Is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint the indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is start ed and remain illuminated indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deacti vated When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat is classified as being empty the indicator lamp will illumi nate when the engine is started and remain
308. essures is located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 388 Check tires for possible damage and remove foreign objects Replace missing valve caps Rims e Dented or bent rims can cause tire in flation pressure loss and damage the tire beads For this reason check and if necessary change rims before driv ing off road Vehicle tool kit e Check if the vehicle jack gt page 492 is functional e Inall cases take the vehicle tool kit a strong tow rope a shovel and a small plank to put under the vehicle jack on sandy soil with you Driving in steep terrain Slope angle 1 Overhang angle front 2 Overhang angle rear Vehicles with air sus pension program Raised level Highway 34 29 POO 00 3775 31 287 23 Vehicles with 2 enhanced off road package Off road level 3 36 30 Off road level 2 B42 28 Off road level 1 Bale 25 Highway 29 23 e Comply with the warnings gt page 355 and rules for off road driving gt page 356 Driving on embankments slopes and other steep inclines should only be done straight up or downhill i e in the line of gravity Maximum vehicle climb ing ability is a 100 grade which is equivalent to a slope angle of 45 degrees Keep in mind that the climbing ability of the vehicle depends on terrain conditions e Shift automatic transmission to position 1 gt page 197 e Drive slowly e Avoid exc
309. estraints see Head restraints Front towing eye 540 Fuel 375 563 Additives 566 Capacities Fueltank 563 Consumption statistics 184 185 Filling the tank 374 Fuel filler flap and cap 374 497 Fuel gauge 29 Fuel tank reserve warning lamp 29 446 Premium unleaded gasoline 375 563 565 Requirements Octane rating 565 Fuel cap Messages in the multifunction display 474 Fuel consumption statistics Since last reset 185 Since start 184 Fuel filler flap 374 Locking unlocking 374 Opening 374 Opening in an emergency 497 Fuel tank Capacity 563 Filler flap 374 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 562 Fuses 543 Fuse box in cargo compartment 544 Fuse box in engine compartment 544 Fuse box in passenger compartment 545 Fuse chart 490 Replacing 543 G Garage door opener 338 Gasoline see Fuel GAWR 416 Gear range Automatic transmission Limiting 197 Shifting into optimal 199 Gear selector lever 25 56 189 Cleaning 433 Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission 189 Messages in the multifunction display 459 Position indicator 192 197 Transmission position 192 Global locking unlocking see Key SmartKey Glove box 315 Good visibility 208 189 197 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR Gross Trailer Weight see GTW Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW GIW 416 GVW 416 GVWR 416 H Halogen headlamp see Headlamps Hands free microphone 34 Hard plastic trim items cleaning 433 Hazard warning flasher 149 Hea
310. esult in an accident The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle s lights at all times gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Bag With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS GO start stop button pressed once only the parking lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off depending on the brightness of the ambient light When the engine is running the low beam headlamps the tail and parking lamps the license plate lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off depending on the brightness of the ambient light i Canada only High beam headlamps are only available with the exterior lamp switch in position Boy Daytime running lamp mode In Canada the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode In the USA the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated by default Activate the day time running lamp mode using the control system see Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only gt page 175 gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position WJ or Bz When the engine is running the low beam headlamps are switched on Controls in detail In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally e Tailand parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps o gt With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine ru
311. et Is located in the glove box 1 Glove box lid release 2 Glove box lid Opening the glove box gt Pull lid release in direction of arrow Glove box lid 2 opens downward Closing the glove box gt Push glove box lid up to close Useful features Releasing CD changer 1 Release button 2 AUX socket Vehicles without Rear Seat Entertainment System 3 CD changer gt Open the glove box gt page 315 gt Press release button Q CD changer 8 is released and swings down automatically For information on CD changer operation see separate COMAND system operating instructions Controls in detail Useful features Closing CD changer Locking and unlocking the glove box gt Insert mechanical key into glove box arn separately lock You can lock the glove box separately e g Turn mechanical key to position to when the vehicle is in the shop for service lock the glove box gt Take the mechanical key out of the gt Turn mechanical key to position to SmartKey or SmartKey with unlock the glove box amp The glove box can only be locked or KEYLESS GO gt page 496 4 unlocked with the mechanical key gt page 496 1 CD changer gt Gently push CD changer up in direction of arrow until it engages For information on CD changer operation see separate COMAND system operating Instructions 1 Unlocking glove box 2 Locking glove box
312. expressed in percentage Operation Tires and wheels Bar Another metric unit for air pressure There are 14 5038 pounds per square inch psi to 1 bar there are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Cold tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with stan dard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant and if so equipped air conditioning and additional optional equipment but without passen gers and cargo DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U S Department of Transportation GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door B pillar GTW Gross Trailer Weight The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo equipment luggage etc loaded on the trailer GVW Gross Vehicle Weight The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel tools spare wheel installed accessories passengers and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load The GVW must
313. exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward hit from the rear or forcibly pushed rearward hit from the front press fold button Q gt page 210 to fold mirrors in then press fold button Q gt page 210 again to fold mirrors out Do not force mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjustment mechanism The mirror housing is then properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual man ner i The memory function gt page 141 lets you store the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the setting for the steering wheel and the seat positions At low ambient temperatures the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 208 Y Driving Warning Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob structing the pedal s range of movement Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance During sudden driving or braking maneu vers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate This could lead to accidents and injury Fastening the seat belts Warning A N Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat
314. ey from the starter switch and open the driver s door an acoustic signal sounds In addition the message Switch Off Lights appears in the multifunction display Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp i Failure to switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp when leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged battery gt Exit the vehicle and close all doors and the tailgate Locking with the SmartKey gt Press lock button on the SmartKey gt page 40 With the tailgate and all doors closed the turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs on the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 112 Getting started Parking and locking Locking with KEYLESS GO P80 30 2220 31 1 Lock button on the outside door handle gt Press lock button Q on an outside door handle With the tailgate and all doors closed the turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs on the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 112 Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti theft systems Safety and Security Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most im portant facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle The restraint systems are e Seat belts
315. f after approximately 20 minutes No indicator lamp on Seats gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 Switching on gt Press switch Q Three red indicator lamps 2 in the switch come on gt Continue pressing switch C until desired seat heating level is reached Switching off gt Press switch 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps 2 go out f one or more of the indicator lamps on seat heating switch Q gt page 138 are flash ing there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical consumers are switched on The seat heating switches off automatically The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available Controls in detail Seats Seat ventilation The blue indicator lamps in the switch SSS ome on to show which ventilation level The switches for the seat ventilation are you have selected located in the center console Level 3 Three indicator lamps on highest level 2 Two indicator lamps on 1 One indicator lamp on lowest level off No indicator lamp on gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 1 Seat ventilation switch front seats 8 gt pag 2 Indicator lamps Switching on gt Press button Q repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set The seat ventilation for the driver s seat is automatically set to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature gt page 24
316. f currently activated switch Q The ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on The ESP is deactivated Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning A N When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated continuously the ESP is switched off or is not operational due to a malfunction Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road conditions and to the non operating status of the ESP T Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex tended period of time with the ESP switched off This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Switching on the ESP gt Press ESP switch Q The ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out You are now again in normal driving mode For more information see Practical hints gt page 435 Off road ESP With the off road driving program switched on gt page 277 or with the transmission in LOW RANGE mode gt page 201 the ESP designed for off road use is automat ically activated At speeds below 27 mph 45 km h the ESP assists in over un dersteering thus improving vehicle trac tion ESP Trailer Stabilization If the trailer you are towing should begin to sway the rig can only be stabilized by immediately applying the brakes hard Steering during this maneuver will not help to stabilize the rig ESP will assist you in such situation
317. f the sensors e g planters or trailer hitches The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result Ultrasonic signals from outside sources e g working jackhammers car wash or the air brakes of trucks may impair the operation of the Parktronic system Driving systems P54 65 3035 31 se r 100 50 Ofem 0 60 20cm 40 20 Ofin o 24 Win P54 65 3036 31 Controls in detail Driving systems Front sensors Center approx 40 in 100 cm Corners approx 24 in 60 cm Rear sensors Center approx 48 in 120 cm Corners approx 32 in 80 cm Minimum distance Center approx 8 in 20 cm Corners approx 6 in 15 cm If the system detects an obstacle in this range all the distance warning segments illuminate and you hear a warning signal If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance the actual distance may no longer be indicated by the system Warning indicators Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel ative distance between the sensors and an obstacle The warning indicator for the front area is located above the center air vents in the dashboard The warning indi cator for the rear area is located in the rear passenger compartment under the roof Tia P OO U Front area warning indicator 1 Left side of the vehicle 2 Right side of the vehicle 3 Readiness indicators Each warning indicato
318. fcases etc lodged underneath behind or around the seat Such forces may cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat Keep the seat unoccupied close the front passenger door and switch on the ignition gt page 42 Continued on next page Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible Possible solution cause conse quence Monitor the indicator lamp on the center console gt page 85 and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster gt page 26 for the following With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on e the indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain illuminated indicating that the OCS gt page 81 has deactivated the air bag e the message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator s Manual or the message Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator s Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display If above conditions are met you can occupy the front passenger seat again Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS gt page 81 the indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out If above conditions are not met the system is not working properly Have the system checked
319. ff road Package The switch is located on the upper part of the center console 1 Vehicle level switch 2 Indicator lamp Basic settings The following vehicle chassis ride heights can be selected using the vehicle level switch in the center console Level Driving situation Raised For off road driving or driv ing in rough terrain The in dicator lamp is on Highway For driving on paved roads in fair or better condition The indicator lamp is off G The third available level is the high speed level that is set automatically Controls in detail Driving systems The following is the approximate change in ride height for each of the level settings Level Ride height Raised 3 1 in 80 mm Highway 0 in 0 mm High speed 0 6 in 15 mm i Vehicles with ADS Depending on the ADS setting page 278 the vehicle will be lowered to the high speed level when traveling at higher speeds At speeds below 40 mph 64 km h at the latest it will be returned to the highway level The high speed level is not available if tow ing a trailer For more information on towing a trailer see Trailer towing page 364 Controls in detail Driving systems Raised level Only select the raised level if appropriate for the driving situation encountered Otherwise e fuel consumption may increase e handling characteristics of the vehicle may be unfavorable You can select the rai
320. fficient clearance During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate This could lead to accidents and injury Automatic transmission Gear selector lever The gear selector lever is located on the right of the steering column i r R rt is CaA e E py K if J E r i a at i i eh j R as fh ee Y a Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission P Park position R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position Controls in detail Automatic transmission a The current transmission position P R N or D appears in the multifunction display gt page 192 A It is dangerous to shift the automatic trans mission out of park position P or neutral position N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Warning Shifting from P to N Moving the gear selector lever up or down shifts the automatic transmission out of park position P gt With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed Move gear selector lever up or down to resistance point to select neutral position N ap Th
321. flating One or more tires are deflating Vehicles with Advanced TPMS The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display Possible solution gt M M Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers If necessary change the wheel Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers If necessary change the wheel Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Tire Pressure The tire pressure in one or more tires is Check Tires already below the minimum value Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires is already below the minimum value Vehicles with Advanced TPMS The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display Warning A N Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Contin ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces sive heat build up and possibly a fire Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoid ing abrupt steering and braking maneuvers Check and adjust tire pressure as required gt page 395 If necessary change the wheel gt page 519 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoid ing abrupt steering and braking maneuvers Check and adjust tire
322. flation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment Important notes on tire inflation pressure A Warning If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly e Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects e Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving depending on the driving speed and the tire load If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher where it is legal and conditions allow consult the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap if available on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure If you do not adjust the tire infla tion pressure excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for proper tire inflation pressure i Driving comfort may be reduced when the tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for speeds above 100 mph 160 km h as specified on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure Some vehicles may
323. function avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electro magnetic radiation Controls in detail a USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Locking and unlocking ap You can also open and close e the door windows e the hinged quarter windows e the tilt sliding sunroof using the SmartKey see Summer opening fea ture gt page 249 and see Convenience clos ing feature gt page 250 BB you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained e Check the batteries in the SmartKey and replace them if necessary gt page 502
324. g any component or part of the seat Warning A N SRS the installation of additional ram In addition improper repair work on the CSA E material badges etc over the steering SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use belts in stalled or supplied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices ETDs are designed to function on a one time only basis An air bag or ETD that is deployed must be replaced Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide ade quate protection wheel hub front passenger front air bag cover outboard sides of the seat back rests door trim panels or door frame trims and installation of additional electrical electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects e g packages purs es umbrellas etc Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door These items may turn into projec tiles and cause head and other injuries when the window curtain air bag is deployed Air bag system components will be
325. g brake is engaged Make sure not to endanger any other road users when you engage the parking brake Warning Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic Warm up the engine smoothly Do not place full load on the engine until the oper ating temperature has been reached T When driving off on a slippery surface do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty T Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear Parking A Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the vehicle drivetrain as a result of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Firmly depress parking brake pedal Set the automatic transmission to position P e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheel towards the road curb Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS G
326. g mobile phone cradle P82 70 5736 31 Example illustration 1 To release the mobile phone cradle 2 To remove the mobile phone cradle 3 Mobile phone cradle gt Press release button in direction of arrow 1 and take mobile phone cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2 Installing a different mobile phone cra dle P82 70 5737 31 Example illustration gt Contact plate Recesses Mobile phone cradle Insert mobile phone cradle into recesses 2 of contact plate Q Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward until it engages Controls in detail TEENE i The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the sub scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the button Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated If you have any questions regarding activation please call the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call you will receive a user ID and password By visiting www mbusa com and selecting Tele Aid USA only you will have access to account information remote door unlock and more Useful features The Tele Aid system Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response e automatic and manual emergency e roadside a
327. g section height by section width Tire code The tire code gt page 406 indicates the tire construction type The R stands for radial tire type Letter D means diag onal or bias ply construction letter B means belted bias ply construction At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for example 245 40 ZR 18 For additional information see Tire speed rating gt page 408 Operation Tires and wheels Rim diameter The rim diameter 4 gt page 406 is the diameter of the bead seat not the diameter of the rim edge Rim diameter is indicated in inches in Tire load rating The tire load rating G gt page 406 is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support For example a load rating of 91 corre sponds to a maximum load of 1356 Ibs 615 kg the tire is designed to support See also Maximum tire load gt page 412 where the maximum load as sociated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lbs Operation Tires and wheels Warning A N The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR gt page 416 of your vehicle Otherwise tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and or serious personal injury to you or others Always replace rims and tires with the same designation manufacturer and type as sh
328. g started Driving Driving off gt Depress the brake pedal The gear selector lever can now be used gt Shift automatic transmission to D or R gt page 191 Gh Wait for the gear selection process to com plete before setting the vehicle in motion ay Shifting from gear position P to position R N or D is only possible with the brake pedal depressed Without the brake pedal depressed the gear selector lever can be moved but the parking pawl remains engaged not allowing shifting to occur gt Release the brake pedal gt Carefully depress the accelerator pedal T If you hear a warning signal and the message Release Parking Brake appears in the multifunction display when driving off you have forgotten to release the parking brake Release the parking brake gt page 59 Once the vehicle is in motion the automatic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down The automatic door lock feature can be deactivated page 180 You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do SO After a cold start the automatic transmis sion shifts at a higher engine revolution This allows the catalytic converter gaso line engine or the oxidation catalyst die sel engine to reach its operating temperature earlier Warning A N On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive whee
329. g wheel and power is transferred to the wheel s with traction The ESP warning lamp in the instru ment cluster starts to flash at any vehicle speed as soon as a tire loses traction and the wheel begins to spin If conditions require switch on off road driving program gt page 277 or LOW RANGE mode page 201 Driving safety systems Warning A N When you see ESP warning lamp flashing in the instrument cluster then pro ceed as follows e While driving off apply as little throttle as possible e While driving ease up on the accelera tor e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The 4 ETS cannot prevent accidents resul ting from excessive speed Safety and Security Driving safety systems T Operational or performance test must only be conducted on a two axle dynamometer If such tests are necessary contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty T Because the ESP operates automatically the engine and ignition must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 0 or 1 when testing the parking brake on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds Active br
330. gage load capacity of your vehicle gt page 392 and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x150 650 Ibs Step 5 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configura tions and number and size of occupants The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs This is for illustration purposes only Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle s Tire and Loading Information placard gt page 388 gt Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 Example Combined Numberof Seating weight limit occupants configura of occu driver and tion pants and passengers cargo from placard 1 1500 Ibs 5 front 2 rear 3 2 1500 Ibs 3 front 1 rear 2 3 1500 Ibs 1 front 1 The higher the weight of all occupants the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available For more information see Trailer tongue load gt page 392 Occupants weight Occupant 1 Occupant 2 Occupant 3 Occupant 4 Occupant 5 Occupant 1 Occupant 2 Occupant 3 Occupant 1 150 Ibs 180 Ibs 160 Ibs 140 Ibs 120 Ibs 200 Ibs 190 Ibs 150 Ibs 150 Ibs Combined weight of all occupants 750 Ibs 540 Ibs 150 Ibs Operation Tires and wheels Available carg
331. ge gt page 277 e Air suspension gt page 278 Off road driving rules Engage the off road driving program gt page 277 or LOW RANGE mode gt page 201 before driving under off road conditions If necessary activate differential locks gt page 204 Make sure you select a vehicle level gt page 279 appropriate to the topo graphical conditions Always make sure the vehicle has enough ground clearance Fasten items being carried as securely as possible gt page 295 Always navigate gradients with the en gine on and with the transmission en gaged in a gear Switch on the DSR gt page 274 to help maintain a preset speed iH Observe the following during off road driving Keep doors tailgate windows and tilt sliding sunroof closed whenever driving off road Adjust vehicle speed to condition of terrain The more uneven rutty and steeper the ter rain the lower the speed should be Drive through water slowly at an even speed avoiding a bow wave Be especially careful when driving in un known territory It may be necessary to get out of the vehicle and scout the path you in tend to take Watch out for obstacles such as rocks holes tree stumps and ruts Before driving through water determine its depth Do not stop vehicle while immersed in water and do not shut off the engine Operation In sandy soil drive at a steady speed as al lowed by conditions This helps
332. gh humid ity driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use when the following lamps malfunction Turn signal lamps Brake lamps Parking lamps Tail lamps Read and observe the messages in the multi function display gt page 477 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Front lamps Lamp Type Lamp Type Turn signal lamp a AK Q Parking and standing W5W 30 2 2 cp lamp bulb P oaa i Front fog lamp H11 55 W igh beam high beam aer H7 55 W Corner illuminating front fog lamp H11 55 W Bi Xenon headlamps High beam high beam eari flasher spot lamp H7 55 W ay anne 3 Headlamps Lamp Type PNRA Maen High mounted brake Bi Xenon eac AMPS lamp LED P82 10 4189 31 Low beam D1S 35 W O Backup lamp P 21 W Additional turn signal LED Tail brake pantie P21 4W Sins standing side marker Side marker lamp WY 5 W lamp Vehicles with Bi Xenon headlamps Do not re D Turn signal lamp PY 21W place the Bi Xenon bulbs yourself Contact an aa authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center 2 Rear fog lamp drivers P 21 4 W side only 3 License plate lamps C5W Practical hints Replacing bulbs Warning A Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot Allow the lamp to cool down before chang ing a bulb Keep bulbs out of reach of children Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas A bulb can explode if you e touch or move it whe
333. ghly dry with a chamois Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish T Do not use scouring agents on these parts Never apply strong force and only use a soft non sratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint Operation Vehicle care Automatic car wash When taking the vehicle through an auto matic conveyor type car wash observe the You can have your car washed in an auto os following instructions matic car wash from the start Automatic car washes without brushes are prefera ble AN When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch do not leave children unattended in the vehicle It is possible for children to switch on the ignition which could result in unsupervised use of vehicle equipment A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning gt To protect the filter system switch the climate control system gt page 216 or the automatic climate control system gt page 230 to air recirculation mode BE Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic touchless car wash which use caustic spray Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the paint or ornamental moldings If the vehicle is very dirty prewash it before running it through the automatic car wash i Make sure that the windshield wiper
334. ght backup lamp is gt malfunctioning Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 510 Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 510 Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 509 Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 509 Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 511 Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 511 Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 511 Display symbol 10 e I Display message ST a Fiains Tail Lamp Ler Tail Lamp Right Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution You have removed the SmartKey Turn the exterior lamp switch to WJ from the starter switch and gt page 143 opened the driver s door or removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the vehicle and left the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp on The left tail lamp is malfunction gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible ing A substitute bulb is being gt page 511 used The right tail lamp is malfunc gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible tioning A substitute bulb is be gt page 511 ing used Practical hints What to do if Display symbol rO r 1 Display message iene Stele Rear Left Turn Signal Rear Right Turn Signal Front Lett Turn Sian Front Right Turn Signal Left Mirror Turn Signal ROATE ON Possible cause consequence The left rear turn signal
335. gnal and the corner illuminating front fog lamps can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original position i There may be a brief delay before the corner illuminating front fog lamps switch off Driving in reverse Switching on corner illuminating front fog lamps gt Shift the automatic transmission to reverse gear R gt page 191 The front fog lamp opposite to your steering direction comes on Switching off corner illuminating front fog lamps gt Shift the automatic transmission to a gear other than reverse gear R gt page 191 The respective corner illuminating front fog lamp goes out Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an air bag deploys The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the center console 1 Hazard warning flasher switch Controls in detail Switching on hazard warning flasher gt Press hazard warning flasher switch Q All turn signals are flashing With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn only the respective turn signals will operate when the ignition is switched on Switching off hazard warning flasher p gt Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 ag
336. gt Briefly press button Q again Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out i If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward hit from the rear or forcibly pushed rearward hit from the front press button Q to fold mirrors in then press button Q again to fold mirrors out Do not force mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjust ment mechanism The mirror housing is then properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner Please make sure both rear view mirrors are folded out before driving off Sun visors The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving A Do not use the vanity mirror while driving Warning Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion Reflected glare can endanger you and others Controls in detail Good visibility Glare through the windshield Glare through a side window gt Swing sun visor Q down gt Make sure sun visor 4 is properly en gaged in mounting 7 gt When you do not experience glare any more swing sun visor Q up Vanity mirror Sun visor gt Swing sun visor down E gt 2 Additional sun visor gt Flip up cover G to access vanity Sun visor 3 Mirror lamp mirror 2 Additional sun visor 4 Vanity mirror cover Vanity mirror Vanity mirror lamp comes on gt Swing sun visor Q down 6 Holder for gas cards gt After using vanity mirror flip down
337. h Reduce set speed gt Briefly press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point in direc tion of arrow 2 gt page 276 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle speed decreases in incre ments of 5 mph Canada 10 km h Each time the set speed is changed DSR will appear in the multifunction dis play and the newly set speed is shown i The new speed is set and the vehicle will accelerate or decelerate Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the new set speed The set speed is canceled when DSR is switched off If DSR is switched on again DSR will use the programmed default speed gt page 183 Controls in detail Driving systems Off road driving program Vehicles without enhanced off road package The off road driving program is designed to assist the driver when driving off road in terrain and crossing water The off road driving program adjusts the engine power and shifting of the automatic transmission to be more suitable for the off road use of the vehicle In addition the ABS ESP and 4 ETS designed for off road use are automatically activated In the following situations you should switch to the off road driving program e during off road driving e when crossing water gt page 360 e when towing up or down on steep gradients Controls in detail Driving systems The switch is located on the upper part of t
338. h a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution The surface may temporarily change color If this is the case wait for it to dry A Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the steering wheel Cleaners containing sol vents will make the surface porous and vehi cle occupants could suffer serious injuries from plastic parts coming loose in the event of air bag deployment Warning T Do not use oil wax or scouring agents on these parts Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the surface Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface Hard plastic trim items gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care a soft lint free cloth and apply with light pressure T Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the surface Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface Operation Steering wheel gt Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor oughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Carpets gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Carpet and Fabric Care for cleaning the car pets Headliner gt Usea soft bristle brush or a dry shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt Vehicle care Seat belts gt Only use clear lukewarm water and soap T T
339. h beam The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch C High beam 2 High beam flasher gt Push the combination switch in direction of arrow Q The high beam headlamp indicator lamp E in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 26 For more information on headlamps see Lighting gt page 143 Getting started Driving Turn signals The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch C Turn signals right 2 Turn signals left gt Press the combination switch in direction of arrow or The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp EJ or EEJ in the instrument cluster flashes gt page 26 The combination switch resets automati cally after major steering wheel move ment p To signal minor directional changes such as changing lanes press combination switch only to point of resistance and release The corre sponding turn signal will flash three times Windshield wipers The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 Single wipe Wiping with windshield washer fluid 2 Switching on windshield wipers gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 i Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and or damage the wiper blades when wiping
340. hanced off road package In the following situations you should switch to LOW RANGE mode e during off road driving gt page 355 e when crossing water gt page 360 e when towing up or down on steep gradients With the LOW RANGE selected the engine s power delivery and the shifting behavior of the automatic transmission are adjusted Furthermore the ABS ESP and 4 ETS functions especially adapted to off road travel are activated For information on driving safety systems during LOW RANGE mode see Driving safety systems gt page 101 For more information on Off road driving see Off road driving gt page 355 Transfer case Gear Ranges There are two possible settings Road position for all normal driving situations LOW RANGE mode off Off road position for traveling on rough terrain LOW RANGE mode on Also use the off road position when driving on road on steep gradients especially when towing a trailer LOW RANGE acts by raising the engine s gear ratio The ve hicle travels at roughly third the speed compared to when in the HIGH RANGE position leading to an increase in the engine s drive power Controls in detail Transfer case Warning A N Always wait until the procedure of shifting from HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE and from LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE has been entirely completed During this proce dure do not e switch off the engine e shift the aut
341. hat could cause serious or fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the Getting started wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and belts are properly positioned on the body Warning A N Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt gt page 53 Observe the following points e Adjust the backrest until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steer ing wheel e Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator brake pedal safely The po sition should be as far back as possible with the driver still able to operate the controls properly e Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level Adjusting e Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is be ing adjusted Failure to do so could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the power seats can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or w
342. he displayed values Metallic or magnetic objects in or on the vehicle can influence the accuracy of the compass To make sure the display is correct the compass must be set to the proper geo graphic zone gt page 178 It may also be necessary to calibrate the compass gt page 179 if the compass is not calibrated or its function is impaired by outside influences the message Compass appears in the multifunction display Infrared reflecting windshield 1 Infrared transparent areas Infrared reflecting glass reduces the amount of radiated heat entering the vehi cle interior through the windows The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the transmission of signals through the glass by in vehicle electronic devices e g electronic toll collection devices To allow the use of these devices in the vehicle three infrared transparent areas 1 are placed in the windshield Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km In the Operation section you will find detailed information on operating main taining and caring for your vehicle The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break in period the more satis fied you will be with its performance later on e Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 mi
343. he ABS may still be operational In addition the yellow ESP warning lamp comes on The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning In addition the yellow ESP warning lamp comes on The ESP is deactivated because of a malfunction or interrupted power Supply What to do if Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Continue driving with added caution gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Continue driving with added caution gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Display message ESR Unavailable See Operator s Manual Possible cause consequence The ESP was deactivated because of insufficient power supply The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP available If the yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while driving and this message appears the 4 ETS has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes
344. he Distronic system sensor gt Restart the engine after cleaning sen i Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor cover sor cover 1 covers Applying strong pressure may damage the sensor covers Cleaning the Parktronic system Follow the instructions provided by the power sensors washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer T To prevent scratches never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the sensors Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge 1 Distronic system sensor cover gt Switch off the ignition gt page 42 P54 65 3034 31 gt Usea mild carwash detergent suchas Parktronic system sensors in front Mercedes Benz approved Car Sham bumper poo with plenty of water and a non scratching cloth to clean sensor gt Usea mild car wash detergent such as cover 1 Mercedes Benz approved Car Sham poo with plenty of water and a soft T To prevent scratches or damage never non scratching cloth to clean apply strong force and only use a soft sensors 1 on the bumpers non scratchy cloth when cleaning the sensor cover 1 Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge Cleaning the Rear View Camera lens P54 00 2515 31 1 Camera lens gt Only use clean water and a soft non scratching cloth to clean the camera lens Q Be careful not to apply wax t
345. he brake system is still func authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck tional but without the EBP the Center as soon as possible a ABS and the ESP available Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution USA only Check There is insufficient brake fluid Risk of accident Stop the vehicle in a OW Canada only Bite ai Wiha eve in the reservoir a location or as soon at is safe to do Apply the parking brake gt page 67 Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem BE if you find that the brake fluid in the brake Warning A N fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or belo have the brake system checked for brake Driving with the message Check Brake pad thickness and leaks Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You could be seriously burned Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Coolant Level Stop car switch engine off Possible cause consequence Possible solution The coolant is too hot Among other possible c
346. he center console 1 Switch for off road driving program 2 Indicator lamp Switching Off road driving program on gt Press switch 4 gt page 278 Indicator lamp 2 comes on The symbol appears in the lower multifunction display Switching Off road driving program off gt Press switch Q again Indicator lamp 2 goes out The symbol disappears Air suspension program Your vehicle is factory equipped with vehicle level control which regulates the ride height of the vehicle The Adaptive Damping System ADS optimizes your vehicle s suspension tuning e Suspension tuning Adaptive Damping System ADS gt page 278 e Vehicle level control gt page 279 Adaptive Damping System ADS The fine tuning of the damping and suspen sion is dependent on e your driving style e road surface conditions e your personal ADS settings e your personal vehicle level settings The ADS switch is located on the upper part of the center console Vehicles without enhanced off road package Vehicles with enhanced off road package 1 ADS switch 2 Indicator lamp for SPORT setting 3 Indicator lamp for COMF setting Controls in detail The following settings are available AUTO for normal driving situations Indicator lamps 2 and 3 are off SPORT for sporty driving Indicator lamp 2 comes on With the ADS SPORT setting the vehi cle is lowered approximately 0 6 in
347. he cruise contro will resume the last set speed Setting a higher speed A If you increase the set vehicle speed keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed Warning Increase the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit Otherwise sudden and unexpected acceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and or serious in jury to you and others You can increase the speed in two ways Adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments Q The set value is increased in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments each time you lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance point gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 gt page 256 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle speed increases in incre ments of 1 mph Canada 1km h Adjustment in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments 0 The set value is increased in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments each time you lift the cruise control lever past the resistance point gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 gt page 256 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle speed increases in incre ments of 5 mph Canada 10 km h i The new speed is set and the vehicle will accelerate Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the ve
348. he driver s door then can be closed again gt Remove the fuse for the tilt sliding sunroof from the fuse box gt page 543 ae For information on which fuse box contains the fuse for the power tilt sliding sunroof see the fuse chart provided with the vehicle tool kit gt page 490 Vv Reinsert the fuse in the main box Switch on the ignition gt page 42 Press and hold the sunroof switch in the direction of arrow 8 gt page 252 until the tilt sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear Hold the sunroof switch in the direction of arrow 3 for approximately 1 second Open the tilt sliding sunroof using the Express open feature gt page 253 If the tilt sliding sunroof opens completely it is synchronized If the tilt sliding sunroof does not open completely gt Repeat the above steps Y Driving systems The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages e Cruise control gt page 255 and Distronic gt page 260 with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed e Distance warning function gt page 272 is only available with Distronic which warns of stationary obstacle or slower moving vehicles that you are closing in on too quickly e Downhill Speed Regulation DSR gt page 273 which supports you when you are driving downhill e Off road driving program gt page 277 vehicles without enhanced off road package which supports you
349. he power folding exterior rear view mirrors gt page 209 Practical hints Charging the battery If the battery is discharged the battery can be charged using the jump start contacts located in the engine compartment gt page 537 A Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit approved by Mercedes Benz is being used Gases may escape during charg ing and cause explosions that may result in paint damage corrosion or personal injury Warning An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz is available permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for information and availability Charge battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger Battery gt Charge the battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Large 12 volt storage batteries contain lead Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Practical hints Jump starting A Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components and can lead to a battery explosion and
350. he seat belts must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 176 F 80 C or in direct sunlight Warning A N Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Operation Vehicle care Upholstery Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring e g when wet etc may cause the upholstery to become permanently dis colored By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover contact discoloration will be prevented AN Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent Warning e deployment of the front side impact air bags e deployment of the rear side impact air bags e activation of the active head restraints Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for availability Leather upholstery Please not that leather upholstery is a natural product and is therefore subject to a natural aging process Leather upholstery may also react to certain ambient influences such as high humidity or high temperature by showing wrinkles for example gt Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care T To avoid damage
351. he starter switch or press the start stop button vehicles with KEYLESS GO e Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock vehicle when leaving Parking and locking Parking brake Warning VAN Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock up You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident In addition the vehi cle s brake lights do not light up when the parking brake is engaged Getting started Parking and locking gt Step firmly on parking brake pedal Q Turning off the engine When the engine is running the warning lamp USA only or Canada only in the instrument cluster comes on A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake and or shift the automatic transmission out of position P either of which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning Warning A N Getting out of your vehicle with the automatic transmission not fully engaged in position P is dangerous Also when parked on an incline position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to positi
352. he vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury i The memory function gt page 141 lets you Store the settings for the steering wheel together with the settings for seat positions and the exterior rear view mirrors Make sure that e you can reach the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent at the elbows e you can move your legs freely e all displays including malfunction and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster are clearly visible The steering wheel adjustment stalk is located on the lower left of the steering column Getting started 1 Adjusting steering wheel in or out 2 Adjusting steering wheel up or down Adjusting steering column in or out gt Move stalk forward or back in direction of arrow Q Adjusting steering column up or down gt Move stalk up or down in direction of arrow 2 Adjusting Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic condi tions Interior rear view mirror gt Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 208 Exterior rear view mirrors Warning A N Exercise care when using the passenger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider
353. heating switches off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or on vehicles with KEYLESS GO when you switch off the ignition gt page 41 and open the driver s door For information on the steering wheel see Multifunction steering wheel gt page 30 Controls in detail Useful features Telephone Warning A N Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or serious personal injury Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes Benz Please contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for information on the installation of an ap proved external antenna Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regard ing use of an external antenna Warning A N Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to
354. heel bolt for Minispare wheel locat an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck lightly ed in vehicle tool kit gt page 490 Center or call Roadside Assistance ceed gt Unscrew the alignment bolt install last T Wheel bolts must be used when mount Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight wheel bolt and tighten slightly ing the Minispare wheel The use of any wheel ened wheel oote can cause the wiee e bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Minispare come off This could cause an accident wheel will damage the vehicle s brakes Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts Warning A N gt Clean contact surfaces of wheel and Only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel wheel hub eee bolts Other wheel bolts may come loose Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack Practical hints Flat tire Lowering the vehicle gt Vehicles with scissors type jack Attach ratchet to vehicle jack in sucha way that the word DOWN can be seen gt Lower the vehicle until its resting fully on its own weight gt Vehicles with screw type jack Turn crank counterclockwise gt Vehicles with scissors type jack Turn ratchet in Direction of DOWN gt Remove the jack P40 10 4290 31 1 G Wheel bolts gt Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly fol lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat ed 1 to 5 until all bolts are tight Observe a tightening to
355. hen clos ing the tailgate Be especially careful when small children are around To stop the clos i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked the tailgate will lock automatically after closing it The turn signals will flash three times to confirm locking Closing the tailgate and locking the vehicle from the outside vehicles with l i KEYLESS GO Q KEYLESS GO locking closing switch 8 Procedure do one of the following e Press tailgate closing switch gt page 126 e Press KEYLESS GO locking closing The tailgate closes automatically Once switch gt page 127 the tailgate is closed the vehicle locks if doors are closed The turn signals In vehicles with power tailgate and gt Press KEYLESS GO locking closing KEYLESS GO you can close the tailgate switch Q briefly and lock the vehicle simultaneously from the outside using the KEYLESS GO locking closing switch e Press the button on the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 115 If the tailgate comes into contact with an flash three times to confirm locking object while closing e g luggage that has The locking knobs in the doors move Pe OEO aes ae Use Wea been piled too high the closing procedure down The anti theft alarm system is Oa tE eee cool pae aa is stopped and the tailgate reopens armed gt Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you Controls in detail b gt Locking and unlocking Even with the
356. hen parked on an incline turn the front wheels towards the road curb Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Controls in detail Automatic transmission Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could shift the automatic transmission out of park position P which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Driving tips Accelerator position Your driving style influences the transmission s shifting behavior Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting Controls in detail Automatic transmission Kickdown Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration gt Press the accelerator past the point of resistance Depending on the engine speed the transmission shifts into a lower gear gt Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed The transmission shifts up again Stopping When you stop briefly e g at traffic lights gt Leave the transmission in gear gt Hold the vehicle with the brake When you stop for a longer period of time with the engine idling and o
357. hicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars As with other vehicles of this type if you make sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash Utility vehicles have a signifi cantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Operator s Manual Take time to become familiar with the driving characteristics of this vehicle Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control When driving off road or working the vehicle hard do not overload it And always wear your seat belts at all times In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Y Where to find it This Operator s Manual is designed to pro vide comprehensive support information for you the vehicle operator Each section has its own reference color At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the drivers seat E Getting started Here you will find all the information you need for your firs
358. hicle has reached the set speed Setting a lower speed A If you decrease the set vehicle speed keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed Warning Decelerate the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit Otherwise sudden and unexpected deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and or serious in jury to you and others Controls in detail You can reduce the speed in two ways When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently Adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments g The set value is decreased in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments each time you press the cruise control lever down to the resis tance point gt Briefly press the cruise control lever down to the resistance point in direc tion of arrow 2 gt page 256 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle speed decreases in incre ments of 1 mph Canada 1 km h Driving systems Adjustment in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments ap The set value is decreased in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments each time you press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point gt Briefly press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point in direc tion of arrow 2 gt page 256
359. hield BB 7o clean the window interior do not use a dry cloth abrasives solvents or cleaners con taining solvents Do not touch the inside of the front rear or side windows and the power tilt sliding sunroof or rear panorama roof with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring Doing so may damage the windows Light alloy wheels If possible clean wheels once a week gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water for cleaning the light al loy wheels BE Only use acid free cleaning materials Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat BE The vehicle should not be parked for an ex tended period of time immediately after it has been cleaned especially not after the wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads Non approved wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel paint if the car is not driven after cleaning Therefore the vehicle s brake system should always be warmea up before it is parked after cleaning To do so please drive your vehicle for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry When applying Mercedes Benz approved Tire Care and Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care products take care not to spray them on the brake disks Plastic and rubber parts gt Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution gt Wipe wit
360. ible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when closing the tailgate Be especially careful when small children are around Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury i To prevent an inadvertent lockout do not place the SmartKey in the cargo compartment Vehicles with KEYLESS GO To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Is recognized inside the vehicle Controls in detail 1 Handle gt Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on handle 1 gt Close tailgate with hands placed flat on it Once the tailgate touches the latch the tailgate will pull itself shut automatical ly i Ifthe vehicle was previously centrally locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO the tailgate will lock automatically after closing it The turn signals flash three times to confirm locking Locking and unlocking Power tailgate In vehicles with power tailgate you can e open and close the tailgate from the inside and the outside electrically e limit the opening height of the tailgate e interrupt the opening cl
361. ic switch comes on gt or Switch off the ignition gt page 42 Clean the Parktronic system sensors gt page 430 Switch on the ignition gt page 42 Check the Parktronic system operation at another location to rule out interfer ence from outside radio or ultrasonic signals Controls in detail Driving systems Rear view camera Warning A N The rear view camera is only an aid and may display obstacles from a distorted perspec tive or inaccurately or may not display ob stacles at all The rear view camera does not relieve you of the responsibility to be cau tious take care and pay careful attention The rear view camera may not show objects which are e very close to the rear bumper e under the rear bumper e above the tailgate handle You are responsible for safety at all times and must continue to pay attention to the immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering This includes the area behind in front of and beside the vehicle Otherwise you could endanger yourself or others Warning Make sure that no persons or animals are in or near the area in which you are parking maneuvering Otherwise they could be injured Warning A N The rear view camera either will not function or will not function to its full capability if e the tailgate is open e itis raining very hard snowing or foggy e itis night or you are parking maneuver ing your vehicle in an area where it is very
362. ic transmission will down shift automatically Canceling cruise control There are several ways to cancel the cruise control gt Step on the brake pedal The cruise control is canceled The last speed set is stored for later use or gt Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow gt page 256 The cruise control is canceled The last speed set is stored for later use ap The last stored set speed is deleted when the engine is turned off Controls in detail Driving systems The cruise control switches off automatically when e you step on the brake pedal e you depress the parking brake pedal The cruise control switches off automatically and an acoustic warning will sound when e the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 30 km h e the ESP is in operation e the ESP is switched off with the ESP switch gt page 105 e the ESP has switched off due to a malfunction gt page 441 e you set the automatic transmission to N while driving Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear T Setting the automatic transmission to N while driving cancels the cruise control However the automatic transmission should not be set to N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the cruise control After a brief accel eration e g for passing t
363. il Driving systems Lane changing P54 70 2207 31 Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes There will be insufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Narrow vehicles Ne ee ee LS meth P54 70 2208 31 Because of their narrow profile the vehi cles traveling near the outer edges of the lane have not yet been detected by Distronic There will be insufficient distance to the vehicles ahead Distance warning function Canada only When Distronic is deactivated this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower vehicle moving in your vehicle s path and the danger of a collision exists e The distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on e An intermittent warning will sound if necessary If these warnings are issued you must brake manually to maintain a safe distance and avoid a collision with the preceding vehicle When pressing the brake pedal the warn ing sound ceases The warning sound will also cease when the distance to the preceding vehicle is sufficient again with out applying the brakes In this case the distance warning lamp will also go out Warning A N If the distance warning lamp in the in strument cluster comes on while driving and or an intermittent warning sounds immediate attention on the part of the driver is required As required by the traffic situation apply the brakes and navigate
364. ilable at any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressure is located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 550 Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure infor mation for driving at high speeds gt page 394 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition gt page 394 If such information is provided it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap Technical data Rims and tires The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires Follow tire manufacturer s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle 0 The following pages also list the approved wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicles with winter tires Winter tires are not available as standard or optional factory equip ment but can be purchased from an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Depending on vehicle model and the standard or optional factory equipped wheel rim tire configuration on your vehicle Appearance Package etc equipping your vehicle with win ter tires approved for your vehicle model may also require the purchase of two or four wheel rims of the recommended size for use with these winter tires See an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for more information Technical data Rims and tires Same size tires Model GL 320 CDI GL 320
365. ilable with Mercedes Benz approved mobile phones Please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for information on features available for your mobile phone of choice The contact plate for the mobile phone cradle is located in the front center arm rest gt Openstorage telephone compartment gt page 317 1 Cover for contact plate gt Pull cover for contact plate in direction of arrow You can now access the contact plate Controls in detail Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone cradle Once the mobile phone has been inserted in the mobile phone cradle you have to use the hands free device to respond dur ing phone calls T Do not try to remove the mobile phone along with the cradle You could otherwise damage the mobile phone cradle gt If applicable remove the cover for the external antenna connection from the back of the mobile phone and store it in a safe place Be sure to comply with the mobile phone s operating instructions as well Useful features PB2 70 5734 31 Example illustration 1 Insert the mobile phone 2 Connector contact 3 Mobile phone cradle gt Slide the lower end of the mobile phone into connector contact 2 on cradle 8 gt Push the top of the mobile phone in di rection of arrow Q until the lug on the mobile phone release button engages The mobile phone is connected to the network via the external antenna gt gt
366. iles approximately 29 000 km on the odometer of the vehicle whichever occurs first a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following oc curs introduction 1 the same substantial defect or mal function results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven that de fect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes Benz USA LLC in writing of the need for its repair 2 the same substantial defect or mal function of a less serious nature than category 1 has been subject to repair four or more times and you have direct ly notified us in writing of the need for its repair or Operator s Manual 3 the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different sub stantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days Written notification should not be sent to a dealer it should be addressed to Mercedes Benz USA LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 Introduction Operator s Manual Maintenance The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for service The se
367. ilgate e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch The interior lamps go out following an adjustable time delay gt page 177 a If a door remains open the interior lamps switch off automatically after approximately 5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed or in starter switch position 0 Manual control a An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically Switching front rear interior lighting on and off gt Press front rear interior lighting switch or 2 to switch on the respective interior light gt Press front rear interior lighting switch or 2 again to switch off the respective interior light Switching front reading lamps on and off gt Press front reading lamp switch 1 or to switch on the respective front reading lamp gt Press front reading lamp switch 1 or G again to switch off the respective front reading lamp Switching second row reading lamps on and off The second row reading lamps are located above the side windows Passenger side reading lamp 1 Second row reading lamp gt Press on reading lamp Q where indi cated by arrow The reading lamp comes on gt Press on reading lamp Q once more The reading lamp goes out Controls in detail Door entry lamps For better orientation in the dark the corresponding door entry lamps comes on when you open a door and the automatic control is activated The door entry lamps will
368. ill function in the same way as standard cruise control gt page 255 Warning A N Distronic is a convenience system Its speed adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary It is not however intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care The responsibili ty for the vehicle s speed distance to the preceding vehicle and most importantly brake operation to ensure a safe stopping distance always remains with the driver Distronic cannot take road and traffic condi tions into account Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by Distronic This could result in wrong or missing distance warnings Warning A N Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement It does not react to pedestrians or on station ary objects nor does it recognize or predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20 of the vehicle s braking power It is the driver s responsibility at all times to be attentive to the road weather and traffic conditions Additionally the driver must provide the steering braking and other driving inputs necessary to remain in control of the vehicle High frequency sources such as toll stations speed measuring systems etc can cause the Distronic system to malfunction Controls in detail Warning D
369. illuminated indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12 month old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual such as a young teenager or a small adult the indicator lamp will illu minate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat remain illuminated or go out With the indicator lamp illuminated the front passenger front air bag is deacti vated With the indicator lamp out the front passenger front air bag is activated When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual the indicator lamp will illumi nate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then go out indicating that the front passenger front air bag is activated If the indicator lamp is illu minated the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed If the indicator lamp is not illuminated the front passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed e inthe event of certain frontal impacts e if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold e independently of the side impact air bags If the front passenger front air bag is de ployed the rate of inflation will be i
370. in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise If you sell your Mercedes please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it avail able to the next operator If you bought this vehicle used be sure to send in the Notice of Purchase of Used Truck found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet or call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in for eign countries please be aware that e service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available e unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be avail able the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts e gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating and improper fuel can cause engine damage Introduction Operator s Manual Introduction Operator s Manual Warning A This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on road and off road use It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional 2 wheel drive passenger cars are not intended This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which may occur on streets highways and off road use This ve
371. indicator lamp on button Big goes out temperature as fast as possible Controls in detail Climate control Adjusting air volume Five blower speeds are available gt Press button to decrease or button to increase air volume gt page 216 to the desired level The indicator lamp on button Big gt page 216 goes out The automatic operation of air volume switches off The selected blower speed is shown in the air volume display 1 gt page 216 Adjusting air volume for the center and side air vents Opening the center air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 214 to the right The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are open Closing the center air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 214 to the left The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are closed Opening the side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 3 and 1 gt page 214 to the right The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are open Closing the side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 3 and 11 gt page 214 to the left The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are closed Air vents in the roof liner over the second row seats C Thumbwheel for air volume control 2 Air vent adjustable Adjusting air volume gt Turn thumbwheel 1 down to decrease the air volume or gt Turn thumbwheel 1 up to increase the air
372. indshield washer fluid Washer reservoir level 569 Washing the vehicle 425 Wear pattern Tires 419 Weights Vehicle 561 Wheel Bolts 492 Change 520 Removing 524 Spare 495 520 Tightening torque 526 Wheel Tires and 384 Wheels Sizes 556 Window curtain airbags 80 Windows see Power windows Windows cleaning 431 Windshield Cleaning 431 Cleaning wiper blades 431 Cleaning Windshield washer fluid 64 Defogging 222 237 Infrared reflecting 344 Washer fluid 383 563 569 Windshield washer fluid Messages in the multifunction display 483 Mixing ratio 569 Refilling 383 Reservoir level 383 Wiping with 64 Windshield washer system 383 569 Windshield wipers 62 Cleaning wiper blades 431 Fast continuous wiping 63 Fast intermittent wiping 63 Rear window wiper washer 64 Replacing wiper blades 516 Slow continuous wiping 63 Slow intermittent wiping 63 Winter driving 420 Snow chains 421 Tires 420 Winter driving instructions 353 Winter tires 420 Wood trims cleaning 434 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly For expert advice and quality service contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for
373. ing the Programming portion steps 1 through 6 of this text A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier Step 8 gt Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand Depending on manufacturer the training button may also be referred to as learn or smart button If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button refer to the garage door opener Operator s Manual Step 9 gt Press the training button on the ga rage door opener motor head unit The training light is activated You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow ing two steps Step 10 gt Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for 2 seconds and release the pro grammed signal transmitter button or Step 11 gt Press hold for 2 seconds and release same signal transmitter button a sec ond time to complete the training pro cess a Some garage door openers or other rolling code equipped devices may require you to press hold for 2 seconds and release the same signal transmitter button a third time to complete the training process Controls in detail Useful features Step 12 gt Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed signal trans mitter button or Step 13 gt To program the remaining two signal tr
374. ints Replacing wiper blades Removing gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 gt page 44 i Do not pull on the wiper blade insert It could tear gt Fold wiper arm Q away from the rear window until it engages 1 Wiper arm 2 Wiper blade gt Turn wiper blade 2 to form a right gt Hold wiper arm and engage wiper angle with wiper arm 4 as shown blade 2 by pushing it in direction of gt Hold wiper arm and disengage wip arrow until it locks into place er blade 2 by carefully sliding it in gt Check whether the wiper blade is direction of arrow securely fastened Remove wiper blade 2 gt Fold the wiper arm to rest on the rear window Installing Make sure to hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back 1 Wiper arm 2 Wiper blade gt Insert wiper blade 2 into wiper arm 1 Practical hints V Flat tire Preparing the vehicle A The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted Adapt your driving style accord ingly The Minispare wheel is for temporary use only When driving with a Minispare wheel mounted ensure proper tire pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h Warning gt Make
375. ion and to wear their respective seat belt For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the seat backrest Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is properly positioned on your body gt page 53 Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag Occupants who are unbelted out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye e Sit properly belted in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest Adjust the driver s seat as far as possi ble rearward still permitting proper op eration of vehicle controls The distance from the center of the driver s breast bone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches 25 cm or more You should be able to accomplish this by a combina tion of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel If you have any problems please see an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim Placing hands and arms in side the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand arm injury when driver s front air bag infl
376. ion must be checked periodically by performing a battery conductance test Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery condition test ing intervals As with any other battery the battery may dis charge if the vehicle is not operated for an ex tended period of time You can connect a battery maintenance charge unit tested and approved for use on your vehicle model or disconnect the battery to prevent battery discharge Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for more information Practical hints T The factory equipped VRLA battery is leak proofed Only use a battery as replacement that has the same security features and is of identical size voltage and capacity as the factory equipped battery The battery the battery ventilation hose page 534 and the lateral plug page 534 must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation Warning Jump starting must only be done using the jump start contacts located in the engine compartment gt page 536 Battery A Failure to follow these instructions can re sult in severe injury or death Warning Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries gt page 528 Never lean over batteries while connecting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with
377. ir conditioning is switched off gt page 240 Increasing the temperature gt Turn temperature control G gt page 242 slightly clockwise The rear automatic climate control will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature for the rear passenger compartment Decreasing the temperature gt Turn temperature control 3 gt page 242 slightly counterclock wise The rear automatic climate control will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature for the rear passenger compartment Adjusting air volume Adjusting manually Five blower speeds are available gt Press button to decrease or button to increase air volume to the desired level The indicator lamp on the button Mg goes out The selected blower speed is shown by the indicator lamps for air volume settings 9 gt page 242 Adjusting automatically gt Press button EUR The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air volume is adjusted automatically Air vents in the roof liner over the second row seats C Thumbwheel for air volume control 2 Air vent adjustable Adjusting air volume gt Turnthumbwheel 1 down to decrease the air volume or gt Turnthumbwheel 1 up to increase the air volume Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Adjusting air distribution Adjusting air volume gt Move air vent slider 2 to the left right up or down to direct the air in the de sire
378. irmly press the active head restraint cushion backward towards the head restraint cover in direction of arrow until it engages gt Repeat this procedure on the active head restraint for the second front seat gt After resetting the active head restraints store reset tool 4 in the Mercedes Benz vehicle literature pouch For information on active head restraints see Active head restraint gt page 90 For information on head restraint adjust ment see Seats gt page 45 Practical hints Resetting activated head restraints Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey or the L When inserting the batteries make sure SmartKey with KEYLESS G are dis they are clean and free of lint charged the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center a When replacing batteries always replace both batteries The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Replacement batteries Lithium type Warning l 6 A CR 2025 or equivalent a nea P80 35 2283 31 Keep the batteries out of reach of children gt Remove mechanical key Q from the 1 Mechanical key K tK ith SmartKey or SmartKey wi Battery compartment If a battery is swallowed seek medical help KEYLESS GO gt page 496 immediately gt Ins
379. irty conditions clean the brake discs wheels brake pads and check and clean axle joints e Conduct a brake test Trailer towing A Failure to use proper equipment and driving technique can result in a loss of vehicle con trol when towing a trailer Warning Improper towing or failure to follow the in structions in this manual can result in vehi cle damage and or serious personal injury Follow the guidelines below carefully to as sure safe trailer operation Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center should you require an explana tion of information contained in this manual Trailer hitch Only install a trailer hitch receiver ap proved for your vehicle For information on availability and in stallation contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center The bumpers on your vehicle are not designed for use with clamp type hitch es Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to them To reduce the possibility of damage re move the hitch ball adaptor from the receiver when not in use Electrical connections The vehicle is prewired to accept the seven wire harness included in the Mercedes Benz approved trailer hitch receiver kit i A four pole conversion plug is available from your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as a spare part For further information contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Vehicle and trailer weights an
380. is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking The heat generated serves to dry the brakes If your brake system is normally only sub jected to moderate loads you should occa sionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above normal braking pressure at higher speeds This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads Warning A N Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System BAS gt page 103 Operation Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir The brake fluid level in the reservoir may be too low if the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and an acoustic warning sounds although the parking brake is released gt page 437 Observe additional messages in the multi function display that may appear gt page 469 Have the brake system inspected immediately Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes Benz Driving instructions A If other than recommended brake pads are installed or other than recommended brake fluid is used the braking properties of the vehicle c
381. is on the current setting Compass Setting Zone gt Press button or E to set th respective compass zone For information on how to call up the compass see Compass gt page 344 Controls in detail Compass calibration a Make sure you are in area where you can drive a full circle with your vehicle without dis turbing traffic in order to calibrate the compass This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module In order to calibrate the compass properly mind the following e Calibrate the compass in open terrain Nearby buildings bridges power lines and large antenna masts for example could impair compass calibration e Switch off electrical consumers e g climate control windshield wipers or rear window defroster e Close all doors and the tailgate Start the engine gt page 56 gt Press button or E to move the selection marker to the Vehicle submenu Control system Press button JA or Ref repeatedly until the message Compass Calibration appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on setting Switched Off Compass Calibration Start OFF f Press button to set the selection marker to Start The following message appears in the multifunction display Compass Calibration Active Please drive in a full circle gt D Controls in detail Control system gt gt gt Drive a full circl
382. is set to P gt page 191 gt Set the parking brake for the vehicle gt page 67 Start the engine gt page 56 gt Close all doors and the tailgate Set the parking brake for the trailer Warning A N As soon as you disconnect the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle the vehicle will lower To help avoid personal injury make sure no one is near the wheel housing or underneath the vehicle before the electrical connection is discon nected Make sure the automatic transmission Driving instructions When you uncouple the trailer the vehicle is temporarily raised because the springs are relieved of load Be especially careful during this process as you could otherwise injure yourself and or others Make sure that any persons remaining in the vehicle do not press the switches for vehicle level control or the ADS Disconnect all electrical plug connec tors Uncouple the trailer Make sure that the trailer coupling is free of load Turn off the engine gt page 68 Operation Driving instructions Passenger compartment Warning A N Always fasten items being carried as secure ly as possible In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle The rear cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objec
383. istance warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound Possible cause conse quence A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky Vehicles with diesel engine Your fuel tank is empty You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle ahead of you The Distronic has recognized a stationary obstacle on your probable line of travel Suggested solution gt Check the fuel cap gt page 374 If it is not closed properly gt Close the fuel cap If it is closed properly gt Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt After refueling start turn off and restart the engine three or four times in succession The limp home mode is canceled You do not need to have your vehicle checked gt Apply the brakes immediately gt Carefully observe the traffic situation You may need to brake or maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle Problem The yellow ESP warning lamp comes on while the engine is running The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while driving Practical hints Possible cause consequence The ESP has been switched off with the ESP switch or has switched off due to a malfunction Risk of accident Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road weather and traffic conditions The ESP or the 4 ETS has come into operation because
384. istronic requires familiarity with its opera tional characteristics We strongly recom mend that you review the following information carefully before operating the system Warning A N Distronic cannot take road and traffic condi tions into account Only use Distronic if the road weather and traffic conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed Warning A N Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip pery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control Driving systems Distronic does not act upon adverse sight and distance conditions Do not use Distronic during conditions of fog heavy rain snow or sleet Warning A N Distronic cannot take weather conditions into account Switch off Distronic or do not switch it on if e roads are slippery or covered with snow or ice The wheels could lose traction while braking or accelerating and the vehicle could skid e the sensor is dirty or visibility is diminished due to snow rain or fog for example The distance control system functionality could be impaired Always pay attention to surrounding traffic conditions even while Distronic is switched on Otherwise you may not be able to recog nize dangerous situations until it is too late This could cause an accident in which you and others could be injured Controls in detail Driving systems Warning A N The Resume function should only be operated if
385. itch Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Find the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO that belongs to the vehicle to operate the vehicle Replace the batteries gt page 502 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch gt page 42 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you when leaving the vehicle Display symbol 10 oe I Display message 3rd Brake Lamp Active Headlamps Inoperative AUTO Light Inoperative Brake Lamp Left Brake Lamp Right Practical hints Possible cause consequence The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning This message will only appear if a critical num ber of LEDs have stopped work ing The active Bi Xenon headlamp system is malfunctioning The light sensor is malfunction ing The headlamps switch on automatically The left brake lamp is malfunc tioning A substitute bulb is being used The right brake lamp is malfunc tioning A substitute bulb is being used What to do if Possible solution gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible To switch off the headlamps U S vehicles only gt Inthe control system set lamp operation to manual mode gt page 144 gt Switch off the headlamps
386. ith access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Getting started Adjusting Warning A N According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child For addi tional information see Children in the vehi cle gt page 91 A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Seat adjustment The seat adjustment switch is located on the entry side of each front seat base a 1 Head restraint height vehicles with memory function 2 Seat cushion tilt 3 Seat height 4 Backrest tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment i When moving the seats make sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats otherwise you could damage the seats T When the second row seats are folded forward e g for cargo compartment expansion page 304 the front se
387. ith automatic transmission in 1 switch on off road driving program gt page 278 or LOW RANGE mode gt page 201 When going down a long hill shift into a lower gear and use the engine s brak ing effect Avoid riding the brakes thus overheat ing the vehicle and trailer brakes If the engine coolant rises to an ex tremely high temperature coolant tem perature needle approaching the red zone when the air conditioning is on turn off the air conditioning system Engine coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows switching the climate control fan speed to high and setting the temperature control to the maximum hot position Extreme care must be exercised since your vehicle with a trailer will require additional passing distance ahead than when driving without a trailer Because your vehicle and trailer is longer than your vehicle alone you will also need to go much farther ahead of the passed vehicle before you can re turn to your lane Uncoupling the trailer Warning A N While you are coupling or decoupling a trail er make sure that you do not e lock or unlock e open or close a vehicle door or the tailgate The vehicle s level could change and you could endanger yourself and or others as a result Make sure that you do not operate the ADS button gt page 279 or the vehicle level control system gt page 279 when cou pling decoupling the trailer Operation
388. ition or when reaching the maintenance service threshold while driving e after approximately 30 seconds once the suggested maintenance service term has passed You can also clear it yourself 1 Reset button gt Press reset button Q on the instru ment cluster The maintenance service indicator message is cleared and the standard display appears in the multifunction display gt page 162 Operation Maintenance Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested main tenance service term you will see the fol lowing message in the multifunction display Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles Km Service A Exceeded By XXX Days Service A Exceeded By X Day In addition a signal sounds when the message appears Any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed mainte nance service Operation Maintenance Calling up the maintenance service indicator display You can call up the maintenance service in dicator display at any time to check when the next maintenance service is due gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 gt Press button or on the mul tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display appears in the multifunction display gt page 162 gt Press button Bg or FAM until the maintenance service indicator display with the service symbol and the service deadline appears in th
389. itters such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna Operation Catalytic converter gasoline engine Your Mercedes Benz is equipped with monolithic type catalytic converters an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis sions Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our rec ommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet T To prevent damage to the catalytic convert ers use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly Otherwise exces sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic con verter causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire Driving instructions Warning A N As with any vehicle do not idle park or op erate this vehicle in areas where combusti ble materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Oxidation catalyst diesel engine Your vehicle is equipped with an oxidation catalyst an important element in conjunc tion with the oxygen sensors to achieve sub
390. ixed windshield washer sol vent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures Warning A N Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ration For temperatures above freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and water e 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water 1 34 fl oz 40 ml MB SummerFit to 1 gal 4 0 I water For temperatures below freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and commercially avail able premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze e 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts solvent 1 34 fl oz 40 ml MB SummerFit to 1 gal 4 0 I solvent Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants A ABS 101 Indicator lamp 436 Off road ABS 102 ABS ESP Messages in the multifunction display 451 Accelerator position automatic transmission 195 Accessory weight 415 Accident 66 Active head restraint 90 133 499 Adaptive Damping System ADS 278 Air bags 76 Children 77 91 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 31 32 85 Front Driver 79 Front Passenger 79 Occupant Classification System OCS 81 Safety guidelines 78 Side impact front and rear 80 Window curtain 80 Air conditioning refrigerant 564 Air conditioning sy
391. jackstands before working under the vehicle Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable objects before raising vehicle with jack Do not disengage parking brake while the vehi cle is raised Make sure that the ground on which the ve hicle is standing and where you place the jack is solid level and not slippery If neces sary use a large underlay On slippery sur faces such as tiled floors you should use a non slip underlay for example a rubber mat Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects to support the jack Otherwise the jack may not be able to achieve its load bearing ca pacity if it is not at its full height Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised Also observe the notes on the jack Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable objects One collapsible wheel chock is includ ed with the vehicle tool kit gt page 490 For information on set ting up the collapsible wheel chock see gt page 494 Warning AN Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on slight inclines declines Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you or others Practical hints Changing wheel on a level surface P40 00 2082 31 Changing rear wheel on passenger side Example illustration gt Place the wheel chock in front of and another sizeable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposi
392. justing Driving Parking and locking Getting started Unlocking The Getting started section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey overview of the vehicle s most basic func tions First time Mercedes Benz owners should pay special attention to the infor mation given here If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here the Controls in detail section will provide you with further information The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment P80 35 2281 31 SmartKey Lock button Unlock button for tailgate 3 Unlock button 4 Panic button gt page 100 Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury gt Press unlock button on the SmartKey All turn signal lamps flash once The vehicle unlocks The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed The locator light ing comes on if the feature is enabled in the control system gt page 176 gt Enter the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 112 Getting started Unlocking Unlocking with KEY
393. justment mechanism This could damage the belt Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts This could impair the effective ness of the belts Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas Gearshift pattern for automatic Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may fumes are entering the vehicle while driving transmission severely weaken them In a crash they may have the cause determined and corrected P Park position nore aaie to Prove Cela i Soc protecion immediately If you must drive under these R Reverse gear Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly conditions drive only with at least one win N Neutral stressed in an accident must be replaced dow fully open D Drive position Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light For more information on how to operate Truck Center the gear selector lever see Automatic transmission gt page 189 Starting with the SmartKey For information on turning off the engine with the SmartKey see Turning off the en gine gt page 68 Gasoline engine gt Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P gt page 155 Do not depress the accelerator Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 gt page 41 and hold until the engine starts ae You can also use the touch sta
394. ke and steer the ve hicle Warning A N After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through wa ter deep enough to wet brake components the first braking action may be somewhat re duced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking ef fect Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby significantly reducing their effec tiveness It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci dent be conducted on a two axle dynamometer If such tests are necessary contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty T Because the ESP operates automatically the engine and ignition must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 0 or 1 when testing the parking brake on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces particularly salted roads it
395. l damage radiator and supports To prevent damage during transport do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts Use the towing eyes Switch off the ESP gt page 105 and the automatic central locking page 128 ite Do not tow with one axle raised Doing so could damage the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty All wheels must be on or off the ground Observe instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground If circumstances do not permit the recom mended towing methods the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recom mended towing methods can be employed When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h Warning A If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground always tow with a tow bar if e the engine will not run e there is a malfunction in the brake system there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle s electrical system This is necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground make sure the automatic trans mission is in neutral position N A With the engine not running there is no power assistance for
396. l license plate lamp cover Q gt Retighten screws 2 Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important To check and readjust a head lamp follow the steps described gt Park the vehicle on a level surface 25 feet 7 6 m from a vertical test screen or wall gt Switch the headlamps on gt page 143 If the beam does not show a beam pattern as indicated in the figure left then follow the steps below gt Open hood gt page 378 P82 10 4200 31 Example illustration headlamp driver s side 2 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw 3 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw Practical hints Replacing bulbs gt Always turn adjustment screws 2 and 3 simultaneously for vertical ad justment until the headlamp is adjust ed as shown gt page 514 Turn clockwise for upward movement and counterclockwise for downward move ment Graduations screw 2 0 50 pitch screw 8 0 67 pitch The left and right headlamps must be ad justed individually i If it is not possible to obtain a proper head lamp adjustment have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Front wiper blades gt Fold the wiper arms forward until they i Never open the hood when the wiper arms A For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch vehi cles with KEYLESS GO Make sure the vehicle s
397. l locks speed of 19 mph 30 km h possible to manually lock the differential locks for driving on rough terrain manually engaged Ability to steer the ae Engaging differential locks vehicle is greatly reduced when the differen gt Start the engine gt page 42 tial locks are manually engaged increasing e for off road driving The center differential locks isin AUTO the risk of an accident e for driving through water mode The indicator lamp on the i a l p For safety reasons Ne locks are automati e when driving on deep snow and icy or adjustment ring Q above cally released at a vehicle speed above fouled surfaces symbol Mg is on 31 mph 50 km h Nevertheless you should only manually lock the differential if absolutely necessary because engaged locks will restrict the vehicle drive train while cornering and cause the vehicle to chatter This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident T The differential locks must not be engaged manually when towing the vehicle or spinning the wheels gt Start the engine gt page 42 To select the required locking mode rotate adjustment ring 2 to the desired position 3 or gt page 205 The indicator lamp on the adjustment ring Q at the respective symbol comes on OFF road Go NE J Example illustration Center differential is completely locked Controls in detail Differential locks BE if the differential l
398. l slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of loss of control Warning A N It is dangerous to shift the automatic trans mission out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal BE Shift the automatic transmission to position P or R only when the vehicle is stopped in order to avoid damaging the transmission T Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds Running a cold engine at high engine speeds may shorten the service life of the engine T Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear For more information see Driving instruc tions gt page 347 For information on off road driving see Off road driving gt page 355 Getting started Switching on headlamps Low beam headlamps The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel Exterior lamp switch 1 Off 2 Low beam headlamps on gt Switch on the ignition gt page 41 gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position ey The low beam headlamps come on Hig
399. l stop and reopen slightly Warning If the tilt sliding sunroof encounters an ob struction that blocks its path in a circum stance where you are closing the tilt sliding sunroof by moving the tilt sliding sunroof switch past the resistance point or by pressing and holding button on the SmartKey by pressing and holding the lock button vehicles with KEYLESS GO on the door handle the automatic reversal function will not operate The opening closing procedure of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halt ed by releasing the switch or if the switch was moved past the resistance point and re leased by moving the switch in any direc tion Controls in detail Power tilt sliding sunroof Synchronizing The tilt sliding sunroof must be synchronized e after the battery has been disconnected or discharged e after a malfunction e ifthe tilt sliding sunroof does not open smoothly i If the tilt sliding sunroof cannot be closed or synchronized contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or call Road side Assistance gt page 335 Controls in detail Power tilt sliding sunroof Switch off the ignition gt page 42 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Switch off the ignition gt page 43 gt Open the driver s door this puts the starter switch in position O same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch T
400. ld be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B Pillar or if available the tire inflation pressure label on the fuel filler flap If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or if available the tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires Practical hints As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illu minates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significant ly underinflated tire causes the tire too over heat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehi cle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driv er s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale What to do if USA only Your vehicle has
401. le 31 32 447 CHECK ENGINE 29 439 440 Differential locks 205 Distance warning lamp 263 Downhill Speed Regulation 274 Engine diagnostics 29 439 440 ESP 27 441 Fog lamps Front rear 143 Front passenger front air bag off 31 32 80 Fuel reserve 29 446 High beam headlamps 29 Instrument cluster 26 28 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 446 Off road driving program 278 Parktronic 290 Preglow indicator Diesel engine 29 Seat belt telltale 29 89 442 Seat belts 443 Seat heating 138 Seat ventilation 140 SRS 29 74 89 446 Turn signals 27 Vehicle level control Language Setting 172 LATCH type child seat anchors see Children in the vehicle Layout of poly V belt drive GL 320 CDI 552 Layout of poly V belt drive GL 450 GL 550 552 Leather upholstery Cleaning and care of 434 Lever for cruise control 255 License plate lamps 514 Messages in the multifunction display 479 Replacing bulbs 505 514 Light alloy wheels Cleaning 432 Light sensor Messages in the multifunction display 477 281 283 Lighter see Cigarette lighter Depending on vehicle configuration Lighting Exterior and interior 143 Limp Home Mode 200 439 440 Loading see Vehicle loading Locator lighting 146 176 Lock buttons KEYLESS GO Outside door handle 71 Locking the vehicle see Key Loss of keys Mechanical key 120 Loss of keys SmartKey 120 Loss of keys SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 120 Loss of Service and Warranty Informa
402. le speed of the tire Tires and wheels All season and winter tires Index Q Mis T M S Speed rating up to 100 mph 160 km h up to 118 mph 190 km h H M S 210 km h V M S upto 149 mph 240 km h l or M S for winter tires up to 130 mph Not all M S rated tires provide special winter performance Make sure the tires you use show M S and the mountain snowflake marking on the tire sidewall These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manu facturers Association RMA and the Rubber Association of Canada RAC and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions Operation Tires and wheels Load identification 0 For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration In addition to tire load rating special load identification Q may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designat ing the tire speed rating gt page 406 No specification given absence of any text like in above example indicates a standard load SL tire XL or Extra Load designates an extra load or reinforced tire Light Load designates a light load tire C D E designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure DOT Tire Identification Number TIN U S tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire ret
403. les 1500 km at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds e During this period avoid heavy loads full throttle driving and excessive engine speeds no more than 7 of maximum rpm in each gear e Shift gears in a timely manner e Avoid accelerating by kick down e Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever e Select gear ranges 3 2 or 1 gt page 197 only when driving at moderate speeds for hill driving After 1000 miles 1500 km you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum All of the above instructions as may apply to your vehicle type also apply when driv ing the first 1000 miles 1500 km after the engine the transfer case the center differential or the rear differential has been replaced Always obey applicable speed limits Y Driving instructions Drive sensibly save fuel Fuel consumption to a great extent depends on driving habits and operating conditions To save fuel you should e Keep tires at the recommended infla tion pressures e Remove unnecessary loads e Remove carriers when not in use e Remove the crossbars when not in use e Allow engine to warm up under low load use e Avoid frequent acceleration and decel eration e Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the Maintenance System Contact an
404. ll passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law A The temperature grade for this tire is estab lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underin flation or excessive loading either sepa rately or in combination can cause excessive heat build up and possible tire failure Warning Operation Tire ply material 1 Plies in sidewall 2 Plies under tread a For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread Tires and wheels Tire and loading terminology Accessory weight The combined weight in excess of those standard items which may be replaced of automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats radio and heater to the extent that these items are available as factory installed equipment whether installed or not Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa or bars Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width
405. lly gt Press button Bsa The indicator lamp on the button goes out i The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically e after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after 5 minutes if the air conditioning and air drying is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41 F 5 C A Never operate the windows and tilt sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing pro cedure Warning When using the air recirculation mode with convenience closing feature should the up ward movement of a window be blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms hands fingers etc the automatic reversal feature will not operate In case the procedure causes potential danger Vehicles with or without tilt sliding sun roof The closing of the windows can be im mediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch The closing of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the switch for the tilt slid ing sunroof in any direction b gt Controls in detail Climate control The closing of the windows and the tilt sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the button Convenience closing gt Press button G3 for approximately 2 seconds The windows and or tilt sliding sun roof will close You can release but
406. lock Q counterclockwise by 90 in direction of arrow gt Remove cover 2 Replacing bulbs P82 10 4197 31 1 Bulb socket 2 Clamp gt Press and hold clamps 2 gt Pull bulb socket outwards Practical hints Pa 10 4199 31 Bulb socket Q Backup lamp 2 Tail lamp brake lamp parking and standing lamp 3 Tail lamp brake lamp parking and standing lamp side marker lamp 4 Turn signal lamp Rear fog lamp driver s side only gt Depending on which bulb needs to be replaced turn the respective bulb G counterclockwise Replacing bulbs Pull the bulb out of the housing Insert the new bulb into the bulb sock et Turn the bulb in the bulb socket clock wise carefully Insert the bulb socket into the rear lamp Align bulb socket and press bulb sock et into rear lamp until it audibly engag es Make sure bulb socket is attached properly Close the respective cover in the cargo compartment Close the tailgate gt page 123 Practical hints Replacing bulbs License plate lamp Adjusting headlamp aim V PB2 10 3018 31 1 License plate lamp cover V Vertical centerline O H Headlamp mounting height measured gt Loosen screws 2 from the center gt Remove license plate lamp cover Q High beam adjustments simultaneously aim gt Replace the tubular bulb the low beam Vehicle should have a normal tailgate load gt Reinstal
407. locked p gt Pull the door handle once more to open the driver s door Locking the vehicle If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO lock the vehi cle carrying out the following steps gt Close the front passenger door the rear right door and the tailgate gt Open the driver s door and the rear left door gt Press the central locking switch on the driver s door gt page 128 The locking knobs of the front passen ger door and the rear doors move down If the vehicle battery is disconnected or drained gt Press down the locking knobs of the front passenger door and the rear doors manually Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency gt Exit the vehicle Close the driver s door Enter the vehicle through the rear left door gt Press down the locking knob of the driver s door T To prevent inadvertent lockout make sure to have the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you before proceeding with the next step The next step will lock the vehicle gt Exit the vehicle gt Close the rear left door The vehicle is locked This procedure does not arm the anti theft alarm system nor does it lock the fuel filler flap Fuel filler flap gt Open the tailgate gt page 122 The fuel filler flap release is located behind a cover in the right side trim panel of the cargo compartment acc Fa 5 i 2 Cover gt
408. lt sliding sunroof are completely the closing procedure closed gt Release button on the SmartKey e the door windows e Immediately pull on the same outside e the hinged quarter windows door handle and hold firmly The win E dows and the tilt sliding sunroof will or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to 8 open for as long as the door handle is interrupt the closing procedure held but the door is not opened Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Warning A N gt Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or Press and hold the lock button on an When closing the windows and the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO at the outside door handle gt paee 71 until tilt sliding sunroof make sure that there is driver s outside door handle the windows and the tilt sliding sun no danger of anyone being harmed by the gt page 249 roof are completely closed closing procedure j gp The SmartKey or SmartKey with gt Release the lock button on the outside If potential danger exists proceed as fol KEYLESS GO must be in close proxim door handle to interrupt the closing lows ity to the driver s outside door handle procedure e Release button to stop the closing procedure To open press and hold button gi To continue the closing procedure after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure press and hold button eg Y Power tilt sliding sunroof Opening and closing Warning A N When closing the tilt
409. ltifunction steering wheel or using the END button on the COMAND system Controls in detail Useful features BE if the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada or Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 in the USA or Customer Service at 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Remote door unlock In case you have locked your vehicle unin tentionally e g SmartKey inside vehicle and the reserve SmartKey is not handy gt Contact the Mercedes Benz Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada You will be asked to provide your pass word which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement gt Then return to your vehicle and pull the tailgate recessed handle for minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing The message Connecting Call ap pears in the multifunction display 337 Controls in detail Useful features As an alternative you may unlock the vehi cle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is avail able The SOS button will flash and the message Connecting Call will ap
410. lure to switch off the parking lamps when leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged battery Controls in detail Lighting Low beam headlamps gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position E With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS GO start stop button pressed once the following lamps will switch on e Tail and parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps With the SmartKey in starter switch position 2 or the KEYLESS GO start stop button pressed twice the following lamps will switch on addition ally e Low beam headlamps e High beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed for ward Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off au tomatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light e Low beam headlamps e Tail and parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps Warning A N If the exterior lamp switch is set to RI the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions To minimize risk to you and to others activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to when driving or when traffic and or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so In low ambient lighting conditions only switch from position WA to with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from EGY to will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may r
411. lways keep sufficient distance between un protected parts of the body and the air vents If necessary use the air distribution controls page 216 to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin Controls in detail Nearly all dust particles pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en ters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system Warning A N Severe conditions e g strong air pollution may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior and the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the A C mode is deactivated gt page 224 Climate control Warning A N Follow the recommended settings for heat ing and cooling given on the following pag es Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others i If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the in terior before driving off see Summer opening feature page 249 The climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind Shield free of snow and debris
412. m bulb halogen headlamp Paz 10 4193 31 1 High beam headlamp cover P82 10 4194 31 2 Bulb socket for high beam headlamp vvv iv Turn cover Q counterclockwise Remove cover 1 Turn bulb socket 2 counterclockwise Pull bulb socket 2 out of the headlamp housing Pull the high beam bulb out of bulb socket 2 Insert the new high beam bulb into bulb socket 2 Insert bulb socket into the headlamp housing Turn bulb socket 2 clockwise until it engages Place cover 1 on the opening in the headlamp housing Turn cover Q clockwise until it engag es Practical hints Turn signal lamp bulb PAZ 10 4195 31 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp gt gt Turn bulb socket Q counterclockwise Pull bulb socket Q out of the headlamp housing Pull the turn signal bulb out of bulb socket 1 Insert the new turn signal bulb into bulb socket 1 Insert bulb socket Q into the headlamp housing Turn bulb socket Q clockwise until it engages Replacing bulbs Parking and standing lamp bulb gt Turn bulb socket G gt page 507 counterclockwise Pull bulb socket 3 out of the headlamp housing Pull the bulb out of bulb socket Insert the new bulb into bulb socket Insert bulb socket into the headlamp housing Turn bulb socket clockwise until it engages Practical hints Replacing bulbs Side marker lamp bulb Front fog lamp
413. m switched on and route guidance activated the di rection of travel and maneuver instruc tions appear in the multifunction display Please refer to the COMAND system manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system Off road menu The Off road menu displays the messages for air suspension differential locks and the direction into which you are currently driving gt Press button or repeatedly until one of the following messages ap pears in the multifunction display AIRMATIC Compass Vehicles with air suspension So ME Vehicles with air suspension and differential locks OFF road Goo NE e gt Press button BV or EAN repeatedly until the desired setting is found For information on air suspension see Air suspension program gt page 278 For information on differential locks see Differential locks gt page 204 For information on the compass see Vehicle submenu gt page 178 and Compass gt page 344 DISTRONIC menu Canada only Use the DISTRONIC menu gt page 264 to display the current settings for your Distronic system The information shown in the multifunction display depends on whether the Distronic system is activated or deactivated Please refer to the Driving systems sec tion of this manual gt page 260 for instructions on how to activate Distronic gt Press button or repeatedly
414. memory MT To reset press reset button For 3 seconds 2 Messages a te sahti Vehicle Comfort Instrument Cluster Lighting Tae hl P54 32 4838 31 Menus submenus and functions Controls in detail Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu Vehicle status message Settings Vehicle configuration memory gt page 167 gt page 168 gt page 182 Calling up malfunction mes Resetting to factory Distance warning Sages warning messages and_ settings system status messages stored in memory submenu Commands submenus function on off Instrument cluster DSR Downhill Speed Regulation pro grammed default speed Time Date submenu Lighting submenu Vehicle submenu Comfort submenu The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored a The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the sys tem and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays The first function displayed in each menu will Control system Menu 9 Menu Trip computer TEL gt page 184 gt page 186 Fuel consumption Loading phone Statistics since start book Fuel consumption statis Searching for name tics since the last reset in phone book Resetting fuel consump tion statistics Distance to empty automatically show you which part of the system you are in Controls in detail Control system St
415. midifies the air in the vehicle interior thereby preventing the windows from fog ging up Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction A If you turn off the cooling function the interior air is not dried The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others Warning Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the automatic climate control system The air in the vehi cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu midified gt Press button gt page 230 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function switches off after a short delay Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing gt Press button again The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R 134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer BE if the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned Off Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Using driver side settings for all tem perature zones You can use the settings of the driver s side
416. mph 40 km h or have the front fog lamps switched on the corner illuminating function is not avail able Controls in detail Lighting Driving forward Switching on corner illuminating front fog lamps gt Switch on the left or right turn signal gt page 62 depending on whether you are turning left or right The respective front fog lamp comes on and illuminates the area in the direc tion into which you are turning or gt Turn steering wheel in desired direc tion The front fog lamp on the side of your steering direction comes on ee The corner illuminating front fog lamps temporarily come on on both sides of the vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one direction and then again in the other direction shortly thereafter The corner illuminating front fog lamps will come on automatically depending on the steer ing angle and vehicle speed even if you did not switch on either turn signal If the corner illuminating front fog lamps came on automatically they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle and vehicle speed Switching off corner illuminating front fog lamps The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements This will switch off the corner illuminating front fog lamps if they were activated by switching on the left or right turn signal If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn the turn si
417. n The indicator lamp on button say is not lit when the system switches to air recirculation automatically Deactivating gt Press button gt page 230 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Ge The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically e after 5 minutes if the outside temperature Is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after 5 minutes if the air conditioning and air drying is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41 F 5 C At outside temperatures above 79 F 26 C the system will not automatically switch back to outside air A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes Air recirculation mode with conve nience closing and opening feature AN Warning Never operate the side windows and tilt sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure When using the air recirculation mode with convenience closing feature should the up ward movement of a window be blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms hands fingers etc the automatic reversal feature will not operate In case the procedure causes potential danger Vehicles with or without tilt sliding sun roof The closing of the windows can be im mediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch The closing of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by mo
418. n 56 Seat Multicontour 138 Air recirculation mode 237 Accelerator position 195 Backup lamps Air vents second row seats 245 Emergency operation Messages in the multifunction Air vents third row seats 245 limp home mode 200 display 477 Air vents Front 234 Gearranges 197 Replacing bulbs 511 Airvolume 235 Gear selector lever 56 189 Bar 416 Control panel Front 230 Gear selector lever position 192 BAS 103 Control panel Rear 241 Gear shifting malfunctions 200 Lamps in instrument cluster 436 Deactivating system 232 Hill start assist system 196 Messages in the multifunction Defogging 235 Kickdown 196 display 451 Defrosting 235 Shifting procedure 192 Batteries SmartKey Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 237 Starting the engine 56 Check lamp 112 115 Rear passenger compartment 241 Steering wheel gearshift control 198 Checking battery condition 120 Rear window defroster 212 Towing atrailer 197 Messages in the multifunction Residual engine heat REST 241 Transmission fluid level 381 display 466 Using driver side settings for Transmission positions 193 Replacing 502 all temperature zones 240 Automatic Transmission Fluid see ATF Battery Vehicle 528 Charging 535 Disconnecting and connecting 530 Jump starting 536 Removing and installing 530 Bead 416 Beverage holder see Cup holder Bi Xenon headlamps see headlamps Bolts Spare wheel 494 Brake fluid 564 Checking 376 Messages in the multifunction display 469 Brake lamp Cleaning lenses 429 Messages in the
419. n danger of being injured To interrupt the opening procedure press or pull the door mounted remote tailgate switch or press the button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt The switch is located in the driver s door C Remote tailgate switch Pull remote tailgate switch until tailgate begins to open The tailgate opens While the tailgate is Opening an acoustic signal sounds Limiting opening height of tailgate In vehicles with power tailgate the tail gate opening height can be limited when transporting goods on a roof rack e g presence of an MB roof cargo container When activated the tailgate opens to approximately 6 6 ft 2 00 m gt Activate the limiting opening height of tailgate using the control system gt page 181 Closing the tailgate from the inside You can close the tailgate from the inside using the remote tailgate switch If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing e g luggage that has been piled too high the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens Controls in detail Warning Maintain sight of the area around the rear of the vehicle while operating the tailgate with the door mounted switch Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured To interrupt the closing procedure press or pull the door mounted remote tailgate switch or press the button on the SmartKey o
420. n hot e drop the bulb e scratch the bulb Wear eye and hand protection Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician Notes on bulb replacement Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits Always use a Clean lint free cloth when handling bulbs Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease If the newly installed bulb does not come on visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center the additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors the high mounted brake lamp the Bi Xenon low beam lamps the Bi Xenon high beam flasher spot light i Do not replace the LEDs yourself You could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehi cle Only have the LEDs replaced by a an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center i Replacing the bulbs for the front lamps is a technically complex process For your conve nience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly Practical hints Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs for front lamps Low b
421. n pressure infor mation on the inside of the fuel filler flap The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care fully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Warning A N Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B Pillar or if available the tire inflation pressure label on the fuel filler flap If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or if available the tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illu minates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significant ly underinflated tire causes the tire to Operation Tires and wheels overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
422. nce point or 5 mph increments past the resistance point Canada 1 km h or 10 km h 3 Canceling cruise control 4 Resume to last set speed Activating cruise control You can activate the cruise control when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 30 km h In the following cases you cannot activate the cruise control e when you brake e when you have set the parking brake e when the automatic transmission is set to position P R or N e if the ESP is switched off e if the ESP has switched off due to a malfunction a gt The vehicle speed displayed in the soeedom eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for the cruise control system Setting current speed gt Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 or depress in direction of arrow 2 The current speed is set gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The cruise control is activated The currently set speed appears in the status indicator of the multifunction display e USA only Cruise XXX Miles e Canada only XXX km h Controls in detail Driving systems 0 On uphill grades the cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed Once the grade eases the set speed will be resumed On downhill grades the cruise control maintains the set speed by braking with the vehicle s braking system In addition on longer downhill grades the automat
423. nctioning gt Drive with added caution to the nearest Sen een calnined authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Warning AN the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpect edly and unnecessarily which could also re sult in injury In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi cated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center immedi ately to have the system checked otherwise Practical hints What to do if Display message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator s Manual Possible cause consequence Front passenger front air bag is activated while driving even though a child small individual or object below the system s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat or the front passenger seat is empty Objects on the seat or forces acting on the seat may make the system sense sup plemental weight Possible solution Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passenger seat for the following gt gt gt Apply the parking brake gt page 67 Switch off the ignition gt page 42 Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary Remove any other items fr
424. nd the 4 ETS is only achieved with winter tires gt page 420 or snow chains as required Driving safety systems ABS A Do not pump the brake pedal Use firm steady brake pedal pressure instead Pump ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness Warning The Antilock Brake System ABS regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle The ABS is functional above a speed of ap proximately 5 mph 8 km h independent of road surface conditions On slippery road surfaces the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster gt page 26 comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running Safety and Security Driving safety systems Braking At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode gt Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pul sation Continuous steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS namely braking power and ability to steer the vehicle The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving Emergency brake maneuve
425. nd if the vehicle speed once exceeds 15 mph 25 km h the seat belt telltale starts flashing and a warning chime sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver s and the front passenger s seat belt are fastened If the driver s or the front passenger s seat belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds the warning chime stops sounding the seat belt telltale stops flashing but continues to be illu minated The seat belt telltale will only go out if both the driver s and the front passen ger s seat belt with the front passenger seat occupied are fastened or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened For more information see Practical hints gt page 442 Safety and Security Occupant safety Emergency Tensioning Device ETD seat belt force limiter The seat belts for the front seats and second row outer seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and seat belt force limiters The seat belts for the third row seats are equipped with emer gency tensioning devices The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases e in frontal or rear end impacts exceeding the system deployment threshold e incertain vehicle rollovers e ifthe restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly see Eg indicator lamp gt page 446 Gp The ETDs for the front seats will only acti vate if the respective front seat belt is fastened latch plate
426. ndicator lamps flash The vehicle adjusts to the highway level The following message appears in the multifunction display while the level is being set OFF road Geo NE Fo lL es i The message can be cleared by pressing the BA or button EN on the multifunction steering wheel Controls in detail Driving systems When the highway level is reached the in dicator lamps gt page 281 goes out The following message appears in the mul tifunction display for 5 seconds OFF road NE Eo C The vehicle is lowered automatically to the highway level if the vehicle speed is above 60 mph 96 km h Parktronic system A Parktronic is a supplemental system It is not intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers always remains with the driver Warning Special attention must be paid to objects with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes e g trailer couplings painted posts or road curbs Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle The operational function of the Parktronic system can be affected by dirty sensors especially at times of snow and ice See Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors gt page 430 Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals e g working jackhammers car wash or the air brakes of trucks can cause the system to send
427. nflu enced by e the rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit e the front passenger s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classifica tion System OCS Warning According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt the seat belt and top tether strap or lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer s instructions Safety and Security Occupant safety Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front pas senger seat e Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12 month old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropri ate child restraint on the front passen ger seat e Achild ina rear facing child restraint on the fr
428. nformation and share it with others e for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes e with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee e in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency e for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler its affiliates or sales service organization and or e as otherwise required or permitted by law Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system At a glance Exterior view Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Door control panel Storage compartments as Exterior view POO 00 4066 31 QOQ Item Tailgate Power tailgate Cargo compartment e Loading instructions e Cargo tie down rings e Hooks e Expanding e Cover blind e Cargo net Vehicle tool kit Spare wheel Rear window defroster Rear lamps Fuel filler flap Refueling Fuel Page 122 123 301 302 304 304 310 312 490 494 212 505 374 374 375 565 Item Exterior rear view mirrors Adjusting Auto dimming rear view mirrors Power folding Towing eye bolt Installing towing eye bolt Tires and wheels Checking tire inflation pressure General information Flat tire Spare wheel Hood Opening Engine oll Coolant Page 51 208 209 540 384 555 395 384 919
429. ng for warm coolant is approximately 0 6 in 1 5 cm higher Add coolant as required Replace and tighten cap 1 For more information on coolant see Coolants gt page 567 Operation Engine compartment Windshield rear window washer During all seasons add MB Windshield Ea Only use washer fluid which is suitable for system and headlamp cleaning Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit to plastic lenses Improper washer fluid can system water Premix the windshield washer fluid damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps in a suitable container For more information see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning Warning A N system gt page 569 The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned gt Use the tab to pull cap upwards Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit 1 Cap for windshield washer reservoir and water or commercially available premixed windshield washer sol vent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures Fluid for the windshield rear window washer system and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir It has a capacity of 8 1 T Always use washer solvent antifreeze US qt 7 7 I where temp
430. ng and reinstalling cup holder The front cup holder can be removed for cleaning purposes C Cup holder 2 Bridge with card ticket holder gt Hold cup holder at its bridge and pull out bridge in direction of arrow Pull cup holder out in direction of ar row First insert the cup holder Q and then insert bridge 2 Controls in detail Useful features Ashtrays Depending on vehicle configuration your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray and a cigarette lighter gt page 323 located in the front center console and an ashtray lo cated in front of the second row seats gt page 322 If your vehicle is not equipped with an ash tray ithas a storage compartment gt page 317 with a power outlet gt page 324 instead 2 Cover plate Controls in detail Useful features Opening the ashtray Rear center console ashtray Opening rear ashtray second row gt Briefly touch cover plate 2 gt Briefly press ashtray cover 2 The ashtray opens automatically T Close the ashtray when not in use and be The ashtray 4 opens automatically fore folding the second row seats Removing ashtray insert Warning A N Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing still Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement Set automatic transmis sion to P With the automatic transmission set to P turn off the engine Removing rear ashtray insert gt Grip the insert on the sides
431. ng to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness Display symbol Display message Battery Alternator Stop Vehicle o gt Inoperative iO Brake Wear BE Brake pad thickness must be visually in spected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution The battery is defective Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning The brake pads have reached their wear limit gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Apply the parking brake gt page 67 Do not continue to drive Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the Downhill Speed Regulation checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution USA only Release You are driving with the parking gt Release the parking brake gt page 59 Canada only Parking Brake brake set USA only EBV ABS ESP Inoperative The EBP the ABS andthe ESP Continue driving with added caution See Operator s Manual have switched off due to a mal Wheels may lock during hard braking Canada only OF y function The BAS is also reducing steering capability switched off gt Have the system checked at an T
432. nic brakes the vehicle in an effort to restore the preset distance or to maintain the set speed Keep driver s foot area clear at all times in cluding the area under the brake pedal Ob jects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the Distronic system Do not place your foot under the brake pedal your foot could become caught DISTRONIC menu in the control system Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system The information shown in the multifunction display depends on whether the Distronic system is activated or deactivated i For activating or deactivating the Distronic system see Activating Distronic gt page 266 or see Deactivating Distronic gt page 268 For activating or deactivating the Distance warn ing function see Distance warning function Canada only gt page 183 gt Press button or repeatedly until one of the following two displays appears in the multifunction display Distronic activated When you turn Distronic on you will see the set speed in the multifunction display for about 5 seconds When Distronic is activated the following display appears in the multifunction display oistronic 55M iS 300 200 100 OFT Distronic activated 2 Set vehicle speed Controls in detail Distronic deactivated When Distronic is deactivated you will see the standar
433. nlocking Global locking gt Press the lock button on an outside door handle gt page 71 All turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Restoring to factory setting gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp G gt page 115 flashes twice Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Checking the batteries in the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt Press button or EJ The battery check lamp gt page 112 or gt page 115 comes on briefly to in dicate that the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO batteries are in order If the battery check lamp does not come on briefly during check the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO batteries are discharged Replace the batteries gt page 502 You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center f the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle pressing the button or will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO If you lose your SmartKey SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or mechanical key you should do the following gt Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO deactivated by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt Report the loss of the SmartKey SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or the mechanical
434. nning you cannot switch off the low beam headlamps manually Canada only id With the exterior lamp switch in position W or ES you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps The high beam flasher is available at all times For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp switch to position to permit activation of the high beam headlamps When the engine is running and you shift from a driving position to position N or P with the vehicle at a standstill the low beam headlamps will switch off with a three minute delay Lighting When the engine Is running and you e turn the exterior lamp switch to position gj the low beam head lamps the tail and parking lamps the side marker lamps and the license plate lamps switch on e turn the exterior lamp switch to position J the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode USA only i With the exterior lamp switch in position EJ you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps The high beam flasher is available at all times For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp switch to position or EZ to permit activation of the high beam headlamps Controls in detail Lighting When the engine is running and you turn Fog lamps Front fog lamps the exterior lamp switch to position e miee or E ie nant Neder moter Warning A N position or EJ gt page 144 priority over the daytime running lamp mode TO Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
435. nor the tailgate is opened e the central locking switch is not activated i The vehicle could be inadvertently unlocked if the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is within 3 ft 1 m of the vehicle and e an outside door handle is splashed with water or e you attempt to clean an outside door handle Global locking gt Press the lock button on an outside door handle gt page 71 With the tailgate and all doors closed the turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Selective setting If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO so when you grasp the driver s door handle only the driver s door and the fuel filler flap unlocks gt Press and hold buttons gl and simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp gt page 115 flashes twice The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO will then function as follows Controls in detail Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler flap gt Grasp the driver s outside door handle All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knob in the driver s door moves up The anti theft alarm system is dis armed Global unlocking gt Grasp any outside door handle other than the driver s outside door handle All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is dis armed Locking and u
436. ns are met you can occupy the front passenger seat again Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS gt page 81 the indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out If above conditions are not met the system is not working properly Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Warning A remains out even after performing the above individuals use the front passenger seat i corrective steps do not have any children until the system has been repaired if the indicator lamp 12 years old and under and other small Practical hints What to do if Display message Front Passenger Airbag Disabled see Operator s Manual Possible cause conse quence Front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving even though an adult or someone larger than a small individual is occupying the front passenger seat Forces acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in weight Possible solution Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passenger seat for the following gt gt gt gt gt gt Apply the parking brake gt page 67 Switch off the ignition gt page 42 Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle Adjust the seat in a height position gt page 46 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present e g objects such as books brie
437. ntilation 241 Rear automatic climate control 241 Power WINCOWS sesceccceeeeeceeeeeeeees 246 Door WINKOWS ccccccceseeeeceeeeees 247 Hinged quarter windows 248 synchronizing the door windows 249 Summer opening feature 249 Convenience closing feature 250 Power tilt sliding sunroof 251 Opening and CIOSING ccceeee 251 SVMCMFONIZING s rrrsinsenneciasnvasvansierses 253 Driving SYSTEMS ccccceeeccccsesseeeeeeees 255 Cruise CONTIO ccccseseeeceeeeeeeees 255 Distronic Canada only 260 Distance warning function Canada Only ssessessseessseeesseeessse 272 Downhill Speed Regulation DOR herenera 273 Off road driving program Vehicles without enhanced off road package 277 Air Suspension program 6 278 Adaptive Damping System PD ane 278 Vehicle level control 668 279 Parktronic system sseecceeeee 288 Rear view camera ceecceeeeeeeeeee 293 LOGOO oren 295 Carriers ossssessssesssserssseresseresssesss 295 Loading instructions sseess 301 Cargo tie down Sings 00608 302 FIO OS rrokan a re 304 Expanding cargo compartment 304 Cargo compartment cover blind 310 Cargo NOE sassetvesvavesascsenvonccnnnendas 312 Useful features ccssssecccseeseeeeees S15 Storage compartments 315 Par
438. ntinu ously indicating that the LOW RANGE mode has been activated a You can cancel the procedure by pressing the LOW RANGE switch again while the indicator lamp is flashing Switching LOW RANGE mode off switching from LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE T The shift procedure can only be performed when the following conditions are met e The engine is running gt page 41 e The automatic transmission is in position N page 190 e The vehicle speed does not exceed 43 mph 70 km h There is no reset to LOW after the ignition has been switched off Controls in detail Transfer case gt Press LOW RANGE switch Q gt page 202 Indicator lamp flashes If the system senses that all conditions are met it will switch to back to HIGH RANGE mode A chime sounds and the LOW RANGE display ap pears in the multifunction display The indicator lamp on the LOW RANGE switch goes out indicat ing that the LOW RANGE mode has been deactivated a You can cancel the procedure by pressing the LOW RANGE switch again while the indicator lamp is flashing For messages in the multifunction display see Practical hints section gt page 488 Controls in detail Differential locks For more information on Off road driving see Off road driving gt page 355 Vehicles with enhanced off road package are equipped with automatic locks for the center and rear axle differential to improve v
439. nward Proper use of seat belts Do not twist the belt when fastening Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder it should not touch the neck Never pass the shoulder portion of the belt under your arm For this purpose you can adjust the height of the belt outlet gt page 55 Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips over hip joint and not across the abdomen Place the seat backrest in a position that is as upright as possible Getting started Driving Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Check your seat belt periodically during travel to make sure that it Is properly positioned Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing Getting started Driving Starting the engine Automatic transmission R Warning N Do not pass belts over sharp edges They Warning A N could tear Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CQ and inhaling it can cause un consciousness and possible death Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat ad
440. o camera lens Q when waxing the vehicle If necessary remove the wax using the Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo with plenty of water Operation Bg Do not clean the camera and the area around the camera e with a high pressure cleaner e with a dry cloth and high pressure e with aggressive cleaning agents You could otherwise damage the camera Vehicle care Cleaning the windows and the wiper blades Warning UN For safety reasons switch off wipers and re move SmartKey from starter switch vehicles with KEYLESS GO Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 before cleaning the windshield and or the wiper blades Otherwise the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury gt Fold the wiper arms forward until they engage i Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts They could tear gt Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution b gt Operation Vehicle care gt gt Use a soft clean cloth and a mild win dow cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces An automotive glass cleaner is recom mended T Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button vehicles with KEYLESS GO Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the winds
441. o lessening rain or because the road is drying for example e the message in the multifunction display disappears You can then operate Distronic as usual again Practical hints What to do if Display message Depress brake ee SIME CUE or Pe Door Open Vehicle Not In Park Drive to workshop without shifting gears Possible cause consequence Possible solution You have tried to shift the automatic gt Depress the brake pedal transmission into position D Ror N using the gear selector lever without depressing the brake pedal You have opened the drivers door Before you leave the vehicle make sure and the automatic transmission Is that the automatic transmission is set to still in position D R or N position P and that the parking brake is engaged The automatic transmission cannot If the automatic transmission is set to be shifted out of the set position be position D cause of a malfunction gt Without changing the automatic transmis sion from position D drive to an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center If the automatic transmission is set to position N R or P gt Do not drive gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Display message ESP Inoperative See Operator s Manual Practical hints Possible cause consequence In addition the yellow ESP warning lamp comes on The ESP has detected a malfunc tion and switched off T
442. o luggage and trailer tongue weight total load limit from placard minus combined weight of all occupants 1500 Ibs 750 Ibs 750 Ibs 1500 Ibs 540 Ibs 960 Ibs 1500 Ibs 150 Ibs 1350 Ibs Operation Tires and wheels Certification label Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants cargo and the trailer tongue load if applicable gt page 392 as to not exceed the permis sible load limit you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for ei ther the front or rear axle You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the certification label The certification label can be found on the driver s door B pillar see Technical data gt page 547 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The total weight of the vehicle all occupants all cargo and the trailer tongue load gt page 392 must never exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The to tal allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear To assure that your vehicle does not ex ceed the maximum permissible weight limits GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle have the loaded vehicle including driver passengers and all cargo and if applicable trailer fully loaded weighed on a suitable commercial scale Trailer tongue load The tongue load of any trailer is an impor tant weight to measure because it
443. occurs on a dry windshield If it is necessary to operate the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions always operate the windshield wipers with wind shield washer fluid gt page 64 T If anything blocks the windshield wipers leaves snow etc switch them off immediate ly e For safety reasons stop the vehicle in a safe location and e remove SmartKey from starter switch or e turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open the driver s door with the driver s door open starter switch is in position 0 same as with SmartKey removed from starter switch before attempting to remove any blockage e Remove blockage e Turn the windshield wipers on again If windshield wipers fail to function at all in the combination switch position i or Eg e set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed e have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Switching on windshield wipers gt Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain Windshield wipers off Slow intermittent wiping Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity Fast intermittent wiping Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity Slow continuous wiping Fast continuous wiping Getting started Intermittent wiping Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet weather conditions or in the presence of precipita
444. ocks have been manually engaged the tires will scuff on the road surface when cornering because the differences be tween the individual wheel rotation speeds will not be compensated for The differential locks are reset to AUTO mode after the ignition has been switched off for longer than 10 seconds Controls in detail Good visibility For information on windshield wipers see Windshield wipers gt page 62 Headlamp cleaning system The headlamps will automatically be cleaned with a high pressure water jet when you have e switched on the headlamps and e operated the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid five times When you switch off the headlamps the counter resets For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 383 Rear view mirrors For more information on setting the rear view mirrors see Mirrors gt page 51 Interior rear view mirror antiglare position P 68 40 7111 31 1 Lever gt Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by moving lever Q towards the wind shield The interior rear view mirror is dimmed Auto dimming rear view mirrors The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when e the ignition is switched on and e incoming light fr
445. oe ae 1 Easy exit strap The message in the multifunction dis play disappears Controls in detail Seats gt gt Return seat into its original position gt page 132 The message in the multifunction dis play disappears For setting the front passenger seat back into the stored position see Recalling po sitions from memory gt page 142 For information on how to fold down the second row seats completely see Folding second row seats gt page 306 Returning second row seats to their original position A When occupants have entered or exited the vehicle using the easy entry exit feature before driving off make sure Warning e the seats are properly locked e the seat backrests are in an upright po sition and are properly locked If a seat and seat backrest are not properly locked the seat could move forward and the seat backrest could fold You could slide un der the seat belt during braking vehicle ma neuvers or in an accident If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or even fa tal injuries gt Fold seat gt page 131 back until it au dibly engages gt Fold seat backrest gt page 130 back into original position until it engages To make sure the seat backrest has en gaged lean firmly against the backrest Emergency exit for third row seats If due to an accident or other situation i
446. oes out The automatic mode is switched off The selected blower speed appears in the display 4 gt page 230 Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Front defroster You can use this setting to defrost the windshield such as when it is iced up You can also use it to defog the windshield and door windows i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again Activating gt Press button gt page 230 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control The automatic climate control switches to the following functions automatically most efficient blower speed and heating power depending on outside temperature air flows onto the windshield and the front door windows side air vents must be open the air conditioning compressor switches on at outside temperatures above approximately 41 F 5 C for air drying Adjustments You can adjust the air volume and the tem perature when the front defroster is switched on The air flow will remain on the windshield and front door windows gt or Press button to decrease or button to increase air volume gt page 230 to the desired level The air volume decreases increases to the next lower higher blower speed and heating switches to the tempera ture that was set before the front de froster was switched on The indicator lam
447. of Prince a Johnson Controls Company The following symbols are found in this Operator s Manual 7 Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk Since standard equipment varies between models the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual equipment of your vehi cle Warning A N Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life or the health or life of others T Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle ae Helpful hints or further information you may find useful gt This symbol points to instructions for you to follow gt Anumber of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple step procedure gt page b gt b gt Display This symbol tells you where to look for further information ona topic This continuation symbol marks a warning which is continued on the next page This continuation symbol marks a procedure which is continued on the next page This symbol is used to indicate cross references to term defini tions Words appearing in the multi function display are printed in the type shown here Introduction Operating safety Y Operating safety A Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning Because the vehicle s electronic components are in terconnected any modifications made may
448. of detected traction loss of at least one tire What to do if Suggested solution gt Switch the ESP back on gt page 106 Exceptions gt page 105 If the ESP cannot be switched back on gt Continue driving with added caution gt Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear gt Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible gt When driving off apply as little throttle as possible gt While driving ease up on the accelera tor gt Adapt your speed and driving to the pre vailing road and weather conditions gt Do not deactivate the ESP Exceptions gt page 105 Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Problem CA m hd The red seat belt telltale comes on for a maximum of 6 seconds after starting the engine You hear a warning chime for a maximum of 6 seconds after starting the engine The red seat belt telltale comes on while the vehicle is standing still and the engine is running or during driving Possible cause consequence The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts before driving off You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt You and or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts There are items placed on the front passen ger seat and theref
449. of the fuel filler flap make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct Warning uN The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in a reliable manner if you have set the correct tire inflation pressures for each tire If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set the system will monitor the pressure ac cording to the incorrect value vy Operation Tires and wheels Switch on the ignition gt page 42 Make sure the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display gt page 155 Press button Vg or FA repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display Run Flat Indicator Active Menu R Button Press the reset button on the instru ment cluster gt page 152 The following message will appear in the multifunction display Restart Run Flat Indicator Yes Cancel Operation Tires and wheels If you wish to confirm activation gt Press button ES The following message will appear in the multifunction display Run Flat Indicator Restarted After a certain learning phase the Run Flat Indicator checks the set pressure val ues for all four tires If you wish to cancel activation gt Press button EEJ or gt Wait until the message Restart Run Flat Indicator Yes Cancel disappears Checking tire pressure electronically with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS USA only The Tire Pressure M
450. off road driving program gt page 277 or if equipped the LOW RANGE mode gt page 201 is switched on Avoid high engine speeds Shift automatic transmission to position 1 gt page 197 Check the vehicle clearance before crossing obstacles Cross obstacles e g tree stumps or big rocks very slowly by aiming one of the front wheels at the center of the ob stacle and repeat same with the rear wheel BE Special attention is needed when you cross obstacles on a steep incline The vehicle could slide sideways as a result of its possible slanted position which in turn may result in the vehicle tipping or rolling over Driving on sand Warning A N Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure before driving through sand However if you do so remember to correct the tire inflation pressure gt page 395 before continuing your trip Driving with reduced tire inflation pressure increases the risk of losing control of the vehicle and rolling over When driving on sand observe the follow ing rules e Set the raised level gt page 279 e Avoid high engine speeds e Shift automatic transmission into a gear range that is appropriate for the terrain e n sandy soil drive at a steady speed as conditions permit This helps overcome the vehicle rolling resistance and re duce the likelihood of the vehicle sink ing into the ground e Drive in tracks of other vehicles if they are not too deep and you hav
451. ols in detail Useful features Cup holders E Cup holder in rear armrest second row l l seats holder may come loose during braking Warning A vehicle maneuvers or an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi or may cause an accident and or serious personal injury In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants and or vehicle equip ment only use containers that fit into the cup holder Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the Cup holder in front of armrest contents especially hot liquids could spill A cup holder and a card ticket holder are during braking vehicle maneuvers or an located in the front center console AS accident Liquids spilled on vehicle occu Cup holder pants may cause serious personal injury Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Pull the armrest down by its top T Close the cup holder before folding the arm rest upwards When not in use keep rear cup holder closed An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an acci dent The front cup holder can be removed for cleaning purposes gt page 321 Cup holders in third row side trim Cup holders are located in the side trims of the third row seats 1 Cup holder Removi
452. ols in detail Automatic transmission Effect Reverse gear Shift into reverse gear R only when the vehicle is stopped Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed To avoid damage to the transmis sion never shift into neutral position N while driving If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning Shift into neutral position N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads T If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey or the KEYLESS GO start stop button the transmission will shift to neutral position N automatically If you want the gear position to remain in neutral position N e g when taking the vehicle through an automatic conveyor type car wash observe the following instructions A When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch do not leave children unattended in the vehicle It is possible for children to switch on the ignition which could result in unsupervised use of vehicle equipment A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning Vehicles with SmartKey gt With the vehicle at a standstill and the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N If engaged release the parking brake gt page 59 Switch off the ignition and leave
453. om headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror The rear view mirror will not react if e the automatic transmission is set to position R e the interior lighting is turned on A The auto dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sen sors in the interior rear view mirror Warning The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side do not react for example when transporting cargo which covers the rear window Light hitting the mirror s at certain angles incident light could blind you As a result you may not be able to observe traffic con ditions and could cause an accident A Warning Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Controls in detail Power folding exterior rear view mirrors T Before you drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash fold the exterior rear view mirrors in Otherwise they may get damaged Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in and out automatically When the corresponding function in the control system is activated gt page 182 e The exterior rear view mirrors automat ically fold in as soon as the vehicle is locked from th
454. om on and around the front passenger seat and make sure the storage bag on the back of the front passenger seat is empty Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present e g objects such as books briefcases etc lodged behind or around the seat head restraints pushing against roof etc The system may recog nize such forces as supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present Keep the seat unoccupied close the front passenger door and switch on the ignition gt page 42 Continued on next page Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible Possible solution cause conse quence Monitor the indicator lamp on the center console gt page 85 and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster gt page 26 for the following With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on e the indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain illuminated indicating that the OCS gt page 81 has deactivated the air bag e the message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator s Manual or the message Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator s Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display If above conditio
455. omatic trans mission automatically shifts to P Ei if the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch the battery may not be sufficient ly charged e Check the battery and charge it if necessary gt page 528 e Geta jump start gt page 536 To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS GO feature are supplied with a SmartKey with integrated KEYLESS GO function and a removable KEYLESS GO start stop button With the KEYLESS GO start stop button inserted and the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO present in the vehicle press ing the KEYLESS GO start stop button e without the brake pedal depressed corresponds to the various starter switch positions gt page 44 e with the brake pedal firmly depressed will start the engine gt page 56 If you wish or should there be a need to insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch the KEYLESS GO start stop button can be easily removed by pulling it out of the starter switch Getting started a The KEYLESS GO start stop button does not need to be removed from the starter switch when you leave the vehicle However always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you when you leave the vehicle As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in the vehicle the vehicle s electrical sys
456. omatic transmission into another gear If you do not wait until the shifting proce dure has been entirely completed then it might not be correctly performed The trans fer case might be in neutral thus interrupt ing the transfer of power between the engine and the drive axle The vehicle is then freely movable even if a gear has been selected and could uninten tionally be set into motion particularly on up or downhill grades This could lead to an accident and cause injury to yourself and others Please observe related messages appearing in the multifunction display gt page 488 Switching LOW RANGE mode The switch is located on the upper part of the center console C LOW RANGE switch 2 Indicator lamp LOW RANGE display Switching LOW RANGE mode on switching from HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE T The shift procedure can only be performed when the following conditions are met e The engine is running gt page 41 e The automatic transmission is in position N page 190 e The vehicle speed does not exceed 25 mph 40 km h There is no reset to HIGH after the ignition has been switched off gt Press LOW RANGE switch Q Indicator lamp 2 flashes If the system senses that all conditions are met it will switch to LOW RANGE mode A chime sounds and the LOW RANGE display 3 appears in the multi function display The indicator lamp 2 on the LOW RANGE switch comes on co
457. ommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle Operation Tires and wheels 2 The certification label also found on the driver s door B pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehi cle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle Operation Tires and wheels POO 10 3793 31 1 Driver s door B pillar Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the Tire and Loading Information placard with regards to loading your vehicle Tire and Loading Information A Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Warning Tire and Loading Information placard Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration purposes only Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and
458. on see Practical hints gt page 439 At the gas station ce Gasoline engine Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a min imum Posted Octane Rating of 91 average of 96 RON 86 MON Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump Please contact gas station personnel in case labels on the pump cannot be found For more information on gasoline see Premium unleaded gasoline gasoline engine gt page 565 see Fuel requirements gt page 565 and the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet USA only or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Diese engine Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL 15 pom SULFUR MAXIMUM Information on diesel quality can normally be found on the fuel pump Please contact gas station personnel in case labels on the pump cannot be found For more information on diesel fuels refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet USA only or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Operation At the gas station gt gt Diesel engine If you have driven the vehicle until the tank is empty the fuel system needs to be bled gt page 527 BE Diesel engine The engine is more susceptible to wear and damage if you use e marine diesel fuel e heating oil e additives The exhaust aftertreatment device will be seriously damaged if you use e LOW SULFUR HI
459. on P gt page 191 When parked on an incline also turn front wheel towards the road curb Switching off headlamps gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to WE gt page 61 For more information see Lighting gt page 143 f the engine cannot be turned off as described see Emergency engine shut down gt page 545 gt Shift the automatic transmission to position P gt page 191 A Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop With the en gine not running there is no power assis tance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is nec essary to brake and steer the vehicle Warning gt Apply the parking brake gt page 67 D Always set the parking brake in addition to Shifting the automatic transmission to position P gt page 191 When parked on an incline also turn front wheel towards the road curb T Observe instructions when taking the vehicle through an automatic conveyor type car wash page 428 Turning off with the SmartKey gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O gt page 41 gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch The immobilizer is activated T If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey and e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or e open a front door the automatic transmission will shift to pa
460. on fuel filler flap at the position indicated by the arrow Fuel filler flap opens slightly Open fuel filler flap G completely Turn fuel filler cap 2 counterclock wise and hold on to it until possible pressure Is released gt Take off fuel filler cap BE 77e fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel filler neck Do not drop the cap It could damage the vehicle paint finish gt Set fuel filler cap 2 on fuel filler flap as shown gt To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air fully insert filler nozzle unit gt Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out do not top off or over fill Operation Warning A N Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres sure in the system which could cause a gas discharge This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump noz zle which could cause personal injury gt Replace fuel filler cap 2 by turning it clockwise until it audibly engages a Make sure to close the fuel filler flap before locking your vehicle as the flap locking pin prevents closing after you have locked the vehicle gt Close fuel filler flap You should hear the latch close shut a Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the R malfunction indicator lamp USA only or the ma malfunc tion indicator lamp Canada only comes on For more informati
461. one time without washer fluid Getting started Driving Wiping with windshield washer fluid gt Press the combination switch in direc tion of arrow Q past the resistance point The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid amp To prevent smears on the windshield or noisy chattering wiper blades wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining For information on cleaning the headlamps with washer fluid see Headlamp cleaning system gt page 208 For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 383 Rear window wiper washer The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 Rear window wiper switch 2 Wiping rear window with washer fluid 3 Intermittent wiping 4 Rear window wiper off Wiping rear window with washer fluid 6 Rear window wiper indicator gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 The rear window wiper engages automatical ly when the automatic transmission is shifted to position R with the windshield wipers switched on Activating intermittent wipe gt Turn rear window wiper switch 1 to position 3 gt page 64 In the lower multifunction display you will see indicator 6 indicating that the rear window wiper is activated Getting started Driving Deacti
462. onitoring System TPMS is equipped with a combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale in the instrument cluster gt page 27 Depending on how the telltale illuminates it indicates a low tire pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS system itself e f the telltale illuminates continuously one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated There is no malfunction in the TPMS e f the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and then stays illuminated the TPMS system itself is not operating properly a This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The TPMS only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors It monitors the tire inflation pres sure as selected by the driver in all four tires A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires Warning A N The TPMS does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar or if available the supplemental tire inflatio
463. ont passenger seat will be serious ly injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear fac ing child restraint in the front seat We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear facing child restraint in the back seat b gt b gt Safety and Security Occupant safety If you must install a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so make sure that the indicator lamp is illumi nated indicating that the front passen ger front air bag is deactivated Should the indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed please check installation Periodically check the indicator lamp while driving to make sure the indicator lamp is illumi nated If the indicator lamp goes out or remains out do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired A child in a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be serious ly injured or even killed if the front pas senger front air bag inflates If you have to place a child in a forward facing child restraint on the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restrain
464. ontrol and operation of radio transmitters sates savasmavenecanrnentancasies 370 Catalytic converter gasoline ENYINE eeceeseeeeees 371 Oxidation catalyst diesel ENZine cececceseeeceeees Emission control c sesceeeees Coolant temperature 066 At the gas station Refueling nsseeennnssseensssseeessse Check regularly and before a long trip eeeeeeeeeeeees ENENG Oll erriei Transmission fluid level Coolant level ccececececeeeees Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system Tires and wheels Important guidelines 6 Tire care and maintenance Direction of rotation e Loading the vehicle 006 Recommended tire inflation pressure cececceeeeeees Checking tire inflation pressure Tire labeling ccccceesescereeeeees Load identification 000 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN ccccsssceceeseeees 410 Maximum tire load cceeeeceees 412 Maximum tire inflation pressure 412 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles 413 Tire ply material cccsccceeeees 415 Tire and loading terminology 415 Rotating tires cceecccsseeeceeeeeees 418 Winter driving csccccsessscceeseeseeees 420 Winter tires sensiccsesavdsraevatiean
465. opped The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehi cle is parked Rather the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to shifting into park position P to secure the vehicle If the vehicle s electrical system is malfunctioning the automatic transmission could remain locked in park position P gt Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Controls in detail T SmartKey Ifyou turn off the engine using the SmartKey and e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or e open a front door the transmission will shift to park position P automatically Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the SmartKey alone only will automatically shift the transmission to neutral position N BE KEYLESS Go If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open a front door the transmission will shift to park position P automatically Keep in mind that turning off the engine using the KEYLESS GO start stop button alone only will automatically shift the transmission to neutral position N Automatic transmission 0 Make it a practice to always shift into park position P before turning off the engine and e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or e open a front door or when using KEYLESS GO before turning off the engine with the start stop button and open ing a front door Contr
466. or digital soeedometer For more information on menus displayed in the multifunction display see Menus gt page 158 Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunc tion steering wheel Multifunction display Operating the control system 2 Telephone Press button to take a call to dial to redial to end a call to reject an incoming call Selecting the submenu or setting the volume Press button up to increase E down to decrease Voice Control System on see separate operating instructions Moving within a menu Press button Wag for next display B for previous display Voice Control System off see separate operating instructions Menu systems Press button for next menu for previous menu Depending on the selected menu gt page 158 pressing the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display The information available in the multifunc tion display is arranged in menus each containing a number of functions or sub menus The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu radio or CD operations under AUDIO for example These functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your vehicle Vehicles
467. ore the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied Suggested solution gt Fasten your seat belts Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not the seat belt tell tale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after starting the engine Fasten your seat belt The warning chime stops sounding Fasten your seat belts The seat belt telltale goes out Remove the items from the front pas senger seat and put them in a safe place The seat belt telltale goes out Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution During driving the red seat belt The vehicle s speed once exceeded 15 mph gt Fasten your seat belts telltale flashes and you addition 25 km h and you and or your front pas ally hear an intermittent warning senger have forgotten to fasten your seat chime with increasing intensity belts The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sounding There are items placed on the front passen gt Remove the items from the front pas ger seat and therefore the system senses the senger seat and put them in a safe front passenger seat as being occupied place The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sounding After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt on one of the front seats the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously The seat belt telltale will
468. osi tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul der not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children over 41 Ib until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster Install child seat according to manufactu rer s instructions The child seat must be firmly attached to the right and left side anchors 2 gt page 96 Occupant safety An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to the child Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat mounting fittings must be re placed Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system Safety and Security Occupant safety The LATCH anchors are blended with covers Example second row seats 1 Anchorage ring covers gt Remove anchorage ring cover Q from the seat on which a child seat is to be installed Example second row seats 2 Anchors gt Install a LATCH type child seat accord ing to the manufacturer s instructions as Make sure the seat belt for the center seat can operate freely with a child seat installed i Only the rear outer seats can be used for in stalling a LATCH type child seat For installing a Non LATCH type child seat use the vehicle s seat belt system Install child seat according to the manufactur
469. osing proce dure at any time by pressing or pulling the door mounted remote tailgate switch gt page 124 pressing the button on the SmartKey gt page 112 or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 115 pressing the tailgate closing switch gt page 126 pressing the tailgate closing locking switch vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt page 126 T The tailgate swings open upwards automat ically Always make sure there is sufficient over head clearance Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the tailgate from the outside You can unlock and open the tailgate simultaneously from the outside when the vehicle is at a standstill gt Press and hold button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO until the tailgate unlocks and opens While the tailgate is opening an acoustic signal sounds or gt Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Pull on the handle gt page 122 The tailgate is unlocked and opens While the tailgate is opening an acous tic signal sounds Opening the tailgate from the inside You can unlock and open the tailgate si multaneously from the driver s seat when the vehicle is at a standstill Warning UN Maintain sight of the area around the rear of the vehicle while operating the tailgate with the door mounted remote tailgate switch or with the button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Monitor the opening procedure carefully to make sure no one Is i
470. ossible solution Rising The vehicle is adjusting to off road gt Do not drive faster than 20 mph Max 20 MPH level 3 30 km h Max 20 MPH You are driving while using off road gt Do not drive faster than 20 mph level 3 The message reminds you of the 30 km h maximum speed at which you may drive with off road level 3 Go Being Lowered The vehicle is being lowered from off road gt Do not drive faster than 20 mph Max 20 MPH level 3 to off road level 2 30 km h until the off road level 2 is reached Reduce speed to You are driving too fast for the set vehicle gt Do not drive faster than 20 mph under 20 MPH level 30 km h until the off road level 2 is reached Warning A anve Ly off road level 3 with pamieuan cat tion as it could otherwise lead to an accident Adapt your driving style to the modified driv and or serious injury to you or others ing conditions Avoid extreme quick steer ing movements Please keep in mind that the driving characteristics of the vehicle have been modified You should therefore Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Locking System Inoperative service Required Diff Lock System Overheated Wait briefly Stop vehicle engage parking brake Possible cause consequence The differential locks are malfunctioning The differential locks are too hot and have been deactivated as a re sult A shifting procedure could not be completed LO
471. otify local fire and or police authori ties If the extent of the damage cannot be de termined gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance If no damage can be determined on the e major assemblies e fuel system e engine mount gt Start the engine in the usual manner Y Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle End your drive as follows Warning A N With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and the steering system In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle Warning AN Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Getting started To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the vehicle drivetrain as a result of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Firmly depress parking brake pedal e Shift the automatic transmission to position P e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheel towards the road curb e Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from t
472. our vehicle literature portfolio or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation GL 550 similar 1 Filler cap gt Unscrew filler cap Q from filler neck gt Add engine oil as required Never over fill with oil Be careful not to spill any oil when adding Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water i Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and or catalytic converter gasoline engine or the oxi dation catalyst diesel engine not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Engine compartment gt Screw filler cap Q back on filler neck For more information on engine oil see Technical data section gt page 562 and gt page 564 Transmission fluid level The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions have an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center check the automatic trans mission Coolant level The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze When checking the
473. own on the original part Warning A N Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure For additional information on tire load rating see Load identification gt page 410 ap Tire load rating gt page 406 and Tire speed rating 6 gt page 406 are also referred to as service description Tire speed rating The tire speed rating gt page 406 indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire Warning A N Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others Tire load rating gt page 406 and Tire speed rating 6 gt page 406 are also referred to as service description Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph 160 km h R up to 106 mph 170 km h S up to 112 mph 180 km h T up to 118 mph 190 km h H up to 130 mph 210 km h V up to 149 mph 240 km h W up to 168 mph 270 km h Y up to 186 mph 300 km h Y a
474. p on button goes out The indicator lamp on button EA comes on Turn temperature control and or 7 gt page 230 slightly in any direction Heating switches to the temperature that was set before the front defroster was switched on The indicator lamp on button goes out The indicator lamp on button EA comes on i The air conditioning compressor remains on even if the indicator lamp in button goes out This helps to prevent the windshield from fogging Deactivating gt Press button gt page 230 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Defrosting is turned off The previous settings are once again in effect To switch off you can also press button or g gt page 230 Windshield fogged on the outside i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield is clear again gt Switch the windshield wipers on gt page 63 gt Press button Bg gt page 230 The indicator lamp on button A goes out Air volume and air distribution are controlled separately for each zone If the automatic air distribution and air volume are switched off gt Press buttons and gt page 230 Controls in detail Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 3 zone automatic climate control Air recirculation mode If the air distribution control as well as the airflow volume control are set to Rg and there is a high need for cooling the MAXCOOL function is activated MAXCOOL a
475. pant safety A After installing top tether straps make sure that the seat backrests are in an upright po sition and are properly locked Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests If a seat backrest is not properly locked the seat backrest could fold The child seat would no longer be prop erly supported or positioned to provide its intended benefit Warning gt Lower the head restraint if necessary gt page 135 Make sure the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat backrest Install the child restraint system and tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s in structions Blocking of rear door window operation With the override switch you can disable the rear side window switches in the rear door panels A Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle The children could otherwise injure them selves e g by becoming trapped in the win dow opening Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury The override switch is located on the driver s door cont
476. pare wheel see Mounting the spare slightly counterclockwise Retaining screw 2 wheel gt page 520 should then come loose easily gt Remove vehicle tool kit storage well casing 3 You can now access the Minispare wheel Removing Minispare wheel gt Remove the jack from the vehicle tool kit gt page 492 gt Remove Minispare wheel LLI ILS AJ L P58 10 2135 31 1 Minispare wheel 2 Retaining screw 3 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Unlocking the vehicle Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver s door T f g If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO open the driver s door using the mechanical key Unlocking the driver s door with the mechanical key will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch P80 20 2725 31 a P80 20 2948 31 1 Mechanical key locking tab 1 Unlocking Mechanical ke d Mechanical key gt Move locking tab Q in direction of ee gt Insert mechanical key 2 into the The mechanical key 2 comes out driver s door lock until it stops gt Slide mechanical key 2 out of the gt Turn mechanical key 2 counterclock housing wise to position Q and hold it there gt Pull the door handle until the locking knob moves up gt page 120 The driver s door is un
477. pear in the multifunc tion display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command Once the vehicle is unlocked a Response Center specialist may attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock autho rization was received by the Response Center you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the tail gate recessed handle again Stolen Vehicle Recovery services In the event your vehicle was stolen gt Report the incident to the police The police will issue a numbered incident report gt Pass this number on to the Mercedes Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle s Tele Aid system Once the vehicle is located the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you The vehicle s location will only be provided to law enforcement If you have any questions please call the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada When the anti theft alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center See anti theft alarm system gt page 109 Garage door opener The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices It provides a convenient way to re
478. perature control and or 7 gt page 216 slightly in any direction Heating switches to the temperature that was set before the front defroster was switched on The indicator lamp on button goes out The indicator lamp on button comes on Go The air conditioning compressor remains on even if the indicator lamp in button goes out This helps to prevent the windshield from fogging Controls in detail Climate control Deactivating Windshield fogged on the outside If the automatic air distribution is switched off gt Press button gt page 216 once Keep this setting selected only until the more windshield is clear again gt Press air distribution button Q or The indicator lamp on the button goes Switch the windshield wipers on papag out Defrosting is turned off gt page 63 Air recirculation mode The previous settings are in effect gt Press button gt page 216 again The air conditioning compressor remains switched on Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside e g before driving The climate control switches automatically through a tunnel This setting cuts off the The indicator lamp on the button comes on i To switch off you can also press button or Bg gt page 216 to the following functions intake of outside air and recirculates the e most efficient blower speed and air in the passenger compartment
479. phone is ready to receive calls you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time gt Press button or repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display gt Press button PA or Reg The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone This may take several minutes The message Please Wait appears in the multifunction display When the message Please Wait disappears the phone book has been loaded gt Press button JM or Re repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order Controls in detail Control system C Name from the phone book f you press and hold button ERN or RA for longer than 1 second the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again Cancel the quick search mode by pressing button Fm Controls in detail Control system gt gt Press button F The system dials the selected phone number If the connection is successful and this feature is supported by your network provider the name of the party if stored in your phone book you are calling and the duration of the call will appear in the multifunc tion display 00 02 54 Newman If no connection is made the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory Redialing The control system s
480. pon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads e g high speeds heavy loads high ambient temper atures Operation Driving instructions Warning A N Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire For more information see Tires and wheels gt page 384 Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road hydroplaning may occur even at low speeds and with new tires Reduce vehicle speed avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain Tire traction The safe speed on a wet snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point A If ice has formed on the road tire traction will be substantially reduced Under such weather conditions drive steer and brake with extreme caution Warning Mercedes Benz recommends winter tires gt page 420 with a minimum tread depth of approximately in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season to make
481. ppears in the front and rear display This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle interior when windows and tilt sliding sunroof are closed Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside e g before driving through a tunnel This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment Warning A N Fogged windows impair visibility endangering you and others If the windows begin to fog on the inside switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging If interior win dow fogging persists make sure the air conditioning gt page 239 is activated or press button ERJ Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Activating gt Press button gt page 230 The indicator lamp on the button comes on a The air recirculation mode is activated auto matically at high outside temperatures The indicator lamp on button is not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on A quantity of outside air is added after approxi mately 30 minutes If you have turned off the air conditioning gt page 239 or the outside temperature is below 41 F 5 C the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically a To cool the interior as fast as possible the automatic climate control automatically switch es to air recirculatio
482. pproved product s Follow directions on product label Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel This only results in unnecessary costs and may be harmful to the engine operation T Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze which provides e Corrosion protection e Freeze protection e Boiling protection by increasing the boiling point The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately 35 F 37 C and corro sion protection T Add premixed coolant solution only Adding water and MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze separately from each other could cause engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Technical data If the antifreeze mixture is effective to 35 F 37 C the boiling point of the cool ant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266 F 130 C The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil over protec tion Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval The replacement interval
483. pressed and held The tilt sliding sunroof is opened and closed electrically The switch for the tilt sliding sunroof is located on the overhead control panel P54 25 5538 31 Sunroof switch 1 Push back to slide sunroof open 2 Push forward to slide sunroof closed 3 Push up to raise sunroof at rear 4 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear With the sunroof closed or tilted open a screen can be slid into the roof opening to guard against sun rays When sliding the sunroof open the screen will also retract gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 Opening and closing gt To open close raise or lower the tilt sliding sunroof move the sunroof switch to the resistance point in the required direction of arrows to gt page 252 gt Release the sunroof switch when the tilt sliding sunroof has reached the de sired position Fully opening Express open and closing Express close gt To fully open or close the tilt sliding sunroof move the sunroof switch past the resistance point in the required direction of arrows Q to 2 gt page 252 and release The tilt sliding sunroof opens or closes completely Stopping the power tilt sliding sunroof during Express open gt Move the sunroof switch in any direc tion The movement of the tilt sliding sun roof stops f the movement of the tilt sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure the tilt sliding sunroof wil
484. properly inserted into buckle The ETDs for the rear outer seats second row seats or rear seats third row seats will activate with or without the respective seat belt fastened Safety and Security Occupant safety In an impact emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body Belt force limiters when activated are employed to help reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash Warning AN A pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Device ETD that was activated must be replaced When disposing of the pyrotechnic emer gency tensioning device our safety instruc tions must be followed These are available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Active head restraint The active head restraints are intended to offer the driver and front passenger increased protection from whiplash type injuries In the event of a rear end collision the active head restraints on the drivers and front passenger s seats are designed to move forward in the direction of travel providing the head with increased support earlier on in the collision sequence The active head restraints move forward whether the seat is occupied or not Warning A N Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere
485. proximately 60 miles 100 km at moderate speeds Regularly check the tires and rims for damage Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss or damage to the tire beads If vehicle is heavily loaded check tire inflation pressure and correct as required Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths of less than We in 3 mm When replacing individual tires you should mount new tires on the front wheels first on vehicles with same sized wheels all around Tire care and maintenance A Regularly check the tires for damage Dam aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss As a result you could lose control of your vehicle Warning Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month For more informa tion on checking tire inflation pressure see Recommended tire inflation pres sure gt page 393 Operation Tire inspection Every time you check your tire inflation pressure you should also inspect your tires for the following e excessive treadwear gt page 386 e cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber e bumps bulges cuts cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions Make sure you
486. published in the Maintenance booklet is only applicable if MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze solu tion or other Mercedes Benz approved products of equal specification are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level For information on other Mercedes Benz approved products of equal specification refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet USA only or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Fuels coolants lubricants To provide important corrosion protection the solution must be at least 50 anticor rosion antifreeze equivalent to freeze protection to approximately 35 F 37 C If you use a solution that is more than 55 anticorrosion antifreeze freeze protection to approximately 49 F 45 C the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution Therefore do not use more than this amount of anticorro sion antifreeze If the coolant level is low water and MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level have cooling system checked for signs of leakage Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instruc tions The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water If you are not sure about the water quality con sult an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Technical data
487. r gt Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal Warning A N When the ABS is malfunctioning the BAS the ESP and the 4 ETS are also switched off The basic driving and braking functions are still available When the ABS is malfunctioning the wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability and extending the brak ing distance Warning A N The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can pre vent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others Off road ABS With the off road driving program switched on page 277 or with the transmission in LOW RANGE mode gt page 201 the ABS designed for off road use is automati cally activated When applying the brakes at speeds below approximately 18 mph 30 km h the front wheels are locked cyclically to short en the braking distance dig in effect This affects steering the vehicle For more information see Practical hints g
488. r SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the remote tailgate switch can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Locking and unlocking gt Press remote tailgate switch Q gt page 124 until tailgate begins to close The tailgate closes While the tailgate is closing an acoustic signal sounds To interrupt the closing procedure gt Press or pull remote tailgate switch gt page 124 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Closing the tailgate from the outside You can close the tailgate from the outside using the tailgate closing switch or the button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO In vehicles with KEYLESS GO you can also simulta neously lock the vehicle If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing e g luggage that has been piled too high the closing procedure vehicles with KEYLESS GO is stopped and the tailgate reopens Tailgate closing switch gt Press tailgate closing switch Q or the button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO briefly The tailgate closes and an acoustic warning sounds Warning A N Vehicles without KEYLESS
489. r is divided into five yellow and two red distance segments for either side of the vehicle The Parktronic system is operational when the readiness indicators 3 are illuminated The current transmission position deter mines which warning indicator will be acti vated Automatic trans mission position Warning indicator D Front area activated RorN Front and rear area activated P Neither activated As your vehicle approaches an object one or more distance segments will illuminate depending on the distance When the seventh red distance segment illuminates you have reached the minimum distance e Front area An intermittent acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second red distance segment The signal is canceled when the automatic transmission Is set to position P or the parking brake Is set e Rear area An intermittent acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second red distance segment The signal is canceled when the automatic transmission is set to position D P or the parking brake is set Controls in detail Driving systems Switching the Parktronic system on off You can switch off the Parktronic system
490. r lamps see Tail lamps Rear panorama roof Sunshade 212 Rear seat head restraints see Head restraints Rear towing eye 541 Rear view camera 293 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Rear window defroster 212 Rear window wiper washer 64 Rear windows see Power windows Rear wiper blade 517 Recommended tire inflation pressure 417 Recovery services Stolen vehicle Tele Aid 338 Refrigerant Air conditioning 564 Refueling 374 Regular checks 376 Reminder Seat belt see Seat belts Telltale Remote control SmartKey 112 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Remote door unlock Tele Aid 337 es Replacing bulbs 504 Additional turn signals Exterior rear view mirrors 9511 Backup lamps 504 505 511 Brake lamps 504 505 511 Corner illuminating front fog lamps 504 505 510 Fog lamp Rear 504 505 511 Fog lamps Front 504 505 510 High beam headlamps 504 505 508 License plate lamps 504 505 514 Low beam headlamps 504 505 507 Parking standing lamps 504 505 509 511 513 Side marker lamps Front 504 505 507 510 Side marker lamps Rear 504 505 511 513 Taillamps 504 505 511 513 Turn signal lamps Front 504 505 509 Turn signal lamps Rear 504 505 511 513 Reporting safety defects 19 Research Octane Number see RON Reset button In instrument cluster 169 Reset tool Active head restraints Depository 500 Residual heat and ventilation 225 241 Reverse gear position Automatic transmission 189 Rims 417 555 Roadside
491. r on a hill gt Set the parking brake gt Shift into park position P Maneuvering When you maneuver in tight areas e g when pulling into a parking space gt Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes Accelerate gently Never abruptly step on the accelerator Rocking the vehicle Rocking the vehicle by shifting between drive position D and reverse gear R can help free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow The engine control system of this vehicle electronically limits shifting between drive position D and reverse gear R to very low speeds i e approximately 5 mph 9 km h To shift between drive position D and reverse gear R move the gear selector lever past the resistance point up or down Working on the vehicle Warning A N When working on the vehicle set the parking brake and shift to park position P Otherwise the vehicle could roll away Hill start assist system Warning A N The hill start assist system is not designed to function as a parking brake and does not prevent the vehicle from moving when parked on an incline Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to park position P On uphill grades with a gradient angle of more than 5 the hill start assist system maintains the pressure in the brake sys tem for approximately 1 second after you have released the brake pedal Therefore you can start off smoothly without the vehicle moving immediately after rel
492. r phone if installed inserted in cradle switches off If you must use this phone we rec ommend that you use it only with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Remove the phone from the cradle and place the call The naviga tion system if engaged will continue to run The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken commands are only avail able by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND system A pop up window will appear in the COMAND system display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress After the Tele Aid call has ended the optional cellular phone inserted in the cradle switches on again A PIN entry might be necessary System self check Initially after switching on the ignition malfunctions are detected and indicated the indicator lamps in the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button and the Information button stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on The message Tele Aid Inoperative appears in the multifunction display A If the indicator lamps on the SOS button on the Roadside Assistance button and or on the Information button remain illuminated continuously in red and or the message Tele Aid Inoperative is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self check a malfunction in the system has been detected Warning If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above the system may not operate as expected Have the system checked at the neare
493. r to lose control of the vehicle Warning Controls in detail Memory function The memory button and stored position buttons are located on the entry side of each front seat base M Memory bu 1 2 3 tton Stored position buttons Controls in detail Memory function Storing positions into memory Adjust the seats gt page 45 On the driver s side additionally adjust the steering wheel gt page 50 and ex terior rear view mirrors gt page 51 to the desired positions Press memory button M Release memory button M and press stored position button 1 2 or 3 within 3 seconds All settings are stored to the selected position Recalling positions from memory T Do not operate the power seats using memory button M if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats Move seat backrest to an upright position first gt Press and hold stored position button 1 2 or 3 until the seat steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors have fully moved to the stored posi tions Releasing the stored position button stops movement to the stored positions immediately Y Lighting For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals see Switching on headlamps gt page 61 and Turn signals gt page 62 fyou drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the
494. ration mode In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location gt Shift to park position P gt Turn off the engine gt Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting v Restart the engine Shift to drive position D for second gear or reverse gear R gt Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Vv Transfer case T Operational or performance test must only be conducted on a two axle dynamometer If such tests are necessary contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty T Because the ESP operates automatically the engine and ignition must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 0 or 1 when testing the parking brake on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty i The vehicle is equipped with permanent four wheel drive Both the front and rear axles are powered at all times when the vehicle is being operated Controls in detail LOW RANGE mode The LOW RANGE mode is available on vehi cles with en
495. rative The cruise control is malfunctioning gt Have cruise control checked by an SPEEDTRONIC authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Cruise Control MPH You have attempted to set a speed Accelerate to a speed exceeding while driving below 20 mph 20 mph 30 km h and set the 30 km h speed gt page 255 The ESP is switched off gt Switch on the ESP gt page 103 The automatic transmission is setto gt Set the automatic transmission to position P R or N position D gt page 191 The vehicle is secured with the gt Release the parking brake parking brake gt page 59 Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution DISTRONIC PH You have attempted to seta speed gt Accelerate to a speed exceeding 20 mph while driving below 20 mph 30 km h and set the speed gt page 260 30 km h y The ESP is switched off Switch on the ESP gt page 106 The automatic transmission is setto gt Set the automatic transmission to position P R or N position D gt page 191 The vehicle is secured with the gt Release the parking brake gt page 59 parking brake Inoperative The Distronic or the Distronic gt Have the system checked by an authorized display are malfunctioning Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Override You have accelerated The gt Stop accelerating Distronic has switched off Practical hints What to do if
496. rcedes Benz Light Truck Center where you will receive comprehen sive information also on permissible tech nical modifications and where proper installation will be performed Introduction Operator s Manual This Operator s Manual contains a great deal of useful information We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle we urge you to follow the in structions and warnings contained in this manual Ignoring them could result in dam age to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others Vehicle damage caused by fail ure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual Therefore you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures We continuously strive to improve our product and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore infor mation illustrations and descriptions in this Operator s Manual might differ from your vehicle Optional equipment is also described in this manual including operating instruc tions wherever necessary Since they are special
497. re Monitoring System TPMS USA only 398 TPMS malfunction telltale 444 Traction 352 414 418 Tread 418 Tread depth 386 420 Treadwear indicators 418 Vehicle maximum load on 418 Wear pattern 419 Winter tires 420 Tongue Weight Rating see TWR Tools 490 Top tether Children in the vehicle 96 Towing Trailer 197 364 367 Towing eye bolt 540 Towing the vehicle 540 542 Tow starting 536 538 Traction 414 418 4 ETS Driving safety systems 101 107 Trailer Attaching 366 Checking weights 366 Electrical connections 365 Hitch 364 Loading 365 Towing 364 367 Weights and ratings 365 Transfer case 201 LOW RANGE mode 201 Switching LOW RANGE mode 202 Transmission gear selector lever see Gear selector lever Transmission position indicator 155 Transmission positions 192 Transmission see Automatic transmission Traveling abroad 370 Tread 418 Tread depth 386 420 Treadwear indicators 418 Trip computer 184 Trip odometer resetting 153 Turn signal lamps Cleaning lenses 429 Messages in the multifunction display 482 Replacing bulbs 505 Turn signals 62 Additional in mirrors 505 Bulbs 505 513 Cleaning lenses 429 Indicator lamps 27 Turning off the engine 69 TWR Tongue Weight Rating 418 U Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 418 Units Settings Speedometer 173 Temperature 173 Unleaded gasoline Premium 563 Unlocking the vehicle see Key Uphill driving Cruise control 257 Upholstery Cleaning and care of 434 Useful fea
498. reader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced The TIN is a unique identifier which facili tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identification mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture C DOT 2 Manufacturer s identification mark 3 Tire size 4 Tire type code at the option of the tire manufacturer Date of manufacture a For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol C gt page 411 which denotes the tire meets require ments of the U S Department of Transpor tation Manufacturer s identification mark The manufacturer s identification mark 2 gt page 411 denotes the tire manufacturer New tires have a mark with two symbols Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym bols For more information on retreaded tires see gt page 384 Tire size The code 8 gt page 411 indicates the tire size Operation Tires and wheels Tire type code The code gt page 411 may at the option of the manufacturer be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire
499. rection of the arrow Remove the seat cover to reach under the seats Installing seat cover gt Fold the seat halfway in or out gt page 305 Put the seat cover back into place using the guide pins Press the seat cover down until it engages Make sure that the seat cover is engaged properly by folding the seat all the way in and out Heated steering wheel The steering wheel heating warms up the leather area of the steering wheel The stalk is on the lower left hand side of the steering wheel C Switching on 2 Indicator lamp 3 Switching off Controls in detail Switching on gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 gt Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the direction of arrow Q The steering wheel is heated Indicator lamp 2 comes on amp The steering wheel heating is turned off tem porarily and the indicator lamp 2 remains on when e the temperature of the vehicle interior is above 86 F 30 C e the temperature of the steering wheel is above 95 F 35 C When these conditions do not apply anymore steering wheel heating continues Useful features Switching off gt Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the direction of arrow The heated steering wheel is switched off Indicator lamp 2 goes out a Indicator lamp 2 flashes or goes out e incase of power surge or undervoltage e incase of a steering wheel heating malfunc tion Ge The steering wheel
500. red by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant R 134a HFC refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system T Never use R 12 CFC or mineral based lubricating oil Otherwise damage to the system will occur Brake fluid A During vehicle operation the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere Under extremely strenuous operating conditions this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing the system s efficiency Warning Therefore the brake fluid must be replaced regularly Refer to your vehicle s Maintenance Booklet for replacement inter val Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes Benz is recommended Any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will provide you with additional information Premium unleaded gasoline gasoline engine AN Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury Warning Never allow sparks flame or smoking mate rials near gasoline Turn off the engine before refueling Whenever you are around gasoline avoid in haling fumes and skin or clothing contact extinguish all smoking materials Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha lation of fuel vapors are damaging to your health Technical data Ba To maintain the engine s dura
501. remote control that came with the ga rage door opener gate operator or other device You may need it for use in other vehicles for fu ture programming of an integrated remote con trol or simply for continued use as a hand held remote control to operate the respective device in other situations Reprogramming a single signal trans mitter button To program a device using a signal trans mitter button previously trained follow these steps gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 gt Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button or Do not release the button gt Indicator lamp will begin to flash af ter 20 seconds Without releasing the signal transmitter button proceed with programming starting with step 3 Operation of integrated remote control gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 gt Select and press the appropriate inte grated signal transmitter button 3 or to activate the remote con trolled device The integrated remote control trans mitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed up to 20 seconds Erasing the integrated remote control memory gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 gt Simultaneously press and hold outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and for approximately 20 seconds until indicator lamp Q flashes rapidly Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds The codes of all three channels are erased a Ifyou s
502. rette lighter Open the ashtray gt page 322 Push in cigarette lighter The cigarette lighter will pop out auto matically when hot Useful features Bg The lighter socket can accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories up to a maximum of 180 W designed for use with the standard cigarette lighter plug type Keep in mind how ever that connecting accessories to the lighter socket for example extensive connecting and disconnecting or using plugs that do not fit prop erly can damage the lighter socket With the socket damaged the lighter may no longer be able to be placed in the heating pushed in posi tion or the lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not hot enough To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter socket we recommend connecting 12V DC elec trical accessories designed for use with the stan dard cigarette lighter plug type to the 12V power outlets gt page 324 in your vehicle whenever possible i If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is being used extensively the vehicle battery may become discharged Controls in detail Useful features Power outlets i If you use all power outlets in the vehicle make sure that the maximum current drawn does not exceed 55 A i The power outlets can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories e g auxiliary lamps up to a maximum of 240 W If the engine is off the battery may become dis charged if
503. revent service fluids from coming into direct contact with your skin or clothing If a service fluid is swallowed contact a physician immediately Fuels coolants lubricants etc Approved engine oils Approved engine oils MB Automatic Transmission Fluid MB Automatic Transmission Fluid MB Automatic Transmission Fluid Hypoid gear oll Hypoid gear oll Hypoid gear oil MB Power Steering Fluid or approved Dexron III ATF Model Front wheel hubs All models Brake system All models Cooling system GL 320 CDI GL 450 GL 550 Fuel Tank All models including a reserve of Air conditioning system All models Windshield washer system All models and headlamp cleaning system Data preliminary Technical data Capacity approx 1 5 oz 43 g each approx 10 0 US qt 9 5 I approx 10 6 US qt 10 0 1 approx 12 7 US qt 12 0 I 26 4 US gal 100 0 I approx 3 4 US gal 13 0 I 8 1 US qt 7 71 Fuels coolants lubricants Fuels coolants lubricants etc High temperature roller bearing grease MB Brake Fluid DOT 4 MB Anticorrosion Antifreeze MB Anticorrosion Antifreeze MB Anticorrosion Antifreeze Gasoline engine Premium unleaded gasoline Minimum Posted Octane 91 Avg of 96 RON 86 MON Diesel engine ULTRA LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM R 134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil never R 12 MB Windshield Washer Concentrate 2 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentr
504. ring The maximum permissible weight per cargo tie down ring is 331 Ib 150 kg Controls in detail Loading Hooks Two hooks are located on the rear com partment trim panels one on each side 1 Hook Use the hooks to secure light weight items only The maximum permissible weight per hook is 9 Ib 4 kg Expanding cargo compartment You can separately fold the left and right rear seat backrests to expand the cargo compartment A When expanding the cargo compartment always fully fold the corresponding seats and if so equipped always use the cargo net gt page 312 when transporting cargo Warning Unless you are transporting cargo the back rests must remain properly locked in the up right position In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle Always use the cargo tie down rings gt page 302 Warning A N Never drive the vehicle with the tailgate open Deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in un consciousness and death T When the second row seats are folded for ward the front seats may not be moved to the rearmost position Otherwise you could damage the front and second row seats Controls in detail Loading Expanding cargo compartment in part Two buttons are located on
505. risk is to never place a child in a rear fac ing child restraint in the front seat We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear facing child restraint in the back seat If you must install a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat be cause circumstances require you to do so make sure that the indicator lamp is illumi nated indicating that the front passen ger front air bag is deactivated Should the indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed please check installation Periodically check the indicator lamp while driving to make sure the lamp is illumi nated If the indicator lamp goes out or remains out do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired A child in a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be serious ly injured or even killed if the front pas senger front air bag inflates e If you have to place a child in a forward facing child restraint on the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recommended for the age size and weight of the child and se cure child restraint with the vehicle s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions For children larger than the typical 12 month old child the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated gt page 82 Warning Infants and
506. rk position P automatically Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the SmartKey alone only will automatically shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N Turning off with KEYLESS GO gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 43 to turn off the engine With the driver s door closed the start er switch is now in position 1 With the driver s door opened the starter switch is set to position 0 same as SmartKey removed from starter switch gt page 41 a In an emergency you can turn off the engine while driving by pressing and holding the KEYLESS GO start stop button for approximately 3 seconds T If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open a front door the automatic transmission will shift to park position P automatically Keep in mind that turning off the engine using the KEYLESS GO start stop button alone only will automatically shift the automatic transmis sion to neutral position N Getting started Parking and locking If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button and can not turn it off as described above gt Remove the KEYLESS GO start stop button from the starter switch gt Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO into the starter switch The engine turns off The starter switch is in position O gt page 41 Getting started Parking and locking Releasing seat belts gt Press the seat belt
507. rol panel 1 Override switch For more information on power windows see Power windows gt page 246 Safety and Security Occupant safety Disabling gt Press override switch until it engag es The switch engages in the recessed position The rear door windows can no longer be operated using the switches located in the rear doors i Operating the rear door windows using the switches located on the door control panel of the driver s door is still possible Enabling gt Press override switch Q once more The switch disengages from its recessed position back to its original position The rear door windows can again be operated using the switches located in the rear doors Safety and Security Panic alarm P80 00 2117 31 button USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interf
508. rque of 110 lb ft 150 Nm Warning AN Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 110 Ib ft 150 Nm gt Store jack and all other vehicle tool kit items back into the storage well a The removed road wheel cannot be stored in the spare wheel well under the cargo compart ment floor but should be transported in the car go compartment wrapped in a protective cover Vehicles with TPMS or Advanced TPMS Do not activate the tire inflation pressure moni tor until a full size wheel tire with functioning sensor has been placed back into service on the vehicle Bleeding the fuel system diesel engine only Y Bleeding the fuel system diesel engine only Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is empty is not recommended Otherwise air may be sucked into the fuel system If this happens the ase malfunction indicator lamp USA only or the ge malfunction indicator lamp Canada only comes on and the engine may not start immediately after refueling the vehicle After refueling gt Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P The gear position indicator in the multi function display should be on P gt Do not depress the accelerator i Vehicles with KEYLESS GO If necessary remove the KEYLESS GO start stop button from the starter switch gt page 43 gt Turnthe SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 for
509. rrow same as with the SmartKey 4 Clip with pin insert gt Move the front passenger seat to the removed from the starter switch Pull pin out of clip in direction of most forward and upward position gt Enter the rear passenger compartment arrow again gt page 46 again gt Pull clip with pin outwards gt Switch off the ignition gt page 42 gt Remove air channel by pulling it out in direction of arrow Battery pe Step 5 Disconnecting Step 6 Disconnecting Step 7 Removing Protection cover 7 Positive terminal 9 Battery ventilation hose 6 Battery Negative terminal Attachment nut gt Unclip protection cover from gt Disconnect battery negative lead Mounting battery and remove it from negative terminal gt Remove the battery ventilation gt Remove positive terminal cover hose by pulling it out Disconnect the battery positive gt o and remove attachment lead 7 nuts gt Remove mounting 11 Practical hints Battery Step 8 Removing 2 Battery gt Tilt the battery 2 with the negative terminal side upwards gt Take out the battery maintaining its tilted position in the direction of the arrow Step 9 Reinstalling gt Carry out step 8 in reverse order gt page 534 T The battery the battery ventilation hose 9 and the lateral plug 3 gt page 534 must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation
510. rt function Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it again immediately The engine then starts auto matically Getting started Diesel engine gt Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P gt page 155 Do not depress the accelerator Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 gt page 42 Preglow indicator lamp gg in the instrument cluster comes on gt As soon as preglow indicator lamp gol goes out turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 gt page 42 and release it The engine starts automatically a If the engine is at operating temperature preglow indicator lamp gj may not stay on and you can Start the engine without preglowing Starting with KEYLESS GO A As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in your vehicle the vehicle can be started Therefore never leave children unattended in the vehicle as they could otherwise acci dentally start the engine Warning When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle You can start your vehicle without the SmartKey in the starter switch using the KEYLESS GO start stop button in the starter switch The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located in the vehicle Getting started
511. rting the engine or comes on while driving refer to Lamps in instrument cluster gt page 436 Ge If you now press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once more the power supply is again switched off When you switch on the ignition the indicator and warning lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indica tor lamps unless activated in the instrument cluster come on The indicator and warning lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated should go out when the engine is running This indicates that the respective systems are operational For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS GO start stop button see Starting with KEYLESS GO gt page 57 For more information on KEYLESS GO see SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 115 Vv Adjusting Warning A N All seat head restraint steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fas tening of seat belts must be done before the vehicle is put into motion Seats Warning AN Do not adjust the driver s seat while driving Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck T
512. rvice advisor will record each service in the booklet for you Roadside Assistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown Calls to the toll free Roadside Assistance number 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA 1 800 387 0100 in Canada will be answered by Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day 365 days a year Roadside Assistance will be provided in accordance with standard program guide lines which include providing service to the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a paved roadway We will make every effort to assist in a breakdown situation howev er the accessibility of your vehicle will be determined by our authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center techni cian or the tow service provider on a case by case basis and may be a factor in our ability to respond Additional charges may be applicable for a breakdown location determined not to be a reasonably accessible roadside location as determined by our authorized technician and tow service provider For additional information refer to the Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio Change of address or ownership If you change your address be sure to send in the Change of Address Notice found in the Service and Warranty Informa tion Booklet or simply call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center
513. s ESP recognizes when the trailer starts swaying and will apply the brakes to re duce the vehicle speed to a non critical speed that allows the vehicle trailer combi nation to stabilize The ESP Trailer Stabilization is functional at vehicle speeds above approximately 40 mph 65 km h when the ESP is switched on Warning A N The system will not be able to assist when the trailer jackknifes e on wet or icy roads e on roads with slippery surface e in sand or gravel Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip over before the system recognizes swaying of the trailer id If the ESP has switched off due to a mal function ESP cannot stabilize the rig EBP The EBP enhances braking effectiveness by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking effort without a loss of vehicle stability Warning A N If the EBP is malfunctioning the brake sys tem is still functioning However the rear wheels may lock during hard braking caus ing you to lose control over the vehicle and possibly causing an accident Adjust your driving style to the non operating status of the EBP For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 438 and gt page 468 Safety and Security 4 ETS The 4 Electronic Traction System 4 ETS improves the vehicle s ability to utilize available traction especially under slippery road conditions The brakes are applied to the spinnin
514. s Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Reporting safety defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Mercedes Benz USA LLC If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Mercedes Benz USA LLC To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9 153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov introduction Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices Including notice pursuant to California Code 9951 Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and if equipped with the Tele Aid system may transmit some data in certain accidents This information helps for example to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety DaimlerChrysler may access the i
515. s including those resulting from excessive speed in turns fol lowing another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabili ties of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others T Operational or performance test must only be conducted on a two axle dynamometer If such tests are necessary contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty T Because the ESP operates automatically the engine and ignition must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 0 or 1 when testing the parking brake on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Gb The ESP will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size gt page 555 For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 441 and gt page 457 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Switching off the ESP When the ESP is switched off and one or more drive wheels ar
516. s in detail Control system Setting locator lighting With the locator lighting feature activated the exterior lamp switch in position Bg gt page 143 and the interior lighting in au tomatic mode gt page 150 the following lamps will switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked using button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps e Front fog lamps The locator lighting switches off when the driver s door is opened If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds gt gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu Press button BeN or Ref repeatedly until the message Surround Lighting Function appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Press button or E to switch the locator lighting function On or Off Turn the exterior lamp switch to position A when exiting the vehicle The locator lighting feature is activated Setting night security illumination Headlamps delayed shut off Use this function to set whether you would like the exterior lamps to remain on for 15 seconds during darkness after exiting the vehicle and closing all doors With the headlamps delayed shut off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in po
517. s lose their ability to steer the vehicle Driving through water P00 00 3776 31 1 Fording depth Vehicles with air suspension program Raised level 20 00 in 50 cm Vehicles with enhanced off road package Off road 3 level Off road 2 level Off road 1 level 23 60 in 60 cm 20 00 in 50 cm 20 00 in 50 cm e Before driving through water deter mine its depth E The water depth must not exceed the respective value listed in the table The ground under the water might not be firm which could result the water being deeper than expected when driving the vehicle through it Please note that the water level is correspondingly lower for flowing water e Select the highest vehicle level possible gt page 279 e Switch to off road driving program gt page 277 or LOW RANGE mode gt page 201 before driving through water e Shift automatic transmission to position 1 or 2 gt page 197 e Avoid high engine speeds e Enter and leave the water only at a shallow spot driving at walking speed T Never accelerate before driving into the water The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment thus damaging them e Drive through the water slowly and at a constant speed Operation e Do not stop vehicle while immersed in water and do not shut off the engine i Do not open any of the vehicle s doors while driving through water Water could otherwise en ter th
518. s rise This prevents inaccurate tem perature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving Vv Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 gt page 42 or as soon as the KEYLESS GO start stop but ton is in position 1 gt page 44 The con trol system enables you to e call up information about your vehicle e change vehicle settings For example you can use the control sys tem to find out when your vehicle is next due for maintenance service to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster display and much more Warning A N A driver s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others se lecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions per mit it to be done safely Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximate ly 14 m every second The control system relays information to the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system Multifunction display 1 EE Miles 2 ATE 4 72 F N 4 P54 37 4BA 1 Trip odometer 2 Main odometer 3 Transmission position indicator 4 Status indicator outside temperature
519. s the engine Is run ning It monitors the vehicle s traction force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface and handling The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output the ESP works to stabilize the vehicle The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces The ESP also helps stabilize the vehicle during braking and steering maneuvers The ESP warning lamp in the instru ment cluster gt page 26 flashes when the ESP is engaged The ESP warning lamp in the instru ment cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning A N Never switch off the ESP when you see the ESP warning lamp flashing in the in strument cluster In this case proceed as follows e While driving off apply as little throttle as possible e While driving ease up on the accelera tor e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The ESP cannot prevent accidents result ing from excessive speed Warning A N The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The ESP cannot prevent accident
520. s this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning A N Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor rectly restrained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one per son at a time Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes Benz Do not make any modifications to the seat belts This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to failure Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A N USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY Seat belts can only work when used properly Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this sec tion as that
521. saesematonss 420 SNOW CNAINS ccccssesccceesesceeeeees 421 MaINteNANCE csccccesssccceeeecceeaees 422 Maintenance service indicator MCSSASC innsinn eka E 422 Calling up the maintenance service indicator display 424 Resetting the maintenance service indicator eeccceeeeceeeeee 424 Vehicle CALC ccccessscccessecceessccneaees 425 Cleaning and care of the vehicle 425 Practical hints ccceeeeeeeees 435 Watto do iT socutouedrectacsoscscastismacetceetues 436 Lamps in instrument cluster 436 Lamp in center console 447 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 449 Where will find 2 eeeeecceeceeeeeeees 490 FIPS GIG Kisirani an 490 Vehicle tool kit 490 Spare WNEE cccesecceseeeeseeeees 494 Unlocking locking in an emergency 496 Unlocking the vehicle 06 496 Locking the vehicle ccceee 497 Fuel filler flap cecccesseceeeeees 497 Resetting activated head restraints Vehicles without Rear seat entertainment system 499 Vehicles with Rear seat entertainment system 500 Replacing SmartKey batteries 502 Replacing bulbs nssseesssenssseesseeess 504 PUID Seese rqosassaniactecardareats 504 Replacing bulbs for front lamps 507 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps 511 Adjusting headlamp aim
522. se gear R to select neutral position N gt Release the brake pedal Shifting procedure The automatic transmission selects indi vidual gears automatically depending on e drive position D page 192 with gear ranges gt page 197 e the position of the accelerator pedal gt page 195 e the vehicle speed T Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty With drive position D selected you can use the steering wheel gearshift control buttons gt page 198 to influence trans mission shifting by e limiting the gear range e changing gears manually Transmission positions The current transmission position appears in the multifunction display 1 Current transmission position BE ifthe current transmission position does not appear in the multifunction display due to a malfunction for example make sure that the automatic transmission Is in the desired position by carefully driving off with the transmission in drive position D Do not limit the gear range Effect Park position Shift into park position P only when vehicle is st
523. seat active head restraints 133 Anti theft SysteMms ccccssssccceeeees 109 Rear seats ves eavenvnnveswasddanerstewnaes 133 Immobilizer re 109 Lumbar SUPPOFT cccceeeceeeees 137 Anti theft alarm system 109 Multicontour seat s 138 Seat heating cccsesscecssescenes 138 Seat ventilation eee ee eee 140 Control SYSLOIM essospedesss atara ciate eroens Multifunction display 006 Multifunction steering wheel Standard display menu AUDIO Menu ccseeseceeeeeeeees NAV MenU ssesssessssessseessseesssseesss Off road MENU sssceccceeeeseees DISTRONIC menu Canada Only cseeccccsseseeeneeees Vehicle status message Memory MENU ccceeeeeeceeceeeeees Settings MENU cccsessceceeseees Vehicle configuration 06 Trip computer MeNU 00cc00 TEEEMENU eenia aa Automatic tranSMISSION cccceeees Gear selector lever Shifting procedure 0ecceee Transmission positions 4 DIVINE TID S arare a Gear ranges ccseseccccesssecseeeeees Steering wheel gearshift control Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 0000 TFANSTOR CASO naria a E 201 LOW RANGE mode ceses 201 Differential IOCKS T mican 204 A few words about differentials and differential lockS 204 Switching differential locks 205
524. sed level at speeds up to 40 mph 64 km h At higher speeds the message Level Selection Not Permitted appears in the multifunction dis play gt Start the engine gt page 41 If indicator lamp 2 gt page 281 is off gt Press switch Q gt page 281 Indicator lamp 2 flashes The vehicle adjusts to the raised level The following message appears in the mul tifunction display while the level is being set Compass 7 The message can be cleared by pressing the f IA or button BN on the multifunction steering wheel When the raised level is reached indicator lamp 2 gt page 281 comes on continu ously and the following message appears in the multifunction display for 5 seconds Raised Level Compass Highway level kg Keep in mind that in rough or uneven roads adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact with the road and result in damage to the vehicle un derbody Always make sure the vehicle has suffi cient ground clearance before adjusting it to a lower level gt Start the engine gt page 41 If indicator lamp 2 gt page 281 is on gt Press switch Q gt page 281 Indicator lamp flashes The vehicle adjusts to the highway level The following message appears in the multifunction display while the level is being set Being lowered Compass NE aD The message can be cleared by pressing the BA or button
525. senger side You can switch off the air supply for the rear zone You can switch off the supplied amount of air volume gt Press button gt page 226 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control GI GIO Gee 0000 Driver s door air vent fixed Left side air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side and door air vent Windshield air vents Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent Left center air vent adjustable Right center air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side and door air vent Right side air vent adjustable Front passenger door air vent fixed Automatic climate control panel Footwell air vents Q For draft free ventilation move the sliders for center air vents and side air vents to the middle position Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control CISIOl VO S Cle Temperature control left Air distribution and air volume automatic manual Air distribution driver s side Front defroster Increasing air volume Rear window defroster Air distribution passenger side Rear automatic climate control on off fete USA only Canada only Temperature control right OB P OOOO OOOO
526. severe injury or death Warning Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and very explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding causing personal injury Read all instructions before proceeding If the battery is discharged the engine can be started with jumper cables and the bat tery of another vehicle Observe the follow ing e Jump starting should only be performed using the jump start contacts located in the engine compartment gt page 537 e Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold e Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen Let the battery thaw out first e Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating 12 V Jump start ing with a higher voltage battery could damage the vehicle s electrical system which will not be covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty e Only use jumper cables with sufficient cross section and insulated terminal clamps Vehicles with gasoline engine onl
527. sition Bij before the engine is turned off the following lamps will switch on when the engine is turned off e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps e Front fog lamps If after turning off the engine you do not open a door or do not close an opened door the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu Press button J or Ref repeatedly until the message Headlamp Delayed Shut off appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Headlamp Delayed Shut off O OFF OF gt Press button or E to switch the headlamps delayed shut off feature On or Off Controls in detail Turn the exterior lamp switch to position EG before turning off the engine The headlamps delayed shut off feature is activated You can temporarily deactivate the headlamps delayed shut off feature gt Before exiting the vehicle turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 Then turn it to position 2 and back to 0 The headlamps delayed shut off feature is deactivated It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Press KEYLESS GO start stop button in the starter switch gt page 43 Control system Setting interior lighting delayed shut off Use this function to set whether you woul
528. sk of accident to you and other drivers Driving instructions Off road driving increases strain on the vehicle We recommend that you inspect the vehi cle for possible damage after each off road trip Recognizing any damage and a subse quent timely repair reduces the chance of a possible breakdown or accident later on Proceed as follows e Switch off the off road driving program gt page 278 or the LOW RANGE mode gt page 201 e Switch off the DSR gt page 274 e Set the differential locks to AUTO gt page 205 e Lower the vehicle back to a level suitable for road conditions e g High way High speed level gt page 279 e Clean all exterior lamps and check for possible damage Operation Driving instructions e Clean the front and rear license plate e Remove excessive dirt from tires wheels wheel housings and under body For instance after driving in mud clean the radiator chassis engine brakes and wheels from extreme dirt using a strong jet of water e Check tires for possible damage e Inspect vehicle underbody oil pan brake hoses etc as well as vehicle un derbody for possible damage e Check for brush or branches caught in the underbody BE Brush or branches could increase the possi bility of a fire as well as cut fuel and or brake lines puncture rubber bellows of the axles or drive shafts e After continued operation in mud sand water or other d
529. spension 278 Clock 174 Comfort functions 181 Control system menus 158 160 Control system submenus 159 161 171 Date 161 171 174 Daytime running lamp mode 175 Factory SmartKey 114 Factory SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 118 Individual Vehicle 168 Instrument cluster 172 Language multifunction display 172 173 Lighting 175 Memory function 141 Resetting all Control system 169 Selective SmartKey 114 Selective SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 119 Time 174 Vehicle configuration 182 Vehicle level control 279 Shifting Automatic transmission Side impact airbags 80 Side marker lamps Cleaning lenses 429 Messages in the multifunction display 480 Replacing bulbs 510 513 Side windows see Power windows Sidewall 417 SmartKey see Key SmartKey SmartKey see Key SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Snow chains 421 Snow tires see Winter tires Spare wheel 494 Mounting 520 Wheel bolts 492 525 Speed settings Cruise control 257 Distronic 266 Speedometer 27 263 56 189 Spinning see Tires Direction of rotation SRS 88 Indicator lamp 29 446 Messages in the multifunction display 446 Standing lamps 143 Replacing bulbs 504 505 509 511 513 Standing water Driving through 360 Starter switch 25 42 Positions 42 Starting difficulties Engine 59 Starting Engine 56 Steep terrain Driving 358 Steering column 49 50 Steering wheel 48 Adjustment Electrically 50 Adjustment Manually 49 Buttons 30 156 Cleaning 433 Steering wheel
530. ss button or repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the multifunction display Settings To reset press reset button For 3 seconds Controls in detail Control system The following settings and submenus are Resetting all settings The settings you have changed will not be available in the Settings menu reset unless you confirm the action by pressing You can reset the functions of all the reset button a second time submenus to the factory settings Function Page l After approximately 5 seconds the Settings Resetting all settings 169 gt Press the reset button in the instru menu reappears in the multifunction display ment cluster gt page 152 for gt page 168 Submenus in the settings menu 170 approximately 3 seconds a gt For safety reasons the function Instrument cluster submenu ve The request to press the reset button Lamp Circuit Headlamp in the Lighting Time Date submenu 174 once more to confirm appears in the submenu cannot be reset while driving Lighting submenu 175 multifunction display The following message appears in the multifunc tion display Vehicle submenu 178 saa A Settings Comfort submenu 181 Reset to y4 Cannot be Factory settings completely reset MY To confirm TH 1 to factory settings press reset button j while driving _ _ _ _ eee ft gt Press the reset button once more The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings
531. ssistance e information The Tele Aid system is operational provid ing that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not damaged and cel lular and GPS coverage is available The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted by using the volume control on the COMAND system or on the multifunc tion steering wheel To raise turn the rota ry volume control on COMAND system clockwise or press button on the multifunction steering wheel To lower turn the rotary volume control on COMAND system control counterclock wise or press button EE on the multi function steering wheel Controls in detail Useful features gt To activate press the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button or the Information button Ra depend ing on the type of response required The SOS button is located in the overhead control panel gt page 34 The Roadside Assistance button gt page 335 and the Information button gt page 336 are located below the center arm rest cover BE The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS Global Positioning System satellites for vehicle loca tion f either of these signals are unavailable the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs assistance must be summoned by other means When a Tele Aid call has been initiated the COMAND system audio is muted and the select ed mode radio CD etc pauses The optional cellula
532. st Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatical ly following an accident in which the emer gency tensioning devices ETDs or air bags deploy An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS then briefly pressing the button located under the cover See gt page 334 for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually Controls in detail Once the emergency call is in progress the indicator lamp on the SOS button will begin to flash The message Connecting Call appears in the multifunc tion display When the connection is estab lished the message Call Connected appears in the multifunction display All in formation relevant to the emergency such as the location of the vehicle determined by the GPS satellite location system vehi cle model identification number and color are generated A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon af ter the emergency call has been initiated The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle Useful features The Tele Aid system is available if e jit has been activated and is operation al Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services connection and
533. stantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instruc tions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet Operation Driving instructions A As with any vehicle do not idle park or op erate this vehicle in areas where combusti ble materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning Emission control Certain engine systems serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law These systems of course will function properly only when maintained strictly ac cording to factory specifications Any ad justments on the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center autho rized technicians Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way Moreover the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly accord ing to Mercedes Benz servicing require ments For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet A Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CQ and inhaling it can cause un consciousness and possible death Warning Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes ar
534. stem see sepa rate operating instructions Climate control 3 zone automatic climate control Rear window defroster Seat heating front passenger side Seat ventilation front passenger side Parktronic system deactivation switch Vehicle level control switch Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp Page 214 228 212 138 140 291 28 1 85 447 448 00 0 Center console Item Storage compartment Alarm system indicator lamp Electronic Stability Program ESP switch Adaptive damping system ADS switch USA only Seat ventilation driver s side Seat heating drivers side Switch for Downhill Speed Regulation DSR Hazard warning flasher Switch for Off road driving program Page 317 110 105 278 140 138 274 149 278 At a glance Center console Upper part Vehicles with enhanced off road package J Item COMAND system see sepa rate operating instructions Climate control 3 zone automatic climate control Rear window defroster Seat heating front passenger side Seat ventilation front passenger side Rotary switch for differential locks Switch for LOW RANGE mode Switch for Downhill Speed Regulation DSR Rotary switch for vehicle level control Page 214 228 212 138 140 205 202 274 283 0 Item
535. stem see Climate control or Automatic climate control 3 zone Air conditioning Cooling 224 239 Air distribution Front 219 234 Air distribution Rear 227 243 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure Air recirculation mode 222 237 Air suspension program 278 Adaptive Damping System ADS 278 Messages in the multifunction display 486 Vehicle level control 279 Air vents 227 Air vents Rear 245 Air vents Front 220 234 Air volume 220 235 Alarm system see Anti theft systems Alignment bolt vehicle tool kit 492 524 Anticorrosion antifreeze 563 568 Antiglare Interior rear view mirror 208 Antiglare Rear view mirrors 208 Antilock Brake System see ABS Anti theft systems 110 Anti theft alarm system Immobilizer 109 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Armrest storage telephone compartment Front 317 Ashtrays Depending on vehicle configuration 321 Aspect ratio 415 ATF 381 Attaching a trailer 366 AUDIO menu 164 Audio menu CD operation 165 Radio operation 164 Satellite radio operation 164 Auto dimming Rear view mirrors 208 Automatic central locking Control system 180 109 110 Automatic climate control 3 zone 228 Automatic headlamp mode 144 B Air conditioning refrigerant 563 Automatic lighting control Interior Backrest Air conditioning Cooling 239 240 lighting 150 Seat 46 Air distribution Front 234 Automatic locking when driving 128 Seat Lumbar support 137 Air distribution Rear 243 Automatic transmissio
536. such as temperature air volume and air distribution for all temperature zones These settings only need to be made once and the automatic climate control system will automatically regulate the settings for all temperature zones quickly and comfort ably Activating gt Adjust the temperature air volume and air distribution gt page 230 gt Press button BBM gt page 230 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The driver side settings are used for all temperature zones Deactivating gt Press button RBM gt page 230 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out a If you manually set the temperature air vol ume or air distribution for the passenger side or the rear passenger compartment when the MONO setting is active the MONO setting will be switched off Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Residual heat and ventilation Activating Rear automatic climate control With the engine switched off it is possible pe Se Cen OUO aE The control panel is located at the rear of to continue to heat or ventilate the interior Press button gt page 230 the front center console for up to 30 minutes This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine The indicator lamp on the button comes on How long the system will provide heating Deactivating CEREO gt Press button ERJ e the coolant temperature The indicator lamp on the button goes e the b
537. supple mental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds gt page 394 or for vehi cle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition gt page 394 If such information is provided it can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt Press button or on the mul tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display gt page 155 Press button JA or Ref repeatedly until e the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunc tion display or e the following message appears in the multifunction display Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes Press the reset button gt page 152 The following message will appear in the multifunction display Restart tire pressure monitor gt Press button ES The following message will appear in the multifunction display Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted After a few minutes driving the current tire inflation pressure values are ac cepted as reference values and then monitored If you wish to cancel activation gt Press button EEJ Operation Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires Underinflated tires Underinflated tires can e cause excessive and uneven tire wear e adversely affect fuel economy e lead to tire failure from being overheated e adversely affect handling characteristics A
538. sure as specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 388 or if available on the tire inflation pressure la bel located on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt page 374 Warning The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pres sure according to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 388 or if available on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt page 374 The Run Flat Indicator does not replace regular checks of the tire inflation pressures since a gradual pressure loss in more than one tire cannot be detected by the Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Restarting the Run Flat Indicator The Run flat indicator must be restarted in the following situations If you have changed the tire inflation pressure If you have replaced the wheels or tires If you have installed new wheels or tires Using the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar or if available the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
539. switch is set to 0 gt page 63 Otherwise e g the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to move unintentionally This may lead to vehicle damage Due to the width of the vehicle fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors Vehicles with SmartKey gt gt With the vehicle at a standstill and the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N If engaged release the parking brake gt page 59 Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed With the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to park position P Release the brake pedal Remove the KEYLESS GO start stop button from the starter switch gt page 43 Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO into the starter switch Switch on the ignition Depress the brake pedal Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N Release the brake pedal If engaged release the parking brake gt page 59 gt Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch After running the vehicle through an auto matic car wash wipe any wax off of the wind shield gt page 431 This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can
540. switch off when the corresponding door is closed If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 or remove the SmartKey from the starter switch the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes Lighting Cargo compartment lamp The cargo compartment lamp comes on when the tailgate is opened If you leave the tailgate open for an extend ed period of time the cargo compartment lamp will switch off automatically after ap proximately 5 minutes Controls in detail Instrument cluster For a full view illustration of the instrument The instrument cluster is activated when cluster see Instrument cluster you gt page 26 e open a door e switch on the ignition gt page 42 e press reset button 2 e switch on the exterior lamps gt page 143 i Opening a front door or pressing the reset button without switching on the ignition or the exterior lighting activates the multifunction display illumination only for 30 seconds 1 To dim instrument cluster illumination For information on changing the instru 2 Reset button ment cluster settings e g the language 3 To brighten instrument cluster see Instrument cluster submenu illumination gt page 172 Warning N No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative As a result you will not be able to see infor mation about your driving conditions
541. t page 41 Warning J If the ESS indicator lamp and the indicator lamp are lit at the same time there is a malfunction in the Occupant Classification System The front passenger front air bag will be deactivated in this case Have the system checked as soon as possi ble by qualified technicians Contact an au thorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Only have the seat repaired or replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS e Donot place more than 4 4 Ib 2 kg into the parcel net on the back of the front passenger seat Otherwise the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant weight category e Do not place objects under and or around the front passenger seat Safety and Security Occupant safety Do not hang anything from or attach any items to the seats Do not stuff objects such as books be tween the middle console and the front passenger seat Do not move the front passenger seat backwards against stiff objects Sit properly belted in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest While seated an occupant should not position him herself in such a way as to cause the occupant s weight to be lifted from the seat bottom as this may result in the OCS being unable to correctly ap proximate the occupant s weight cate gory Read and observe all warnings in
542. t page 435 BAS The Brake Assist System BAS operates in emergency situations If you apply the brakes very quickly the BAS automatically provides full brake boost thereby poten tially reducing braking distance gt Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking When you release the brake pedal the brakes function again as normal The BAS is then deactivated Warning A N If the BAS is malfunctioning the brake sys tem is still functioning but without the addi tional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver Therefore the braking distance may increase Warning A N The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Safety and Security Driving safety systems ESP The Electronic Stability Program ESP is operational as soon a
543. t threshold e independently of the side impact air bags Occupant safety i The front air bags in this vehicle have been designed to inflate in two stages This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the rate of relevant vehicle decelera tion as assessed by the air bag control unit On the front passenger side the front air bag deployment is additionally influenced by the passenger s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System OCS gt page 81 The lighter the front passenger side occupant the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second stage inflation of the air bag Safety and Security Occupant safety The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system s deploy ment thresholds You will then be protec ted by the fastened seat belts The front passenger front air bag will only be deployed if e the system senses that the front passenger seat Is occupied e the indicator lamp in the center console is not lit gt page 85 e the impact exceeds a preset deploy ment threshold Side impact air bags window curtain air bags A The pressure sensors for side impact air bag control are located in the doors Do not modify any components of the doors or door trim panels including for example the addi tion of door speakers Warning Improper repair work on the doors or the modification or ad
544. t backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt gt page 53 Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted After adjusting rear seats make sure e the seats are properly locked e the seat backrests are in an upright po sition and are properly locked Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests If a seat and seat backrest are not properly locked the seat could move forward and the seat back rest could fold The child seat would no long er be properly supported or positioned to provide its intended benefit Seat backrest tilt second row seats Warning A N The seat belt only offers its intended protec tion when the seat backrest is in a nearly vertical position and the occupant is sitting upright Avoid sitting in positions that pre vent the seat belt from being properly posi tioned against the body gt page 53 You should therefore adjust the backrest to a po sition as upright as possible different positions The handles for adjusting the seats are located on the rear of each seat base 14 Adjustment handle gt While seated pull handle Q in direc tion of arrow to resistance point and hold it there gt To move seat backrest back lean light
545. t be resynchronized separately gt Close all doors gt Switch on the ignition gt page 42 gt Pull and hold switch O or gt page 247 Once a door window is closed com pletely hold the respective switch for approximately 3 seconds The door window is synchronized Controls in detail Summer opening feature If the weather is warm you can ventilate the vehicle before driving off by simulta neously opening the door windows opening the hinged quarter windows opening the tilt sliding sunroof switching on the seat ventilation for the driver s seat P80 45 2058 31 Power windows gt Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO at the driver s outside door handle The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be in close proxim ity to the driver s outside door handle Press and hold button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO until the windows and the tilt sliding sunroof have reached the desired position Release button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to interrupt the opening procedure Controls in detail Power windows m Convenience closing feature D gt Press and hold button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with When locking the vehicle you can simulta e Release the lock button gt page 71 on KEYLESS GO until the windows and neously close the driver s outside door handle to stop i the ti
546. t drive You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes Benz vehicle or if you are rent ing or borrowing this vehicle E Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your vehicle Introduction T Controls in detail Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed on your ve hicle This section expands on the Getting started section and also describes techni cal innovations If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you V Operation Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi cle SSS Practical hints This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter Where to find it Se ae Technical data All important technical data for your vehi cle can be found in this section L Indexes The table of contents and the index are de signed to help you find information quickly and easily The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation e this Operator s Manual e the Maintenance Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehi cle Introduction Symbols Trademarks e ESP is a registered trademark of DaimlerChrysler e HomeLink is a registered trademark
547. t front or rear seat backrests For additional safety when transporting cargo while the rear seats are unoccupied fasten the outer seat belts crosswise into the opposite side buckles i The cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects The expanded cargo com partment page 304 should only be used for items which do not fit in the cargo compartment alone Cargo tie down rings Your vehicle is equipped with eight cargo tie down rings Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all rings with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo i While the cargo net page 312 will help protect you from smaller objects it cannot pre vent the movement of large heavier objects into the passenger compartment in an accident dur ing hard braking or sudden maneuvers Such items must be properly secured using the cargo tie down rings in the cargo compartment floor Cargo compartment Four cargo tie down rings are located in the cargo compartment Second seat row Two cargo tie down rings are located in the footwell behind the driver s and passenger seat 1 Cargo tie down ring Controls in detail Loading Third seat row Two cargo tie down rings are located be hind the third row seat backrest For information on how to fold the third row seats see Expanding cargo compartment gt page 304 a V l 1 Cargo tie down
548. t fully A Folded second row seats are intended to serve as a cargo compartment expansion in conjunction with folded third row seats only Do not fold the second row seats and allow third row seat occupants to use folded sec ond row seats as a footrest while driving Third row seat occupants must like all vehi cle occupants keep both feet on the floor in front of their seat Otherwise occupants could slide under their seat belt in a colli sion If occupants slide under the belt it would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal inju ries Do not fold the second row seats and allow third row seat occupants to use folded second row seats as a table while driving Warning Objects placed on folded second row seats may come loose during braking vehicle ma neuvers or an accident and be thrown around the vehicle interior Objects thrown around the vehicle interior may cause an ac cident and or serious personal injury Folding second row seats T When the second row seats are folded for ward the front seats may not be moved to the re armost position Otherwise you could damage the front and second row seats gt Push in the head restraints of the second row seats all the way gt page 135 1 Strap 2 Seat cushion gt Pull strap in direction of arrow gt Fold seat cushion 2 forward 3 Lever gt Pull and hold lever 3 in direction of arrow at resistance
549. t in an accident and or serious personal injury Getting started Unlocking Starter switch 0 For removing SmartKey 1 Power supply for some electrical con sumers such as seat adjustment 2 Ignition power supply for all electrical consumers and driving position All lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instru ment cluster come on If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on have it checked and replaced if necessary If a lamp in the instrument cluster re mains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving refer to Lamps in instrument cluster gt page 436 3 Starting position When you switch on the ignition the indica tor and warning lamps except high beam heaa lamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instrument cluster come on The indicator and warning lamps ex cept high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated will go out when the engine is running This indicates that the respective systems are operational a If the SmartKey does not belong to the vehicle the SmartKey can be turned in the start er switch However the ignition does not switch on and the engine does not start i When the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch and the automatic transmission is in a position other than P the aut
550. t is not possible for you to exit the vehicle on the side of the easy entry seat page 130 you can fold the left side of the seat backrest in the second row of seats down in order to open the left rear door P91 12 2B88 31 C Emergency release 2 Seat backrest BE Make sure that the head restraint is pushed all the way down gt page 135 Controls in detail Seats gt Pull emergency release Q in the Front seat active head restraints Rear seats direction of arrow i gt Push seat backrest 2 forwards Warning A N Warning VAN For your protection drive only with properly Warning VAN According to accident statistics children To help avoid personal injury when folding the seat backrest forward make sure that you move both feet and legs all the way back and out of the way to avoid them contacting the seat as it pivots forward In order to prevent an accident or any other potentially dangerous situations when open ing the rear door and exiting the vehicle make sure that you are aware of the traffic situation at all times gt Open the left door gt Exit the vehicle positioned head restraints Adjust the head restraint so that it is close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation You cannot remove the acti
551. t recommended for the age size and weight of the child and secure child restraint with the vehicle s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions For children larger than the typical 12 month old child the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated gt page 82 i Deployment of the driver front air bag does not mean that the front passenger front air bag also should have deployed The Occupant Classification System page 81 may have determined that the seat was empty or occupied by the weight up to or less than that of a typical 12 month old child seated in a standard Child restraint both instances where the system suppresses deployment of the front passenger front air bag even though the im pact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag that the seat was occupied by a small individ ual such as a young teenager or a small adult or a child weighing more than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint instances where the system may suppress deployment of the front passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of suffi cient severity to deploy the driver front air bag The indicator lamp is located in the center console The indicator lamp will be illuminated except with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or with the starter switch in position O g
552. t vs rear tire rotation is not possible Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around tires can be rotated observing a front to rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation spinning direction of the tire gt page 387 In some cases such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimension front vs rear tire rotation is not possible If applicable to your vehicle s tire configu ration tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer s recommended in tervals in the tire manufacturer s warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio If none is available tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 5000 to 10000 km or sooner if neces sary according to the degree of tire wear The same rotation spinning direction must be maintained gt page 387 Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks i e the inner side of the wheels tires during each rotation Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure Operation Tires and wheels Warning A N Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a
553. tain higher engine speeds accurate reading The amount of oil your engine needs will pe Cec rane cer CHEN depend on a number of factors including the vehicle must be parked on level driving style Increased oil consumption ground can occur when v v vV iv The oil level is correct when it is be tween lower mark 3 min and upper mark 2 max of the oil dipstick Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break in period T Do not use any special lubricant additives as these may damage the drive assemblies Using special additives not approved by Mercedes Benz may cause damage not covered i The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 2 1 US qt 2 0 I by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty k PEE meee l i ee eee S e gt f necessary add engine oil More information on this subject ts available at i ak aa gt page 381 any Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Example illustration GL 450 GL 320 CDI GL 550 similar For more information on engine oil see Q Oil dipstick Technical data section gt page 562 and 2 Upper mark gt page 564 3 Lower mark Adding engine oil T Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet USA only in y
554. talling the crossbars The vehicle could other wise be damaged T Objects attached to the crossbar system s accessories must not be allowed to restrict the movement of the tilt sliding sunroof The tilt sliding sunroof could otherwise be damaged when it is raised Controls in detail Loading gt Turn screw 4 counterclockwise with the included Allen wrench until clamping claw is wide open P 7 40 2079 31 1 Key 4 Screw for clamping claw 2 Cover cap Clamping claw 3 Sticker FRONT or REAR a a Gary Roof rail o screw for A aw iiia orosepar gt Make sure clamping claw lies flush Clamping claw 2 o E against the inside of roof rail Q0 as The front and rear crossbars are of differ TP shown in the illustration ent lengths Please pay close attention to Markings Roof rails If necessary adjust clamping width of stickers FRONT and REAR on the cross crossbars gt page 299 bars gt Place front crossbar 6 between markings 9 on roof rails 0 gt Slightly tighten screw 4 on both sides gt Unlock cover cap 2 with key Q by turning it clockwise Markings are located on the inside of each roof rail indicated by the white lines in the Sticker indicating the location illustration FRONT or REAR becomes visible gt Remove cover cap 2 Place rear crossbar 7 on roof rails in such a way that the clamping claws reach into gaps 8 gt page 298 onthe roof r
555. tance to empty gt Press button or repeatedly until the message From Start appears in the multifunction display gt Press button JAM or Re repeatedly until the message Range appears in the multifunction display The calculated remaining driving range based on the current fuel tank level appears in the multifunction display Range 269m i If only very little fuel is left in the tank a vehicle at the fuel pump is shown instead of the range Controls in detail Control system TEL menu Warning A N A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call If you choose to use the tele phone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the tele phone when weather road and traffic condi tions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a ve hicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic sys
556. tarter switch Practical hints Flat tire Mounting the spare wheel Preparing the vehicle gt Prepare the vehicle as described gt page 519 gt Take the wheel wrench the collapsible wheel chock and the vehicle jack out of the cargo compartment gt page 490 gt Take the Minispare wheel out of the cargo compartment gt page 495 T Depending on vehicle production date your vehicle may be equipped with a scissors type Jack located under the cargo compartment floor If so equipped only use this jack when Jacking up the vehicle as otherwise the vehicle s underbody can be damaged See separate instructions for scissors type jack Lifting the vehicle Warning A N When jacking up the vehicle only use the jack which has been specifically approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle To help avoid personal in jury use the jack only to lift the vehicle dur ing a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is sup ported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity
557. te the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch if necessary The SmartKey with gt Search for the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is not detected KEYLESS GO while the ignition is switched on gt page 41 and a door is opened or closed and the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is gt Change the position of the SmartKey with not in the vehicle KEYLESS GO in the vehicle Otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked nor can the engine be started Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Key Detected In Vehicle Remove Key You need a new key Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle Change Key Batteries Don t Forget Your Key Possible cause consequence Possible solution A SmartKey with KEYLESS GO p gt left in the vehicle was detected while trying to lock the vehicle from the outside You have forgotten to remove gt the SmartKey There is no additional code avail gt able for SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO The SmartKey or SmartKey with gt KEYLESS GO in the starter switch does not belong to the vehicle The batteries inthe SmartKey gt with KEYLESS GO are dis charged This message appears for a gt maximum of 60 seconds if the driver s door is opened with the engine shut off and no SmartKey in the starter switch gt This message is only a reminder Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO out of the vehicle Remove the SmartKey from the starter sw
558. te to the wheel being changed Flat tire Changing wheel on a slight decline Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface However should circumstances require you to do so ona slight decline place the wheel chock and another sizeable object as follows P40 00 2083 31 Changing wheel on passenger side Example illustration gt Place wheel chock or another sizeable object in front of both wheels on the side opposite to the side on which the wheel is to be changed Practical hints Flat tire Changing wheel on a slight incline Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface However should circumstances require you to do so ona slight incline place the wheel chock and another sizeable object as follows P40 10 4275 31 1 Wheel wrench gt On wheel to be changed loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts approximately one full turn with wheel wrench P40 00 2089 31 Changing wheel on passenger side Example illustration gt Place wheel chock or another sizeable object behind both wheels on the side opposite to the side on which the wheel is to be changed P40 00 2085 31 The jack take up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings as indicated by the arrows A Warning The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets Make sur
559. tects a significant loss of tire inflation pressure in one or more than one tire a message appears in the multi function display Example illustration The respective tire is indicated by a red rectrangle In addition a warning signal sounds Operation Tires and wheels Restarting Advanced TPMS The TPMS usually recognizes new refer ence values automatically for example when you have e adjusted the tire inflation pressure e changed wheels or tires e mounted new wheels or tires A It is the driver s responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold infla tion pressure Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You might lose control over the vehicle Warning If you want to set new reference values manually gt Using the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 388 or if available the sup plemental tire inflation pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt page 374 make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec ommended for the vehicle operating condition Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 388 Some vehicles may have
560. ted position slide wiper blade Q out of attachment in direction of arrow Installing 1 Installing 2 Tab 3 Attachment 4 Guide tab Cover gt Slide the wiper blade into attachment 3 in direction of arrow 1 gt Make sure guide tab will be placed under cover G when fully inserting the wiper blade into attachment gt Let tab 2 latch into both recesses of attachment 3 Practical hints gt Check if the wiper blade is securely fastened gt Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the windshield Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm when folding it back Rear wiper blade AN For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch vehicles with KEYLESS GO Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 before replacing a wiper blade Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury Warning Replacing wiper blades T Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the rear window Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the rear window glass without a wiper blade inserted Make sure the wiper blade is properly installed Improperly installed wiper blades may cause rear window damage For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Practical h
561. tem pos sibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury You can use the functions in the TEL menu to operate your telephone provided it is connected to a hands free system and switched on gt Switch on the telephone and COMAND system gt Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel repeated ly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display Which messages will appear in the multi function display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off e If the telephone is off the message TEL Off appears in the multifunction display e lf the telephone is on The telephone will then search for a network During this time the multi function display is empty As soon as the telephone has found a network the message Ready appears In the multifunction display This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system Answering a call When your telephone is ready to receive calls you can answer a Call at any time In the multifunction display you will then see the message or if available the caller ID name and number N EY gt Press button F You have answered the call The duration of the call appears in the multifunction display Gd Incoming Call Ending a call or rejecting an incoming call gt Press button Fam Dialing a number from the phone book If your tele
562. tems can be switched on or the engine can be started using the KEYLESS GO start stop button Q KEYLESS GO start stop button 2 Starter switch Unlocking KEYLESS GO start stop button 3 USA only 4 Canada only The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located in the vehicle gt Insert KEYLESS GO start stop button Q into starter switch 2 if not inserted already gt Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P gt page 191 gt Do not depress the brake pedal Getting started Unlocking Position 0 Before you press the KEYLESS GO start stop button the vehicle s on board electronics have status O as with SmartKey removed Position 1 gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once This supplies power for some electrical consumers such as seat adjustment i If you now press the KEYLESS GO start stop button e once more the ignition position 2 is switched on e twice more the power supply is again switched off Ignition or Position 2 gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button twice This supplies power for all electrical consumers All lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instru ment cluster come on If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on have it checked and replaced if necessary If a lamp in the instrument cluster re mains on after sta
563. ter clogged filter replaced as soon as possible Deactivating Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck shieli ee onoir nd debris gt Press button gt page 230 until Center the display 4 gt page 230 is cleared The indicator lamp on the button The air conditioning will not engage no comes on cooling if the A C mode is deactivated gt page 230 Reactivating gt Press button Egy gt page 230 You can also press button gt page 230 on the automatic climate control panel If you press button gt page 230 to reactivate the automatic climate control system the defrosting mode is activated Controls in detail Operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode a o You can switch the automatic climate con trol system on and off separately for each zone as needed When operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature air volume and air distribution In automatic mode cooling with dehumidify is switched on This function can be switched off if necessary Activating gt Press button RA gt page 230 while the engine is running The indicator lamp on the button comes on Air volume and air distribu tion are controlled separately for each zone 3 zone automatic climate control gt
564. ter OPM ie Ole a few minutes The tire inflation pressure is being checked Display message Tire Presswire Memes Oper ce Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors Tire Pressure Monitor Wheel Sensor Missing Tire Pressure Monitor Currently Unavailable Possible cause consequence The TPMS or Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted e g winter tires Vehicles with Advanced TPMS One or more sensors are defect e g battery is empty The respective tire is indicated by instead of the tire inflation pressure in the multifunction display Vehicles with Advanced TPMS One or more wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted e g spare tire The respective tire is indicated by instead of the tire inflation pressure in the multifunction display The TPMS or Advanced TPMS is unable to monitor the tire pressure due to a nearby radio interference source Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt gt Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the Advanced TPMS checked by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the wheel sensors installed by an authoriz
565. the SmartKey in the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed With the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to park position P Release the brake pedal Remove the KEYLESS GO start stop button from the starter switch gt page 43 gt Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO into the starter switch Switch on the ignition Depress the brake pedal Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N Release the brake pedal If engaged release the parking brake gt page 59 gt Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch T Observe instructions e when taking the vehicle through an automatic conveyor type car wash gt page 428 e when towing the vehicle gt page 538 i Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason in neutral position N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Effect D Drive The transmission shifts automatically All forward gears are available Warning A N Getting out of your vehicle without shifting into park position P is dangerous Also park position P alone is not intended to or capa ble of preventing your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P gt page 67 W
566. the lower plate outward 2 ditionally secure the vehicle e g while Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the ing changing the wheel p Warning A way into the openings of base plate The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted Adapt your driving style accord ingly The Minispare wheel is for temporary use only When driving with a Minispare wheel mounted ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h For information on where to place wheel chocks when changing a wheel see Lift ing the vehicle gt page 520 Drive to the nearest Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible to have the Minispare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel P40 10 2776 31 1 Tilt the plate upward 2 Fold the lower plate outward l l Never operate the vehicle with more than 3 Insert the plate one spare wheel mounted Do not switch off the ESP when a Minispare wheel is mounted Practical hints Where will I find The Minispare wheel is located underneath Loosen retaining screw 2 by turning it the cargo compartment floor counterclockwise gt page 490 gt pag a gt If retaining screw 2 does not come loose For information on how to mount the turn vehicle tool kit storage well casing Q Minis
567. the trailer brake controller by hand to make sure the brakes are working properly Operation Driving instructions Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts while driving When towing a trailer check occasion ally to make sure the load is secure and that lighting and trailer brakes if SO equipped are functioning properly Take into consideration that when tow ing a trailer the handling characteris tics are different and less stable from those when operating the vehicle with out a trailer It is important to avoid sudden maneu vers The vehicle and trailer combination is heavier and therefore is limited in ac celeration and climbing ability and re quires longer stopping distances It is more prone to reacting to cross wind gusts and requires more sensi tive steering input If possible do not brake abruptly but rather engage the brake slightly at first to permit the trailer to activate its brake Then increase the braking force i If the trailer should begin to sway reduce the vehicle s speed immediately In no case attempt to straighten out the tow vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed If the transmission repeatedly shifts between gears on inclines manually shift to a lower gear select 4 3 2 or 1 gt page 197 A lower gear and reduction of speed re duces the chance of engine overload ing and or overheating On very steep inclines not manageable w
568. tinue driving more slowly gt Briefly shift automatic transmission to position N gt Repeat the shifting procedure if desired Practical hints Where will I find First aid kit Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing expired items The first aid kit is located on the driver s side in the cargo compartment behind the cover 1 Lock 2 Cover in left side trim panel gt Turn lock Q 90 in direction of arrow gt Fold down cover 2 The first aid kit can be removed Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit is stored under the cargo compartment floor The vehicle tool kit includes Towing eye bolt e Wheel wrench e Alignment bolt e Vehicle jack e Fuse chart e Collapsible wheel chock e Wheel bolts for spare wheel 2 Handle cover gt Open the tailgate gt page 122 gt Push in handle cover 2 as indicated by arrow and pull handle gt Lift cargo compartment floor Q 3 Securing hook 3 Securing hook 4 Cargo compartment floor raised gt Release securing hook 3 located be G Upper cargo compartment lip low the floor handle from holder gt Engage securing hook on upper cargo compartment lip G Me Py _P68 00 47 Tiki Practical hints Where will I find pg With the cargo compartment cover blind installed behind the third row seats page 310 disengag
569. tion When you select intermittent wiping the rain sensor is activated The rain sensor automatically sets a suitable wiping interval depending on the wetness of the sensor surface BB Do not leave windshield wipers on an inter mittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield clean ing Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result T If you have set intermittent wiping dirt on the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an undesired fashion This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows You should therefore switch off the windshield wipers when weather conditions are dry gt Turn the combination switch to position E or Eg Driving After the initial wipe pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor 4 Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened This protects persons getting into or out of the vehicle from being sprayed Intermittent wiping will be continued when all doors are closed and e the automatic transmission is set to position Dor R or e the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch Single wipe gt Press the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow Q to the resistance point The windshield wipers wipe
570. tion Booklet 549 Low beam headlamps Messages in the multifunction display 479 Replacing bulbs 505 Switching on 61 143 LOW RANGE mode 201 Messages in the multifunction display 488 Lubricants 562 Lumbar support 137 M Main dimensions 560 Maintenance 12 422 Calling up service indicator display 424 Clearing service indicator message 423 Maintenance System 422 Resetting service indicator 424 Service indicator message 422 Service term exceeded 423 Maintenance System 422 Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps Maximum cooling MAXCOOL see Automatic climate control 3 zone 237 Maximum load rating Tires 417 Maximum loaded vehicle weight Tires 417 MB Tex upholstery Cleaning and careof 434 Mechanical key 496 Memory function see Seats Menus see Control system menus Messages in display see Multifunction display messages Microphone Hands free 34 Minispare wheel see Spare wheel Mirrors Adjusting 51 Auto dimming rear view mirrors 208 Exterior rear view mirror 51 Interior rear view mirror 51 208 MON 375 565 Multicontour seat 138 Multifunction display 155 Changing settings see Control system menus and Control system sub menus Displaying current gear range 197 Selecting display 173 Selecting language 172 Multifunction display messages 449 ABS 451 ABS ESP 451 Air suspension 486 Air suspension program 486 Brake fluid 469 Brake lamps 477 Brake pads 467 Coolant 472 Corner illuminating front fog lamps 47
571. to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non use position and have the occupant adjust the head restraint properly For your protection drive only with properly positioned and engaged head restraints Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the po tential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Adjusting T Do not attempt to remove front seat head restraints They can only be removed by qualified technicians We recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Vehicles with memory function gt Press switch 1 gt page 46 up or down in direction of arrow Vehicles without memory function 2 Release button Getting started Adjusting Raising Head restraint fore and aft adjustment Steering wheel gt Manually adjust the height of head restraint 1 by pulling it upward Easy entry exit feature If head restraint Q is fully retracted push release button 2 in direction of arrow and pull head restraint 1 up ward This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle When entering and exiting the vehicle the steering wheel is in its uppermost position Lowering The easy entry exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the Comfort
572. to operate the equipment i Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Removal tampering or altering of the device will void any warranties and is not permitted Do not tamper with alter or use in any non approved way Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Distronic displays in the speedometer dial P54 32 4788 31 1 Set speed If Distronic is activated one or two cruise control speed segments come on around the set speed i The vehicle speed displayed on the speed ometer can briefly vary from the speed setting on the Distronic system Controls in detail P54 32 4789 31 1 Set speed 2 Cruise control speed segments 3 Speed of the vehicle ahead If Distronic detects a vehicle directly ahead the cruise control speed segments 2 which represents the differ ence from the speed of the preceding vehicle 8 to the driver s selected set speed 1 appear in the speedometer Driving systems If Distronic calculates that there is a dan ger of collision e The distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 27 e An intermittent warning sounds
573. to select the Distronic menu in the multifunction display Controls in detail Vehicle status message memory menu Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle s system has recorded The vehicle status message memory menu only appears if messages have been stored Control system A Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are inten tionally not very detailed The malfunction and warning messages are simply a remind er with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner s and or driver s responsibility to maintain the vehicle s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center to address the malfunc tion and warning messages gt page 449 Warning gt Press button or repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display If the vehicle status message memory menu does not appear no messages have been stored Controls in detail Control system If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded the number of messages appears in the multifunction display gt 2 Messag
574. ton once the closing proce dure has begun The windows and tilt sliding sunroof continue closing until they are fully closed The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated Convenience opening gt Press button for approximately 2 seconds The windows and or tilt sliding sun roof will return to their previous posi tions You can release button once the opening procedure has be gun The windows and tilt sliding sun roof continue opening until they have reached their previous positions The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deactivat ed i A window or the tilt sliding sunroof will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position using the re spective window switch or tilt sliding sunroof switch after it was closed with button R Air conditioning The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator In addition the air conditioning dehumidi fies the interior air at outside temperatures above 41 F 5 C and helps prevent window fogging i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction A If you turn off the cooling function the interior air is not dried The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger
575. tores the most recently dialed phone numbers This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book gt Press button or repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display Press button F The first number in the redial memory appears in the multifunction display Press button eN or RA repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display Press button F The control system dials the selected phone number M Y Automatic transmission For more information on driving with an automatic transmission see Automatic transmission gt page 56 Your vehicle s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down These shift point adjust ments are performed based on current Operating and driving conditions If the operating conditions change the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program i During the brief warm up transmission upshifting is delayed This allows the catalytic converter gasoline engine or the oxidation catalyst diesel engine to heat up more quickly to operating temperature Controls in detail Warning A N Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedal s range of movement Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure that the pedals still have su
576. tread life and may affect the vehi cle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended b gt b gt Operation Tires and wheels TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of in compatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing One or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly f a condition causing the TPMS to malfunc tion develops it may take up to 10 minut
577. ts Always use tie down rings and if so equipped always use the cargo net when transporting cargo The cargo net cannot secure hard or heavy ob jects Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using the cargo tie down rings in the cargo floor area and fastening materials Driving abroad Abroad there is an extensive Mercedes Benz service network at your disposal If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center directory you should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Control and operation of radio transmitters COMAND system radio and telephone Warning A N Do not forget that your primary responsibili ty is to drive the vehicle Only operate the COMAND system radio or telephone if road weather and traffic conditions permit Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximate ly 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements Telephones and two way radios Warning A N Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury Radio transm
578. ts etc 562 services 338 KEYLESS GO 126 Gasoline additives 566 System self check 332 Opening from the inside Main dimensions 560 Telephone cradle Electrically 124 Premium unleaded gasoline 565 Changing 330 Opening from the inside Rims 555 Telephone 328 Manually 122 Tires 555 Answering ending acall 187 Opening from the outside 122 Weights 561 Changing mobile phone cradle 330 Windshield washer and headlamp Dialing a number from the phone cleaning system 563 569 book 187 Ending a call or rejecting an incoming call 187 Hands free microphone 34 Inserting incradle 329 Installing a different mobile phone cradle 331 Messages in the multifunction display 483 Operation 186 Phone book 187 Redialing 188 Rejecting ending acall 187 Removing from cradle 330 Tray 317 Temperature Coolant 162 Display mode Status indicator 173 Interior temperature 219 Interior temperature setting see Climate control or Automatic climate control 3 zone Outside temperature 163 Sensor Interior temperature 216 230 Sensor Outside temperature 153 Setting display unit 163 Tether attachment points see Children in the vehicle Third row sunshade 212 Three zone Automatic climate control see Automatic climate control 3 zone Ticket holder 320 Tie down rings 302 Tightening torque Screws crossbars Wheel bolts 526 Tilt sliding sunroof see Power tilt sliding sunroof Time 174 TIN 410 417 Tire and Loading Information Placard 3
579. tting interior lighting delayed 177 shut off Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only This function is not available in countries where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode Controls in detail gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu gt Press button J or Re repeatedly until the message Lamp Circuit Headlamp appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting gt Press button or E to select manual operation Manual or daytime running lamp mode Constant Lamp Circuit mp Manual Constant With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position WEJ or EG the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running Control system In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps For more information on the daytime running lamp mode see Lighting gt page 143 a For safety reasons changing the setting for the daytime running lamp mode is not possible while the vehicle is in motion The following message appears in the multifunction display Settings can only be made at a standstill For safety reasons resetting to factory settings gt page 169 while driving will not deactivate the daytime running lamp mode Control
580. ture for the rear passenger compartment using temperature control gt page 242 After approximately 3 seconds after the last adjustment the display switch es back to its standard display and the indicator lamp on button ERY goes out You can also press the EGY button once more to switch back to the standard display 3 zone automatic climate control Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution controls or to adjust the air distribution for the rear passenger compartment The symbols on the controls represent the following functions Symbol Function Directs air to the center air vents Directs air to the footwells and the side air vents Adjusting manually gt Press the desired air distribution con trol The indicator lamp on button Big goes out Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Adjusting automatically gt Press button EG while the engine is running The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air distribution is adjust ed automatically Setting the temperature Use temperature control gt page 242 to separately adjust the air temperature of the rear passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C The automatic cli mate control will adjust to the set temper ature as fast as possible i The rear automatic climate control will not cool the air when the a
581. tures 315 V Vehicle Battery 528 Break in period 346 Care 425 Control system Settings menu 168 Dimensions 560 Locking unlocking 40 67 112 Locking unlocking in an emergency 496 Modifications and alterations Operating safety 17 Proper use of 17 Total load limit 418 Towing 538 Washing 425 Weights 561 Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings 365 Vehicle care 425 Vehicle Identification Number see VIN Vehicle jack 492 493 Vehicle level control 279 Vehicle level control Vehicles with enhanced Off road Package 283 Vehicle level control Messages in the multifunction display 486 Vehicle lighting 377 Vehicle loading Cargo compartment cover blind 310 Cargo net 312 Cargo tie down rings 302 Carriers 295 Crossbars 295 Expanding cargo compartment 304 Hooks 304 Load limit 389 Loading instructions 301 Loading terminology 415 Parcel nets 319 Roof rails 295 Terminology 415 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 418 Vehicle Recovery services Stolen Tele Aid 338 Vehicle status message memory menu 167 Vehicle tool kit 490 Vehicle washing 427 VIN 551 Voice control system Button on multifunction steering wheel 30 156 Hands free microphone 34 W Warning indicators Parktronic 290 Warning lamps see Lamps Indicator and warning Warning sounds Distance warning function 272 Distronic 263 Exterior lamps 143 Parking brake 60 Parktronic 292 Seat belt telltale 86 Warranty coverage 10 549 Washer fluid see W
582. two ways Adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments ae The set value is increased or decreased in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments each time you lift or depress the cruise control lever to the resistance point Increase set speed gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 gt page 276 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle speed increases in incre ments of 1 mph Canada 1 km h Reduce set speed gt Briefly press the cruise control lever down to the resistance point in direc tion of arrow 2 gt page 276 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle speed decreases in incre ments of 1 mph Canada 1 km h Each time the set speed is changed DSR will appear in the multifunction dis play and the changed set speed is shown The set speed is canceled when DSR is switched off If DSR is switched on again DSR will use the programmed default speed gt page 183 Adjustment in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments Gp The set value is increased or decreased in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments each time you lift or depress the cruise control lever past the resistance point Increase set speed gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 gt page 276 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle speed increases in incre ments of 5 mph Canada 10 km
583. um engine speed 6500 rpm Firing order 1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8 Poly V belt 2404 mm Alldata preliminary The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment 2 Premium fuel required Performance may vary with fuel octane rating Y Rims and tires BE Only use tires which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz Tires approved by Mercedes Benz are developed to provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP Tires specially developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz can be identified by finding the following on the tire s sidewall e MO Mercedes Benz Original equipment tires Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes Benz may result in damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty T Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes Benz can have detrimental effects such as e poor handling characteristics e increased noise e increased fuel consumption Moreover tires and rims not approved by Mercedes Benz may under load exhibit dimen sional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result Further information on tires and rims Is ava
584. use the programmed default speed Depending on the road surface and level of downhill grade the DSR may not be able to maintain the set speed To maintain the set speed apply the brakes if necessary Switching the Downhill Speed Regulation on off The switch is located on the upper part of the center console Vehicles without enhanced off road package C DSR on off 2 Indicator lamp Vehicles with enhanced off road package C DSR on off 2 Indicator lamp A If the accelerator pedal is depressed while the Downhill Speed Regulation is activated the vehicle can drive faster than the pro grammed set speed You should therefore drive downhill with particular caution as it could otherwise lead to an accident and or serious injury to you or others Keep in mind that as soon as you remove the foot from the accelerator pedal with the DSR switched on the DSR will start regulating the vehicle s speed including use of brakes if required Depending on the programmed set speed actual vehicle speed and gradient the DSR can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly Sudden and unexpected deceleration can result in loss of vehicle control causing an accident and or serious personal injury to you and others Warning Switching Downhill Speed Regulation on The DSR can only be switched on if the vehi cle speed is below 18 mph Canada 30 km h gt Press DSR switch C gt page 274 The indicator lamp
585. uty brakes ride levelers roof rack heavy duty battery and special trim PSI Pounds per square inch A standard unit of measure for air pressure gt bar kilopascal kPa Recommended tire inflation pressure Recommended tire inflation pressure for normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire and Loading Information placard locat ed on driver s door B pillar Provides best handling tread life and riding comfort If so equipped supplemental information per taining to special driving situations can be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap Operation Tires and wheels Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead TIN Tire Identification Number Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identifica tion mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture Tire load rating Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support Operation Tires and wheels Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tre
586. vating intermittent wipe Problems while driving The coolant temperature is above gt Turn rear window wiper switch C to a position 4 gt page 64 The engine runs erratically and misfires The coolant is too hot and is no longer Indicator gt page 64 for the rear e An ignition cable may be damaged COUR E Mie Chee window wiper is cleared from the lower gasoline engine only gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location as multifunction display indicating that soon as possible and turn off the en the rear window wiper is deactivated gine Allow engine and coolant to cool off e The engine electronics may not be operating properly Wiping with windshield washer fluid e Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it gasoline engine only gt Check the coolant level and add cool gt Turn and hold rear window wiper ant if necessary gt page 381 switch C in position or gt page 64 until the rear window is gt Give very little gas cican Have the problem repaired by an The rear window wiper operates with authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck washer fluid Center as soon as possible For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 383 Getting started Driving In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking fuel gt Do not start the engine under any circumstances gt N
587. ve head restraints on the driver s and front passenger s seat For removal of the active head restraints we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center For information on head restraint adjust ment see Seats gt page 45 For information on active head restraints see Active head restraint gt page 90 are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child For additional information see Children in the vehicle gt page 9 1 A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Controls in detail Seats Rear seat adjustment The seat backrest tilt can be set to five Warning A N Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or fatal injuries The sea
588. vel is too low gt Check the engine oil level gt page 380 and add engine oil as required When the message Check engine oil level at next refueling appears while the engine Is running and at operating tem perature the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level When this occurs the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further Visually check for oil leaks If no obvious oil leaks are noted drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved engine oil For information on approved engine oils refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet USA only or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center BE The engine oil level warning should not be ignored Extended driving with the symbol dis played could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt page 381 Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Sc Display message Clean Fuel Filter Gas Cap Open Possible cause consequence You are driving with one or more doors open A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky You are driving with the hood or the tailgate open You are trying to lock the vehicle with the KEYLESS GO function with a
589. ving the switch for the tilt slid ing sunroof in any direction The closing of the side windows and the tilt sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the button Convenience closing gt Press button aj for approximately 2 seconds The windows and or tilt sliding sun roof will close You can release button once the closing proce dure has begun The windows and tilt sliding sunroof continue closing until they are fully closed The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated Controls in detail Convenience opening gt Press button for approximately 2 seconds The windows and or tilt sliding sun roof will return to their previous posi tions You can release button once the opening procedure has be gun The windows and tilt sliding sun roof continue opening until they have reached their previous positions The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deactivat ed Q A window or the tilt sliding sunroof will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position using the re spective window switch or tilt sliding sunroof switch after it was closed with button Req 3 zone automatic climate control Air conditioning The cooling function only operational when the engine is running cools the vehi cle down to the selected interior tempera ture The cooling function also dehu
590. water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Practical hints Battery BE vever loosen or detach battery terminal Disconnecting removing reinstalling clamps while the engine is running or the and reconnecting the battery SmartKey is in the starter switch Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged Warning VAN Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Disconnecting removing reinstalling and Contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Light reconnecting the battery is a complicated Truck Center for further information and technically demanding procedure that also requires safety precautions to avoid the risk of injury We strongly recommend that it Warning UN ay a be performed by a qualified technician or an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center only Please read the instructions fully before beginning operation and only undertake it if you feel fully capable of performing all of the tasks involved as de scribed in these instructions Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries gt page 528 Performing the tasks involved incorrectly can cause damage to the vehicle and impair the operating safety of the vehicle and or
591. wcasscoecasnevesceesensssamseveszeniens 86 Checking the batteries in the Combination switch 006 147 Active head restraint 0s06 90 SmartKey or SmartKey with Corner illuminating Rear head restraints 91 KEYLES OO xi rsasseranicuscusentiataieiies 120 front fog lAMPS cceeeceeeeeeees 147 Children in the vehicle 0 91 Loss of the SmartKey or Hazard warning flasher 149 Blocking of rear door SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 120 Interior lighting occse 149 window operation ccceeeeeceeeees 98 Opening the doors Door entry lamps ccceceeeeeees 151 PONCE eea 100 FONE INS CG acra 120 Cargo compartment lamp 151 PACUIVALING easich covereasiencnoceasenntstpewnteer 100 Tailgate Power tailgate 121 Instrument cluster cceeeeeeeeeceeeees 152 Deactivating ccccceseeccceeseeceees 100 Automatic central locking 128 Adjusting instrument Driving safety SySteMS cccceeecees 101 Locking and unlocking cluster illumination 008 153 PAB S E E 101 from the inside 128 Resetting trip odometer 153 PAS aati EE tute EET TOS DCAS eenean EEE IE iT 130 TACNOMELEL ccccccccesccecccsceecsenceee 153 EP AEE EAN 103 Easy entry exit feature for Outside temperature indicator 153 E e EAN E E EE E ATAT T 107 third row seats ccccsssssseeeseees 130 e a NiO E E E T denies 107 Front
592. wheel movement do one of the following e Move steering wheel adjustment stalk gt page 50 e Press one of the stored position buttons or the memory button M gt page 141 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Control system gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Comfort submenu gt Press button JM or Keg repeatedly until the message Easy entry Function appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Easy entry Function IM Press button or E to switch the easy entry exit feature On or Off Setting fold in function for exterior rear view mirrors Using this function you can set the exterior rear view mirrors to be automati cally folded in when you lock your vehicle With this function set to On and the exterior rear view mirrors folded in using the button on the door control panel gt page 209 the exterior rear view mirrors will not fold out when you switch on the ignition You will then have to fold out the exterior rear view mirrors using the button on the door control panel gt page 209 Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are folded out completely before driving off
593. witch off the ignition gt page 42 gt Press button gt page 216 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Deactivating gt Press button gt page 216 The indicator lamp on the button goes out ap The residual heat is automatically turned off e when the ignition is switched on e after about 30 minutes e if the coolant temperature is too low e ifthe battery voltage drops Controls in detail Climate control Deactivating rear climate control Rear climate control G Left rear center air vent adjustable Right rear center air vent adjustable gt Press button ii The rear climate control panel is only o available if your vehicle is equipped with seat Rear climate control on The indicator lamp on the button heating for the rear seats or Rear Audio fea automatic mode comes on ture see separate COMAND System operating TEE i instructions Air distribution directs air through The cooling function switches off after the center air vents a short delay The control panel is located on the rear of Se l the front center console Air distribution directs air through Switch off the rear climate control for im the footwells and side air vents proved cooling or heating output in the front pas senger compartment Rear air conditioning off You can also switch off the rear climate control ee from the front passenger compartment Activating rear climate control gt p
594. with or prevent the activation of the active head restraint Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for availability Do not attach any objects e g hangers to the head restraints posts Otherwise the active head restraints may not be able to function properly or offer the intended degree of protection in the event of an accident Warning A N For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation You cannot remove the active head restraint on the driver s and front passenger s seats For removal of the active head restraints we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center For information on head restraint adjust ment see Seats gt page 45 For information on resetting the activated active head restraints see Resetting acti vated head restraints gt page 499 Safety and Security Rear head restraints Warning A N Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints installed when the rear seats are occupied Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident With a rear seat occupied make sure to move the respective head restraint up
595. without Voice Control System Button without function It is helpful to think of the menus and the functions within each menu as being ar ranged in a circular pattern e If you press button or repeatedly you will pass through each menu one after the other e If you press button BV or Bay repeatedly you will pass through each function display one after the other in the current menu Controls in detail Control system In the Settings menu instead of The menus are described on the following functions you will find a number of pages submenus for calling up and changing settings For instructions on using these submenus see Settings menu gt page 168 The number of menus available in the sys tem depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle Controls in detail Control system Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an through the menus to overview of the individual menus T Standard display 2 AUDIO a Maintenance service indicator i AUDIO oFF 3 NAV TEL off From reset From start TIM 30H SO HPH 20 5 NPG MAY oFF AIRMATIC Compass G vistRONICY A a ME Distance warning Function DISTRONIC alee a A L a i press reset button H a E Ft 200 200 _100 For 3 seconds z 2 Messages lt gt Instrument Cluster
596. ximately 10 seconds If the indicator lamp in the Information button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call e g the relevant cel lular phone network is not available The mes sage Call Failed appears in the multifunction display Information calls can be terminated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel or the END button on the COMAND sys tem T If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu minated in red at any time the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active and may not initiate a call Visit your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada as soon as possible Call priority If other service calls such as a Roadside Assistance call or Information call are active an Emergency call is still possible In this case the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls i The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is concluded Emergency calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center repre sentative whereas Roadside Assistance and Information calls can also be terminated by pressing button on the mu
597. y e Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys fans or other parts that move when the engine is started or running i Do not tow start the vehicle T Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit If the engine does not run after several unsuc cessful starting attempts have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalyt ic converter Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still at tached to a battery A Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries gt page 528 Warning The jump start contacts are located in the engine compartment 1 Negative terminal 2 Positive terminal 3 Positive terminal cover gt Make sure the two vehicles do not touch Turn off all electrical consumers Apply parking brake gt page 67 gt Set automatic transmission to position P gt page 191 Open the hood gt page 378 Remove cover from negative terminal Q gt Flip up cover 3 of positive terminal 2 in direction of arrow 1 Negative terminal of discharged b
598. y be ad justed on cold tires The tires can be con sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km Tires and wheels Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling tread life and riding comfort In addition to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar also consult the tire inflation pressure label if available on the fuel filler flap gt page 374 for any additional infor mation pertaining to special driving situa tions For more information see Important notes on tire inflation pressure gt page 394 Operation Tires and wheels amp Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration purposes only Tire data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle TIRE AND LOAI SEE OWNER S P195 70R14 200KPA 29PS1 MANUAL FOR Rear pigs 7oru zoca orsi LD TON P40 00 2064 31 1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight The tire in
599. you and others Warning Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified gt Press button gt page 216 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing gt Press button gt page 216 again The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer Controls in detail BE if the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned off Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Residual heat and ventilation S a With the engine switched off it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine a How long the system will provide heating depends on e the coolant temperature e the battery voltage Regardless of the temperature and air volume set on the climate control panel the interior tem perature is set to 72 F 22 C and the blower runs on low speed to protect the vehicle battery Climate control Activating gt S
600. you use the jack for any other purpose you or others could be injured as the jack is designed only for the purpose of changing a wheel Warning When using the jack observe the safety notes in the Mounting the spare wheel section gt page 520 and the notes on the jack The vehicle jack is located underneath the cargo compartment floor Practical hints Screw type vehicle jack Before storing the vehicle jack in its stor age compartment e The vehicle jack should be fully collapsed eid e The handle must be folded in storage position Scissors type vehicle jack P40 10 4047 31 Storage position gt Turncrank handle in the direction of arrow as far as it will go P40 10 4902 31 Storage position gt Take the reversible ratchet out of the vehicle tool kit j P40 10 4048 31 Operational position gt Turn crank handle clockwise Where will I find P40 10 4903 31 Operational position 1 Scissors type vehicle jack 2 Reversible ratchet gt Attach reversible ratchet 2 to vehicle jack in such a way that the word UP can be seen Before storing the vehicle jack in its stor age compartment e t should be fully collapsed storage position e The ratchet must be removed Practical hints Where will I find Setting up the collapsible wheel chock Tilt both plates upward Q Spare wheel The collapsible wheel chock serves to ad Fold
601. ystem OCS 81 Cigarette lighter Depending on vehicle configuration 323 Climate control 214 Air conditioning refrigerant 563 Air conditioning Cooling 224 225 Air distribution Front 219 Air distribution rear 227 Air recirculation mode 222 Air vents second row seats 220 Air vents Front 220 Air volume 220 Control panel Rear 226 Control panel Front 216 Deactivating system 218 Defogging 222 Defrosting 221 Rear window defroster 212 Residual engine heat REST 225 Clock 27 174 Cloth upholstery Cleaning and care of 434 Cockpit 24 Cockpit Management and Data System see COMAND System Cold tire inflation pressure 416 Collapsible wheel chock 494 COMAND System see separate operating instructions Combination switch 61 62 64 147 Compass 344 Adjustment 178 Calibration 179 Calling up the compass 344 Control and operation of radio transmitters 370 Control system 155 Multifunction display 155 Multifunction steering wheel 156 Resetting to factory default 169 Control system submenus Control system menus 155 AUDIO 164 DISTRONIC Canada only 167 NAV 166 Off road 166 Settings 168 Standard display 162 TEL 186 Trip computer 184 Vehicle configuration 182 Vehicle status message memory 167 159 161 171 Comfort 181 Instrument cluster Lighting 175 Time Date 174 Vehicle 178 172 173 Coolant 381 567 Anticorrosion antifreeze mixing ratio and quantity 568 Capacities 562 Checking coolant level

Mercedes Benz 2008 GL 320 CDI User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents